<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?><rss xmlns:dc="http://purl.org/dc/elements/1.1/" xmlns:content="http://purl.org/rss/1.0/modules/content/" xmlns:atom="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom" version="2.0" xmlns:media="http://search.yahoo.com/mrss/"><channel><title><![CDATA[Wright Balance Technology Instructions]]></title><description><![CDATA[Wright Balance Technology Professional Manual Repository]]></description><link>https://instructions.wrightbalance.com/</link><image><url>https://instructions.wrightbalance.com/favicon.png</url><title>Wright Balance Technology Instructions</title><link>https://instructions.wrightbalance.com/</link></image><generator>Ghost 1.21</generator><lastBuildDate>Wed, 03 Jun 2026 21:21:17 GMT</lastBuildDate><atom:link href="https://instructions.wrightbalance.com/rss/" rel="self" type="application/rss+xml"/><ttl>60</ttl><item><title><![CDATA[Wright Balance® Certification Level 1]]></title><description><![CDATA[<div class="kg-card-markdown"><p>Copyright, Wright Balance® 2026</p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p>&quot;The man who asks a question is a fool for a minute; the man who does not asks is a fool for life.&quot;  Confucius circa 575 BC</p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p>•	8 :00 A M - 8:30 AM</p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p>Arrival &amp; Registration Coffee / Tea</p>
<blockquote>
<p>This certification is 90%</p></blockquote></div>]]></description><link>https://instructions.wrightbalance.com/wright-balance-certification-level-1-draft-2/</link><guid isPermaLink="false">6a08944f33f75d000162ae72</guid><dc:creator><![CDATA[David F. Wright]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Sat, 16 May 2026 16:00:49 GMT</pubDate><content:encoded><![CDATA[<div class="kg-card-markdown"><p>Copyright, Wright Balance® 2026</p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p>&quot;The man who asks a question is a fool for a minute; the man who does not asks is a fool for life.&quot;  Confucius circa 575 BC</p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p>•	8 :00 A M - 8:30 AM</p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p>Arrival &amp; Registration Coffee / Tea</p>
<blockquote>
<p>This certification is 90% hands-on and 100% focused on validated results. Every principle you learn is anchored in measurable biomechanical changes. You won't just study the theory. you and your students will experience an immediate Proof of Concept through real-time balance experience.</p>
</blockquote>
<p>Wright Balance is an evolving disruptive technology driven by continuous global research. Please ensure you are signed up for our monthly updates to receive the latest insights and content.</p>
<blockquote>
<p><strong>Teaching aids provided</strong>: Harvey Penick Grip Trainer; Bar &amp; Bungee for hip line balance measurement and Vinyl Strip with Balance Measurements by Core. Grip Trainer Clip for indicating changes in clubface with changes in balance.</p>
</blockquote>
<p>•	8:30 AM</p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h1 id="introduction">Introduction</h1>
<p>Your Student’s History, Goals and Physical Status and Lesson 1 Reference</p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p><a href="https://instructions.wrightbalance.com/wright-balance-lesson-february-2025/">https://instructions.wrightbalance.com/wright-balance-lesson-february-2025/</a></p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p><strong>Testing The 3 Core Zones of Wright Balance®</strong></p>
<blockquote>
<p><strong>NOTE</strong>: Core Zone Testing is a measure of the individual's strength.  Strength is present only in one of the three Core Zone</p>
</blockquote>
<p><strong>Observations of Strength Measurements worldwide</strong></p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p><strong>MEN</strong></p>
<blockquote>
<p>60 Percent Upper;<br>
30 Percent Middle:<br>
10 Percent Lower (N of 250)</p>
</blockquote>
<p><strong>WOMEN</strong></p>
<blockquote>
<p>25 Percent Upper<br>
50 Percent Middle<br>
25 Percent Lower (N of 125)</p>
</blockquote>
<p>•	9:00 AM</p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h1 id="attachingthebarbungee">Attaching the Bar &amp; Bungee</h1>
<p>By securing the Bar &amp; Bungee 2-3 inches below the belt buckle, we isolate the lower pelvis. This allows the student and you to see hip rotation in various stance widths and the predictability of  hip squareness.</p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/H4LRSGc"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/H4LRSGc.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<h1 id="thewrightbalancepowertestsdeterminestrengthanddominantcorezone">The Wright Balance® Power Tests Determine Strength and Dominant Core Zone</h1>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h1 id="1testingpowerwithoutaclubineach8inchstancerangepsr">1. Testing Power Without A Club in Each 8-Inch Stance Range (PSR)</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>Each Core Zone has an 8-inch Stance Range where the player's hips are square.</p>
</blockquote>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/Nw6KiaW"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/Nw6KiaW.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/2cFVDCn"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/2cFVDCn.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p>The following video is a demonstration of the test of power without a club at 13, 18 and 26 inches.</p>
<iframe width="560" height="315" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/WAqKxhpDcxo?si=j2TqVdrnL8FOPtey" title="YouTube video player" frameborder="0" allow="accelerometer; autoplay; clipboard-write; encrypted-media; gyroscope; picture-in-picture; web-share" referrerpolicy="strict-origin-when-cross-origin" allowfullscreen></iframe>
<p><strong>The Power Test is Done as Follows:</strong></p>
<blockquote>
<p><strong>Note</strong>: The Power Test is done within the 8-Inch Performance Stance Range for each Core Zone.  The corresponding &quot;color&quot; stance width on the vinyl strip is of no consequence here.</p>
</blockquote>
<p><strong>Upper Core</strong>  = Test at 12 or 13 Inches</p>
<p><strong>Middle Core</strong>  = Test at 18 inches</p>
<p><strong>Lower Core</strong> = Test at 26 inches</p>
<p>Where your player shows the most power when tested is their Dominant Core Zone.  The confirmation of this test is in the following 8- inch range.</p>
<h1 id="2testingthefull8inchrangeusingthewrightbalancevinylstrip">2. Testing The Full 8-inch Range using the Wright Balance Vinyl Strip</h1>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h3 id="hipswillbesquareonlyinthetestedstancerangewherepowerwasdemonstrated">(Hips will be square ONLY in the &quot;tested&quot; Stance Range where Power was demonstrated)</h3>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p><strong>Upper Core</strong> Performance Stance Range (PSR) = 8 to 16 inches (plus or minus 1 inch)</p>
<blockquote>
<p>Balance will be on Balls of Feet as shown here</p>
</blockquote>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/zni2NBk"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/zni2NBk.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p><strong>Middle Core</strong> Performance Stance Range (PSR) = 16 to 24 inches (plus or minus 1 inch)</p>
<blockquote>
<p>Balance will be BEHIND the balls of feet and FORWARD of Center of Arches</p>
</blockquote>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/3in6Tq8"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/3in6Tq8.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<blockquote>
<p><strong>Lower Core</strong> (BLUE) Center of Arches</p>
</blockquote>
<p><strong>Lower Core</strong> Performance Stance Range (PSR) = 20 to 28 inches (plus or minus 1 inch)</p>
<blockquote>
<p>Balance will be over the Center of the Arches</p>
</blockquote>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/iACtBH9"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/iACtBH9.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<blockquote>
<p>Note: Step Narrower and Wider than your WB 8-INCH Performance Stance Range (PSR), add knee flex and note hip rotation.</p>
</blockquote>
<p>The following video was shot at San Antonio Country Club with one of the teach professionals during training.  This video is an illustration of determining the WB 8 inch Performance Stance Width Range (PSR).  As you will see in this video, Nick is a Middle Core player and his PSR is 16 to 24 inches.</p>
<iframe width="560" height="315" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/4om-6clbWdw?si=ivsYea0WG7qic_Ne" title="YouTube video player" frameborder="0" allow="accelerometer; autoplay; clipboard-write; encrypted-media; gyroscope; picture-in-picture; web-share" referrerpolicy="strict-origin-when-cross-origin" allowfullscreen></iframe>
<h1 id="3howtousethealignmentsticktotestheeltotoebalance">3. How to use the alignment stick to test Heel to Toe Balance</h1>
<blockquote>
<p><strong>Upper Core</strong> (RED) = Balance on Balls of Feet inside 8 to 16 inches plus or minus 1 inch</p>
</blockquote>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/zni2NBk"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/zni2NBk.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<blockquote>
<p><strong>Middle Core</strong> (BLACK) Balance just BEHIND the balls of feet and FORWARD of Center of Arches inside 16 to 24 inches plus or minus 1 inch</p>
</blockquote>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/3in6Tq8"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/3in6Tq8.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<blockquote>
<p><strong>Lower Core</strong> (BLUE) Balance over the Center of Arches inside 20 to 28 inches</p>
</blockquote>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/iACtBH9"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/iACtBH9.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<blockquote>
<p>Note: when Heel to Toe Balance on the alignment stick  does not match the Dominant Core Zone, your hips rotate open or closed.</p>
</blockquote>
<p>Note: The following 18 second video shows the second &quot;Plane&quot; of  balance based upon Heel to Toe movement through the core.  Note that the heel to toe balance changes by Core Zone consistent with these vertical illustrations.</p>
<p><a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=cL_9Y3cDdmU">https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=cL_9Y3cDdmU</a></p>
<iframe width="560" height="315" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/cL_9Y3cDdmU?si=M-O_z8_8YfxSEcrj" title="YouTube video player" frameborder="0" allow="accelerometer; autoplay; clipboard-write; encrypted-media; gyroscope; picture-in-picture; web-share" referrerpolicy="strict-origin-when-cross-origin" allowfullscreen></iframe>
<h3 id="visualizingtheverticalbalanceline">Visualizing the Vertical Balance Line</h3>
<p>The artist’s rendering below approximates the vertical balance profiles you will experience on the alignment stick within your 8-inch PSR:</p>
<ul>
<li>
<p><strong>RED</strong> (Upper Core): Forward balance position.</p>
</li>
<li>
<p><strong>BLACK</strong> (Middle Core): Centered balance position.</p>
</li>
<li>
<p><strong>BLUE</strong> (Lower Core): Back (Posterior) balance position.</p>
</li>
</ul>
<blockquote>
<p>Note: These images are conceptual approximations to assist with your visual understanding  and are not exact biomechanical blueprints.</p>
</blockquote>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/UKd4XUT"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/UKd4XUT.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<h1 id="4testingpowerspots">4. Testing POWER SPOTS</h1>
<blockquote>
<p><strong>NOTE:</strong>  The 8-INCH Performance Stance Range (PSR) and Power Spots will always Match</p>
</blockquote>
<p><strong>UPPER CORE</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>First Pad of Middle Finger of Lead and Trail Hands= POWER (Mark with Red Sharpie)<br>
PSR = 8 to 16 inches (plus or minus 1 inch)</li>
</ol>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/MLZaFvc"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/MLZaFvc.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p><strong>MIDDLE CORE</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>First Knuckle Crease of  Middle Finger of Lead and Trail Hands = POWER  (Mark with Black Sharpie)<br>
PSR = 16 to 24 inches (plus or minus 1 inch)</li>
</ol>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/FyUJAff"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/FyUJAff.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p><strong>LOWER CORE</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Second  Pad of Middle Finger of Lead and Trail Hands= POWER  (Mark with Blue Sharpie)<br>
PSR = 20 to 28 inches (plus or minus 1 inch)</li>
</ol>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/0OfLp70"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/0OfLp70.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<h3 id="powerspotsummary">POWER SPOT SUMMARY</h3>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/A3uyRU4"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/A3uyRU4.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/Tez5qgg"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/Tez5qgg.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<h1 id="thephysicaltestofpowerspots">The Physical Test of Power Spots</h1>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/pzNH9rz"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/pzNH9rz.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<blockquote>
<p><strong>Reference</strong><br>
Giving a First Lesson: Finding the Dominant Core Zone via Power, PSR &amp; Power Spots</p>
</blockquote>
<p><a href="https://instructions.wrightbalance.com/giving-a-first-lesson/">https://instructions.wrightbalance.com/giving-a-first-lesson/</a></p>
<h1 id="researchstudy2025">Research Study 2025</h1>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p>Puchinsky, G., Wright, D, &amp; Vomer, R.</p>
<blockquote>
<p><em><strong>Testing Balance on the Transverse Plane with Changes in Finger Pressure</strong></em></p>
</blockquote>
<p>Supported by The Mayo Clinic &amp; Pending Peer Review for Publication</p>
<p>•	9:45 AM</p>
<h1 id="thewrightbalancedownswingclubpathtestdpt">The Wright Balance® Downswing Club Path Test (DPT)</h1>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h2 id="theoriginofthewrightbalancedownswingclubpathtestdpt">The Origin of The Wright Balance® Downswing Club Path Test (DPT)</h2>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p>Research in Dr. Frank Jobe's biomechanics lab at Centinela Hospital in the early 2000s shed a precise light on the balance position at ground level and path with the putter. The following images were shot during the putting segment in the Biomechanics Lab.  Each player had 40 light sensors on their body, 1000 force sensors in their shoes and light sensors on the putter and irons.</p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/iU71hxo"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/iU71hxo.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/j7aA43x"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/j7aA43x.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/XpiuPBv"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/XpiuPBv.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p>When the putter path was observed as square to the line, the following balance image of the force / pressure sensors was present 100 percent of the time from address through the stroke to finish.</p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/uVdCYoH"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/uVdCYoH.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p>When the putter path was outside-in, this was a predictable observation at ground level <strong>before and after the stroke</strong>.  Note the position of heel to toe balance as shown by the force / pressure sensors.</p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/yXFOvOZ"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/yXFOvOZ.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p>When the putter path was inside - out, this was a predictable observation of the force / pressure sensors at ground level.  Note the position of heel to toe balance. Note the center of force / pressure forward in the left foot and back in the right foot.</p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/BFjBEvI"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/BFjBEvI.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p>These same observations were made in the full swing phase of this research.</p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/7mDvz3X"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/7mDvz3X.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p>The Wright Balance® Downswing Club Path Test (DPT) provides immediate feedback on the path the club will track through impact, putter through driver.  You are able to &quot;test&quot; by the hip line and immediately correct any phase of setup from grip to posture to sequence of motion.</p>
<h1 id="puttingthewrightbalancedownswingclubpathtest">Putting &amp; The Wright Balance® Downswing Club Path Test</h1>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<ol>
<li>Place Bar &amp; Bungee on Lower Pelvis</li>
<li>Mark Dominant Core Power Spot on middle finger of each hand with matching “COLOR” of Core Zone (RED= UPPER: BLACK= MIDDLE &amp; BLUE = LOWER)</li>
<li>Stand in your 8-inch Stance Range</li>
<li>Grip Putter with YOUR Power Spot on <strong>Underside</strong> of Putter Grip with your lead hand</li>
<li>Bring Putter up with shaft parallel to the ground so you can see face angle</li>
</ol>
<p>The following photos are of Colin Montgomerie in the Wright Balance® Biomechanics Studio in Southern California in 2020. Colin is an Upper Core Player. He is in his Performance Stance Range (8 to 16 inches).  Note in the following photo Colin is standing at 16 inches and his putter face is square.</p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/W6wdHoG"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/W6wdHoG.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p>When he stepped <strong>Wider than his Performance Stance Range (17 inches) his putter face closes</strong></p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/f1afQTc"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/f1afQTc.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h2 id="puttingstroke">Putting Stroke</h2>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<ol start="6">
<li>Hip Rotation = Putter Face Roll and Path at Impact</li>
<li>Step outside 8 inch range and make a stroke</li>
<li>Change to incorrect Power Spot on the underside of putter</li>
</ol>
<p>10:15 AM</p>
<h1 id="break">BREAK</h1>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p>10:30 AM</p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h1 id="resumecertification">Resume Certification</h1>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h1 id="gripsize">Grip Size</h1>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p>Set Power Spots in 8 inch Performance Stance Width Range (PSR) Swing to top and apply force on downswing path</p>
<blockquote>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/DnOKYKW"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/DnOKYKW.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
</blockquote>
<p>If grip does not fit, you will easily move the player off balance</p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/1D0R65O"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/1D0R65O.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p>If the grip fits, you won't be able to move them off balance</p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/n3IaIKY"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/n3IaIKY.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h2 id="imbalancesinthecommunity">Imbalances in the Community</h2>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/ii1oP6s"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/ii1oP6s.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h1 id="addwrightbalancebandstowristanklesandtestputtingstrokeonvsoff">Add Wright Balance® Bands to Wrist / Ankles and Test Putting Stroke On vs Off</h1>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h3 id="reference">Reference</h3>
<p>**Application of Pressure and the Propagation of Force: An Overview **</p>
<p><a href="https://instructions.wrightbalance.com/how-power-spots-create-propagation-of-force/">https://instructions.wrightbalance.com/how-power-spots-create-propagation-of-force/</a></p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h1 id="2026mastersscreenshots">2026 Masters Screen Shots</h1>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p><strong>Cameron Young</strong></p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/OLoHlo5"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/OLoHlo5.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p><strong>Hidecki Matsuyama</strong></p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/6JCTtIW"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/6JCTtIW.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p><strong>Shane Lowry</strong></p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/q45PIHJ"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/q45PIHJ.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p><strong>2026 Masters</strong></p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/oyNonmz"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/oyNonmz.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p><strong>Rory 2025</strong></p>
<blockquote>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/ZbyCRnA"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/ZbyCRnA.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
</blockquote>
<h3 id="nba80s">NBA 80s</h3>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/caoAOyi"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/caoAOyi.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p>Rick Berry</p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/TqtvAxf"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/TqtvAxf.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<blockquote>
<p><strong>Wrist vs Ankles</strong></p>
</blockquote>
<ol>
<li>Hip rotation standing and with knee flex</li>
<li>Level of hips and shoulders pre / post Wright Balance® bands on wrist and ankles</li>
<li>Trail hip at address pre and post Wright Balance® wrist / ankle bands without a club (Why no club? just for illustration...because open hip line = high trail hip at address)</li>
<li>Ability to squat</li>
<li>Step forward &amp; Back</li>
<li>Carrying Angle</li>
<li>Knee pronation / supination</li>
</ol>
<h2 id="resultofwrightbalancewristvsanklebandsonkineticchain">Result of Wright Balance® Wrist vs Ankle Bands on Kinetic Chain</h2>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/eVWyp1D"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/eVWyp1D.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a>e</p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h2 id="beforeafter">Before &amp; After</h2>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/pcWoboA"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/pcWoboA.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<h1 id="repeatgripsizewithwristanklebands">Repeat Grip Size with Wrist / Ankle Bands</h1>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p>Set Power Spots in 8 inch Performance Stance Width Range (PSR) Swing to top and apply force on downswing path</p>
<h1 id="gripsize">Grip Size</h1>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p>Set Power Spots in 8 inch Performance Stance Width Range (PSR) Swing to top and apply force on downswing path</p>
<blockquote>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/DnOKYKW"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/DnOKYKW.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
</blockquote>
<p>If grip does not fit, you will easily move the player off balance</p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/1D0R65O"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/1D0R65O.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p>If the grip fits, you won't be able to move them off balance</p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/n3IaIKY"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/n3IaIKY.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h1 id="putterpathstancewidthgripsizepowerspotsthedpt">Putter Path, Stance Width, Grip Size, Power Spots &amp; the DPT</h1>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<ol>
<li>Test Grip Size with &amp; without wrist / ankle bands</li>
<li>Testing Putter Path with wrist vs ankle bands</li>
<li>Stand tall after each stroke and notice that Putter face roll angle is perpendicular to your hip line regardless what putter is used</li>
</ol>
<p>11:30 AM</p>
<h1 id="theharveypenickgriptrainer">The Harvey Penick Grip Trainer</h1>
<p>The Harvey Penick Grip Trainer using the Downswing Club Path Test (DPT) in the 8-inch Performance Stance Range</p>
<h3 id="testingtheleadhandhipline">Testing the lead hand &amp; Hip Line</h3>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h3 id="addingtestingthetrailhandhipline">Adding &amp; Testing the Trail Hand &amp; Hip Line</h3>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h1 id="testinggripwitharmsdropshaftparalleltoground">Testing Grip With &quot;Arms Drop&quot; &amp; shaft parallel to ground</h1>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h2 id="references">References</h2>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h3 id="gripthegeniusofharveypenick">Grip: The Genius of Harvey Penick</h3>
<p><a href="https://instructions.wrightbalance.com/grip-the-genius-of-harvey-penick/">https://instructions.wrightbalance.com/grip-the-genius-of-harvey-penick/</a></p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h3 id="harveypenickgripwristcockparts13">Harvey Penick Grip &amp; Wrist Cock Parts 1-3</h3>
<p><a href="https://instructions.wrightbalance.com/october-13-zoom-session/">https://instructions.wrightbalance.com/october-13-zoom-session/</a></p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/eVWyp1D"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/eVWyp1D.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p><strong>12:30 PM</strong></p>
<h1 id="lunchbreak">LUNCH BREAK</h1>
<p><strong>1:15 PM</strong></p>
<h1 id="resumecertificationsummaryofamquestions">Resume Certification: Summary of AM &amp; Questions</h1>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h1 id="resettingthekineticchainwithextensionofthewrightbalancebands">Resetting the Kinetic Chain With Extension of the Wright Balance® Bands</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>Briefly stretch band on wrist or ankle to reset disrupted Core</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="carryingangle">Carrying Angle</h1>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h2 id="wrightbalancewristvsanklebandscarryingangle">Wright Balance® Wrist vs Ankle Bands &amp; Carrying Angle</h2>
<blockquote>
<p>It would take another day plus testing on your own to begin to understand the impact of the carrying angle on Posture, Grip, Power and repetition of the Carrying Angle through the swing. Understanding the Carrying Angle is of utmost importance in testing grip, setting posture and secondary tilt at address. These Four eBooks will get you up to speed on the carrying angle</p>
</blockquote>
<ol>
<li><strong>The Power of Wright Balance® Angles --The Carrying Angle</strong><br>
<a href="https://instructions.wrightbalance.com/ghost/#/editor/5e9a4a7e037bea000195d5a9">https://instructions.wrightbalance.com/ghost/#/editor/5e9a4a7e037bea000195d5a9</a></li>
</ol>
<h4 id="2thelowercoreplayercarryinganglepart1">2. The Lower Core Player: Carrying Angle Part 1</h4>
<p><a href="https://instructions.wrightbalance.com/carrying-angle-introduction/">https://instructions.wrightbalance.com/carrying-angle-introduction/</a></p>
<h4 id="3theuppercoreplayercarryinganglepart2">3.The Upper Core Player: Carrying Angle Part 2</h4>
<p><a href="https://instructions.wrightbalance.com/carrying-angle-the-upper-core-player/">https://instructions.wrightbalance.com/carrying-angle-the-upper-core-player/</a></p>
<h4 id="4themiddlecoreplayertigersunwittingadvantagecarryinganglepart3">4.The Middle Core Player &amp; Tiger's Unwitting Advantage: Carrying Angle Part 3</h4>
<p><a href="https://instructions.wrightbalance.com/carrying-angle-part-3-the-middle-core-player">https://instructions.wrightbalance.com/carrying-angle-part-3-the-middle-core-player</a></p>
<h1 id="testinggripsizewithandwithoutthewrightbalancebands">Testing Grip Size with and without the Wright Balance® Bands</h1>
<p>If the Wright Balance® Bands are worn on each wrist or each ankle, Grip Size is no longer an issue. Repeat Grip Size test <strong>with and without</strong> the Wright Balance® Bands.</p>
<p>If grip does not fit, you will easily move the player off balance</p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/1D0R65O"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/1D0R65O.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p>If the grip fits, they will be able to hold their posture with demonstrated stength and you won't be able to move them off balance.</p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/n3IaIKY"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/n3IaIKY.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<h1 id="postureofeachcorezone">Posture of each Core Zone</h1>
<p>The following illustration is from 2012 where I am using the weight with Sandra Palmer, LPGA Hall of Fame.  When a weight is held mid chest, it will naturally set the posture of any Core Zone when posture sequence is correct.  The bar shown in this image provides feedback on shoulder rotation.  Sandra is a Lower Core Player.  Note The level plane of her shoulders, a characteristic of the Lower Core Player.</p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/GfwpuBF"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/GfwpuBF.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<h2 id="introductionoffingersleeves">Introduction of Finger Sleeves</h2>
<blockquote>
<p>Does the same Power exist in all 3 Core Zones or ONLY the Dominant Core Zone?</p>
</blockquote>
<ol>
<li>**Move Sleeve to Upper Core Power Spot (one finger of each hand):Test again at 12 - 13 inches</li>
<li>Move Sleeve to Middle Core Power Spot (one finger of each hand): Test again at 18 inches</li>
<li>Move Sleeve to Lower Core Power Spot (one finger of each hand): Test again at 26 inches**</li>
</ol>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p>Power is the same w</p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h2 id="uppercore">Upper Core</h2>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p><strong>Bar on hips</strong><br>
<strong>Finger Sleeve:</strong>: Place on first pad on 1 finger of each hand<br>
<strong>Stance</strong>: 8 to 16 inches<br>
<strong>Alignment Stick:</strong> You will find your balance  over or just forward of the balls of the feet until hips square<br>
<strong>Posture</strong>: No knee flex; Bend from hips &amp; set spine angle; Add knee flex after spine angle is set.<br>
<strong>Wright Balance® Downswing Club Path Test</strong> (DPT): Stand tall, return facing target line looking straight ahead and add knee flex.  If hips are square, your Posture was perfect.  If hips are open or closed, repeat Posture Set until the Wright Balance Downswing Club Path Test (DPT) results in a square hip line.</p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h2 id="middlecore">Middle Core</h2>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p><strong>Bar on hips</strong><br>
<strong>Finger Sleeve:</strong>: Place on first knuckle up from the palm on 1 finger of each hand<br>
<strong>Stance</strong>: 16 to 24 inches<br>
<strong>Alignment Stick:</strong> Just behind the balls of the feet and forward of center of Arches until hips square<br>
<strong>Posture</strong>: Set &quot;everything together&quot; in a simultaneous set of Upper and Lower Core<br>
<strong>Wright Balance® Downswing Club Path Test</strong> (DPT): Stand tall, return facing target line looking straight ahead and add knee flex.  If hips are square, your Posture was perfect.  If hips are open or closed, repeat Posture Set until the Wright Balance Downswing Club Path Test (DPT) results in a square hip line.</p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h2 id="lowercore">Lower Core</h2>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p><strong>Bar on hips</strong><br>
<strong>Finger Sleeve:</strong>: Place on second pad up from the palm on 1 finger of each hand<br>
<strong>Stance</strong>: 20 to 28 inches Wide<br>
<strong>Alignment Stick:</strong> Balance is over the center of the Arches until hips square<br>
<strong>Posture</strong>: Stand Tall; Keep spine straight &amp; &quot;sit down&quot;; add spine angle after sitting down (Spine angle and thigh angle will be identical)<br>
<strong>Wright Balance® Downswing Club Path Test</strong> (DPT): Stand tall, return facing target line looking straight ahead and add knee flex.  If hips are square, your Posture was perfect.  If hips are open or closed, repeat Posture Set until the Wright Balance Downswing Club Path Test (DPT) results in a square hip line.</p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p><strong>1:30 PM</strong></p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p>Angles of Power by Core Zone (eBooks: The Carrying Angle by Core Zone)</p>
<p>•	<br>
Recognizing Sequence of Motion (kinematic sequence) in your student by Center of Mass &amp; Lead Knee at the top of the swing (eBook)</p>
<p><strong>2:00 PM</strong></p>
<h1 id="sequenceofmotionbycorezoneandthewrightbalancedownswingclubpathtestdpt">Sequence of Motion by Core Zone &amp; and the Wright Balance® Downswing Club Path Test (DPT)</h1>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p>&quot;Prescribing&quot; Sequence of Motion for your Student by Core Zone and Testing Using the Wright Balance® Downswing Club Path Test (DPT)</p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<blockquote>
<p>**NOTE: Test each Core Zone by placing 1 Finger Sleeve  on the Core Zone  Power Spot of each hand **</p>
</blockquote>
<h2 id="uppercore">Upper Core</h2>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p><strong>Bar on hips</strong><br>
<strong>Finger Sleeve:</strong>: Place on first pad on 1 finger of each hand<br>
<strong>Stance</strong>: 8 to 16 inches<br>
<strong>Posture</strong>: No knee flex; Bend from hips &amp; set spine angle; Add knee flex after spine angle is set<br>
<strong>Start Motion</strong> with lead knee or trail hip<br>
<strong>Pivot</strong>: Center of Mass is over Target Side<br>
<strong>Lead Knee</strong>: Points behind the ball at top of swing<br>
<strong>Wright Balance® Downswing Club Path Test</strong> (DPT): Stand tall, return facing target line looking straight ahead and add knee flex.  If hips are square, your process was perfect.  If hips are open or closed, repeat each phase of process Until DPT results in a square hip line.</p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h2 id="middlecore">Middle Core</h2>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p><strong>Bar on hips</strong><br>
<strong>Finger Sleeve:</strong>: Place on first knuckle up from the palm on 1 finger of each hand<br>
<strong>Stance</strong>: 16 to 24 inches<br>
<strong>Posture</strong>: Set &quot;everything together&quot; in a simultaneous set of Upper and Lower Core<br>
<strong>Start Motion</strong> with Simultaneous movement of Upper &amp; Lower Body (Everything together)<br>
<strong>Pivot</strong>: Center of Mass is over Pelvis<br>
<strong>Lead Knee</strong>: Points at ball at top of swing<br>
<strong>Wright Balance® Downswing Club Path Test</strong> (DPT): Stand tall, return facing target line looking straight ahead and add knee flex.  If hips are square, your process was perfect.  If hips are open or closed, repeat each phase of process Until DPT results in a square hip line.</p>
<h2 id="lowercore">Lower Core</h2>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p><strong>Bar on hips</strong><br>
<strong>Finger Sleeve:</strong>: Place on second pad up from the palm on 1 finger of each hand<br>
<strong>Stance</strong>: 20 to 28 inches Wide<br>
<strong>Alignment Stick:</strong> Balance is over the center of the Arches until hips square<br>
<strong>Posture</strong>: Stand Tall; Keep spine straight &amp; &quot;sit down&quot;; Add spine angle after sitting down (Spine angle and thigh angle will be identical<br>
<strong>Start Motion</strong> with Upper Body (shoulders only) and allow the Lower Body to release naturally after shoulders start the swing.<br>
<strong>Pivot:</strong> Center of Mass is over Trail Side<br>
<strong>Lead Knee:</strong> Points at ball at top of swing<br>
<strong>Wright Balance® Downswing Club Path Test</strong> (DPT): Stand tall, return facing target line looking straight ahead and add knee flex.  If hips are square, your process was perfect.  If hips are open or closed, repeat each phase of process Until DPT results in a square hip line.</p>
<h3 id="theleadkneecenterofmassbycorezonesequencingreference">The Lead Knee, Center of Mass by Core Zone Sequencing Reference:</h3>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p><em><strong>Matching Characteristics of Center of Mass,  Hip Turn and Lead Knee at the Top of the Swing by Core Zone</strong></em></p>
<p><a href="https://instructions.wrightbalance.com/stance-width-ranges-by-core-region/">https://instructions.wrightbalance.com/stance-width-ranges-by-core-region/</a></p>
<h2 id="shoulderrotationimpact">Shoulder Rotation Impact</h2>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/E2jnaPk"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/E2jnaPk.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/assKOag"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/assKOag.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/8m9YoRK"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/8m9YoRK.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<h2 id="the3swingmodelsofwrightbalance">The 3 Swing Models of Wright Balance®</h2>
<p><strong>Reference</strong></p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p><strong>The Three Swings of Wright Balance®</strong></p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p><a href="https://instructions.wrightbalance.com/the-three-swings-of-wright-balance/">https://instructions.wrightbalance.com/the-three-swings-of-wright-balance/</a></p>
<p>2:30 PM</p>
<p>The appearance of your students Kinetic Chain upon arrival (eBook images)<br>
Aligning your student’s kinetic chain for optimum performance and maximum Ground Reaction Force :<br>
The Wright Balance® Bands level the hips and shoulders and eliminate a high trail hip at address. The Wright Balance® Bands align the Kinetic Chain for improved body alignment, balance and injury prevention while minimizing soft tissue pain and maximizing ground reaction force</p>
<p>•	3:15 PM Shoulder Rotation and distance relationship (eBook, calculated by our resident Biophysicist, James M Smith, Ph.D)<br>
•	<br>
•	Arms position on the chest wall by Core Zone for Maximum Shoulder Rotation using the DPT Test Grip Sizing and Heel to Toe Balance using the DPT and alignment stick.<br>
•	<br>
•	How to eliminate the Grip Size Variable and the importance of Player Lesson Diaries (eBook &amp; Diaries Provided)</p>
<p><strong>References</strong></p>
<p><strong>Wright Balance® LESSON 1 (5.0)</strong></p>
<p><a href="https://instructions.wrightbalance.com/wright-balance-lesson-february-2025/">https://instructions.wrightbalance.com/wright-balance-lesson-february-2025/</a></p>
<p><strong>Clubface Must Look Open to be Square</strong></p>
<h1 id="setandreleaseoftheclubbycorezone">Set and Release of the Club by Core Zone</h1>
<p>Test with club, Finger Sleeves and in each Performance Stance Range.</p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h1 id="planeofshouldersbycorezone">Plane of shoulders by Core Zone</h1>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p>Bar on hips; No club; Test with Finger Sleeves in each Core Zone Performance Stance Range (PSR); Set Posture &amp; Sequence of Motion; hold at top of swing and note plane of shoulders; return to address and test Downswing Club Path (DPT)</p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<ul>
<li>Upper Core = Vertical  Shoulder Plane</li>
<li>Lower Core = Flat / Level  Shoulder Plane</li>
<li>Middle Core = Diagonal Shoulder Plane (between Upper &amp; Lower Core)</li>
</ul>
<h1 id="backpainsorenessstiffnessmanagement">Back Pain, Soreness &amp; Stiffness Management</h1>
<h2 id="thewrightbalanceexpress">The Wright Balance® Express</h2>
<p>The Wright Balance® Express is a result of 25 years of research on exercises that impact the core.  The following video is the most recent version of the Wright Balance® Exercise that squares the Core in all planes of motion creating the same Carrying Angle on both the left and right side.</p>
<iframe width="560" height="315" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/A0k1TSVGX8Q?si=euDHRUEi4a3HgJyH" title="YouTube video player" frameborder="0" allow="accelerometer; autoplay; clipboard-write; encrypted-media; gyroscope; picture-in-picture; web-share" referrerpolicy="strict-origin-when-cross-origin" allowfullscreen></iframe>
<h1 id="routinealignment">Routine &amp; Alignment</h1>
<p>The following eBook is a detailed overview of how to determine which hand to hold the club in behind the ball; a routine for how to walk into the ball and get set; and how to use your eyes to align to your target.  If your alignment is not set precisely, your body lines will likely cross in front or behind and you have set up to miss the shot.</p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p>I advise my students to test their alignment three (3) times each time before they begin their range practice.</p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p><a href="https://instructions.wrightbalance.com/alignment-2/">https://instructions.wrightbalance.com/alignment-2/</a></p>
<h1 id="mentalbalance">Mental Balance</h1>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h1 id="physicalbalance">Physical Balance</h1>
</div>]]></content:encoded></item><item><title><![CDATA[The Middle Core Player & Tiger's Unwitting Advantage: Carrying Angle Part 3]]></title><description><![CDATA[<div class="kg-card-markdown"><p>Copyright, Wright Balance® 2026</p>
<blockquote>
<p><em><strong>&quot;I hear and I forget.  I see and I remember.  I do and I understand.&quot;</strong></em><br>
Confucius circa 575 BC</p>
</blockquote>
<h2 id="howtousethisebook">How to use this eBook</h2>
<blockquote>
<p>I have edited the video of our May, 2026 Zoom session into 10 short videos, each followed by a brief</p></blockquote></div>]]></description><link>https://instructions.wrightbalance.com/carrying-angle-part-3-the-middle-core-player/</link><guid isPermaLink="false">69fdf5af33f75d000162ae45</guid><dc:creator><![CDATA[David F. Wright]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Sun, 10 May 2026 17:25:07 GMT</pubDate><content:encoded><![CDATA[<div class="kg-card-markdown"><p>Copyright, Wright Balance® 2026</p>
<blockquote>
<p><em><strong>&quot;I hear and I forget.  I see and I remember.  I do and I understand.&quot;</strong></em><br>
Confucius circa 575 BC</p>
</blockquote>
<h2 id="howtousethisebook">How to use this eBook</h2>
<blockquote>
<p>I have edited the video of our May, 2026 Zoom session into 10 short videos, each followed by a brief quiz.  Your time is valuable, I know.  If you have time to view each video, I would encourage you to do so.  If time is tight, take the quizzes following each video.  If you have no problem answering the quiz questions correctly, advance to the next quiz.  When you struggle with a quiz, watch the brief video.</p>
<p>Please know that this content will appear on your annual recertification exam.</p>
</blockquote>
<p><strong>Video 1</strong></p>
<h2 id="thedisadvantageofthelowercoreplayerviacrossinglines">The Disadvantage of the Lower Core Player via Crossing Lines</h2>
<p><strong>5 minutes</strong></p>
<iframe width="560" height="315" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/05qLwKu8Yu0?si=aZLUhafn-KXOwaJe" title="YouTube video player" frameborder="0" allow="accelerometer; autoplay; clipboard-write; encrypted-media; gyroscope; picture-in-picture; web-share" referrerpolicy="strict-origin-when-cross-origin" allowfullscreen></iframe>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<p><strong>True or False</strong></p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p>When a player's core is disrupted, they will always return to their Dominant Core Zone and their Dominant subregion.</p>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>True</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<p>What is/are the Lower Core players disadvantage (s) in the short game?</p>
<blockquote>
<ol>
<li>Crossing lines at address when the stance width is less than 20 inches</li>
<li>When the Lower Core Player is narrower than their 8 inch Stance Range</li>
<li>When the clubface opens or closes as a result of the stance width</li>
<li>All of the above</li>
<li>None of the above</li>
</ol>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<ol start="4">
<li>All of the above</li>
</ol>
</blockquote>
<h2 id="levelingtheplayingfieldforthelowercoreplayer">Leveling the Playing Field for the Lower Core Player</h2>
<p><strong>Video 2</strong></p>
<p><strong>5 minutes</strong></p>
<iframe width="560" height="315" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/P1B5bHfG5_U?si=B4WJciVX1hyos1fO" title="YouTube video player" frameborder="0" allow="accelerometer; autoplay; clipboard-write; encrypted-media; gyroscope; picture-in-picture; web-share" referrerpolicy="strict-origin-when-cross-origin" allowfullscreen></iframe>
>
# Question
>
When the **Lower Core** player stands on an alignment stick, what heel to toe balance do they experience?
<ol>
<li>Over the balls of the feet</li>
<li>Just behind the balls of the feet and forwarded of center of arches</li>
<li>Over the center of the arches</li>
<li>None of the above</li>
</ol>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<ol start="3">
<li>Over the center of the arches</li>
</ol>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<p><strong>True or False</strong></p>
<p>Each Core Zone can be square 0 to 36 inches</p>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>True</p>
</blockquote>
<p><strong>Video 3</strong></p>
<h2 id="howanyplayercandevelopashortgameadvantage">How any Player Can Develop a Short Game Advantage</h2>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p><strong>4 minutes &amp; 30 seconds</strong></p>
<iframe width="560" height="315" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/SnInaw3P0dQ?si=74nzBg_uayXeESmA" title="YouTube video player" frameborder="0" allow="accelerometer; autoplay; clipboard-write; encrypted-media; gyroscope; picture-in-picture; web-share" referrerpolicy="strict-origin-when-cross-origin" allowfullscreen></iframe>
<p><strong>Video 3</strong></p>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<p>What Core Zone balance position creates the easiest clearance of the hips?</p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<ol>
<li>Upper (Balls of Feet)</li>
<li>Middle (Behind Balls of Feet &amp; forward of Center of Arches)</li>
<li>Lower  (Over the Center of the Arches)</li>
</ol>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<ol start="3">
<li>Lower (Over the Center of the Arches)</li>
</ol>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<p><strong>True or False</strong></p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p>The only Core Zone that can have a short game advantage in Stance Width is the Middle Core Player</p>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>False</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<p>How can any player develop the same square hip line advantage as Tiger did in the short game?</p>
<ol>
<li>Being aware of their stance width</li>
<li>By having the correct grip change in each stance width</li>
<li>By having the same posture in each stance width</li>
<li>None of the above</li>
</ol>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<ol start="4">
<li>None of the above<br>
The advantage is created by taping the two <strong>non dominant</strong> Power Spots on the trail hand.  However, the carrying angle will be the same ONLY in 3 stance widths of the 8 inch Performance Stance Range.  Following the Wright Balance® Express, the carrying angle is the same in all stance widths of the 8 inch range.</li>
</ol>
</blockquote>
<p><strong>VIDEO 4</strong></p>
<h2 id="thewrightbalanceexpressinamiddlecorestancewidthandtheresultingeightinchperformancerangepsr">The Wright Balance® Express in a Middle Core Stance Width and the Resulting Eight Inch Performance Range (PSR)</h2>
<p>4 Minutes</p>
<iframe width="560" height="315" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/CuesFN8uasg?si=P3LGJGSnB4wFei9R" title="YouTube video player" frameborder="0" allow="accelerometer; autoplay; clipboard-write; encrypted-media; gyroscope; picture-in-picture; web-share" referrerpolicy="strict-origin-when-cross-origin" allowfullscreen></iframe>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<p>How long does it take to do the Wright Balance® Express?</p>
<ol>
<li>One Minute</li>
<li>Two Minutes</li>
<li>Five Minutes</li>
<li>Ten Minutes</li>
</ol>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<ol start="2">
<li>Two Minutes</li>
</ol>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<p>What was my new Stance Width Performance Range following the Wright Balance® Express in a Middle Core Stance Width?</p>
<ol>
<li>0 to 24 inches</li>
<li>8 to 16 inches</li>
<li>0 to 16 inches</li>
<li>16 to 24 inches</li>
</ol>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<ol start="4">
<li>16 to 24 inches</li>
</ol>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<p>When I stood on an alignment stick, how did my &quot;new&quot; Middle Core balance  change my heel to toe balance compared to my Lower Core Stance Width Performance Range?</p>
<ol>
<li>Balance is balance.  There was no change</li>
<li>I moved to the balls of my feet</li>
<li>I moved just behind the balls of my feet &amp; forward of the center of my arches.</li>
<li>I moved toward my heels</li>
</ol>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<ol start="3">
<li>I moved just behind the balls of my feet &amp; forward of the center of my arches.</li>
</ol>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="tigersunwittingadvantage">Tiger's Unwitting Advantage</h1>
<blockquote>
<p><strong>Video 5</strong><br>
4 minutes &amp; 30 seconds</p>
</blockquote>
<iframe width="560" height="315" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/6KiR-1FacPA?si=RB4hWjyNL6B_fmS1" title="YouTube video player" frameborder="0" allow="accelerometer; autoplay; clipboard-write; encrypted-media; gyroscope; picture-in-picture; web-share" referrerpolicy="strict-origin-when-cross-origin" allowfullscreen></iframe>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<p>What was Tiger's advantage?</p>
<ol>
<li>Short Game</li>
<li>A shot from any Stance Width below 16 inches</li>
<li>The tape on the middle finger of his trail hand</li>
<li>His Performance Stance Width Range (PSR) was 0 to 24 inches</li>
<li>All of the above</li>
</ol>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<ol start="5">
<li>All of the above</li>
</ol>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<p>What happens to a Middle Core Player who sets up to hit a shot at 10 inches without Tiger's advantage?</p>
<p>1, There hips and shoulder will not be parallel<br>
2. Their clubface will open or close<br>
3. Their club path will be outside -in or inside-out<br>
4. All of the above</p>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<ol start="4">
<li>All of the above</li>
</ol>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<p>What happened when Tiger placed tape on <strong>BOTH</strong> his middle finger and ring finger Upper Core Power Spots?</p>
<ol>
<li>He was square from 0 to 36 inches</li>
<li>He was square from 0 to 24 inches</li>
<li>He was square from 16 to 24 inches</li>
<li>Nothing changed</li>
</ol>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<ol start="3">
<li>He was square from 16 to 24 inches... adding the tape to any 2 fingers next to each other eliminated his advantage and he returned to the Middle Core 16 to 24 inch range.</li>
</ol>
</blockquote>
<h2 id="thedisadvantagesofthemiddlecoreamateurtourplayer">The Disadvantages of the Middle Core Amateur &amp; Tour Player</h2>
<blockquote>
<p><strong>Video 6</strong><br>
3 Minutes</p>
</blockquote>
<iframe width="560" height="315" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/orEy2sPv248?si=ljA1dIP3ZsCRLX1V" title="YouTube video player" frameborder="0" allow="accelerometer; autoplay; clipboard-write; encrypted-media; gyroscope; picture-in-picture; web-share" referrerpolicy="strict-origin-when-cross-origin" allowfullscreen></iframe>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p>The Middle Core Players Performance Stance Range (PSR) is:</p>
<ol>
<li>0 to 16 inches</li>
<li>16 to 24 inches</li>
<li>8 to 16 inches</li>
<li>20 to 28 inches</li>
</ol>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<ol start="2">
<li>16 to 24 inches</li>
</ol>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<p>What happens when the Middle Core Player sets up at 12 inches?</p>
<ol>
<li>Their shoulders and hips cross behind or in front</li>
<li>Their clubface opens or closes</li>
<li>Their club path is not on plane</li>
<li>Their shot will likely be thin or fat</li>
<li>All of the above</li>
</ol>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<ol start="5">
<li>All of the above</li>
</ol>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<p>How can a Middle Core player gain Tiger's advantage from 0 to 16 inches?</p>
<ol>
<li>Do the Wright Balance Express in a Middle Core Stance Width</li>
<li>Place tape on the Upper Core Power Spot of their trail hand Middle finger</li>
<li>Place tape on the Upper and Middle Core Power Spots of any 2 fingers not next to each other on their trail hand</li>
<li>All of the above</li>
</ol>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<ol start="4">
<li>All of the above</li>
</ol>
</blockquote>
<h2 id="thewrightbalanceexpresstooshallowacarryinganglefordeliverytotheball">The Wright Balance® Express &amp; &quot;Too Shallow&quot; a Carrying Angle for Delivery to the Ball</h2>
<blockquote>
<p><strong>Video 7</strong><br>
2 Minutes</p>
</blockquote>
<iframe width="560" height="315" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/ms5vDLFix6g?si=47z2b35p93yXiqrP" title="YouTube video player" frameborder="0" allow="accelerometer; autoplay; clipboard-write; encrypted-media; gyroscope; picture-in-picture; web-share" referrerpolicy="strict-origin-when-cross-origin" allowfullscreen></iframe>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<p>How does the carrying angle impact the left and right hand grip?</p>
<ol>
<li>The carrying angle dictates the left and right hand grip on the club</li>
<li>The left and right hand grip will not be the same in the Middle Core Performance Stance Width Range (PSR)</li>
<li>The Wright Balance®  Express, when done in a Middle Core Stance Width, creates the same grip angle in the left and right hands</li>
<li>All of the above</li>
<li>None of the above</li>
</ol>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<ol start="4">
<li>All of the above</li>
</ol>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<p>How can you easily check the left and right arm carrying angle to see if they are different?</p>
<ol>
<li>You must use a digital protractor</li>
<li>Go to a squat position and rotate your forearms forward</li>
<li>Place your arms across your shoulders and check your ability to rotate back and through in the Middle Core Performance Stance Width Range (PSR)</li>
<li>Set your Middle Core Posture and then check your ability to rotate back and through in your Middle Core Performance Stance Width Range (PSR)</li>
</ol>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<ol start="2">
<li>Go to a squat position and rotate your forearms forward</li>
</ol>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<p>What impact does the Wright Balance® Express have in a Middle Core Stance Width have on the left and right hand grip?</p>
<ol>
<li>The Left and Right hand grip are identical</li>
<li>The left hand is  rotated more clockwise</li>
<li>The right hand is rotated more clockwise</li>
<li>Both the left and right hand grip are rotated more counterclockwise</li>
</ol>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<ol>
<li>The Left and Right hand grip are identical</li>
</ol>
</blockquote>
<h2 id="creatingamoredesirabledeliverytotheballusingawiderstancewidthforthewrightbalanceexpress">Creating a More Desirable Delivery to the Ball Using a Wider Stance Width for the Wright Balance®  Express</h2>
<blockquote>
<p><strong>Video 8</strong><br>
7 Minutes</p>
</blockquote>
<iframe width="560" height="315" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/1VaR-Vc7HsM?si=KWIR5Sib2fCGIa0U" title="YouTube video player" frameborder="0" allow="accelerometer; autoplay; clipboard-write; encrypted-media; gyroscope; picture-in-picture; web-share" referrerpolicy="strict-origin-when-cross-origin" allowfullscreen></iframe>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<p>How did I move my Carrying Angle from 161 degrees to 155 degrees?</p>
<ol>
<li>By stretching</li>
<li>By doing the Wright Balance® Express at 16 inches</li>
<li>By doing the Wright Balance® Express at 10 inches</li>
<li>By doing the Wright Balance® Express at 28 inches</li>
</ol>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<ol start="4">
<li>By doing the Wright Balance® Express at 28 inches</li>
</ol>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<p>True or False</p>
<p>When I did the Wright Balance® Express at 28 inches, my heel to toe balance was the same as it was when I did the Wright Balance® Express at 10 inches.</p>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>False<br>
When you do the Wright Balance® Express in a wider stance width within your Core Zone, you will move back in heel to toe balance, your posture will be &quot;deeper&quot; and your grip will get stronger</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<p>What happened to my shoulder rotation after I did the Wright Balance® Express at 28 inches and tested my grip at 161 degrees, the carrying angle created by doing the Wright Balance Express at 10 inches?</p>
<ol>
<li>I still had full rotation back and through</li>
<li>I was stuck in the backswing only</li>
<li>I was stuck in the through swing only</li>
<li>I was stuck in the backswing and through swing</li>
</ol>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<ol start="4">
<li>I was stuck in the backswing and through swing. The Wright Balance®  Express at 28 inches moved my carrying angle to 155 degree.When I moved the digital protractor to 155 degrees and tested my grip, I had full freedom of motion in the backswing and throught swing.</li>
</ol>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<p>What happened to my grip when my Carrying Angle was the same on both sides.</p>
<ol>
<li>There were no changes in my grip</li>
<li>My left and right hand grip were the same</li>
<li>My left hand grip was stronger than my right</li>
<li>My right hand grip was stronger than my left</li>
</ol>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<ol start="2">
<li>My left and right hand grip were the same</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Video 9</strong></p>
</blockquote>
<p>6 Minutes</p>
<h2 id="creatingabalancedsetupusinga155degreecarryinganglepart1">Creating a Balanced Setup Using a 155 Degree Carrying Angle Part 1</h2>
<iframe width="560" height="315" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/7nqilUOf-ls?si=DX8K0K9JuaeAfXCK" title="YouTube video player" frameborder="0" allow="accelerometer; autoplay; clipboard-write; encrypted-media; gyroscope; picture-in-picture; web-share" referrerpolicy="strict-origin-when-cross-origin" allowfullscreen></iframe>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<p>What happened to the Middle Core thigh angle at address following the Wright Balance® Express at 28 inches?</p>
<ol>
<li>The Middle Core thigh angle is the same in all Core Zones</li>
<li>The Middle Core thigh angle was 155 degrees</li>
<li>The Middle Core thigh angle was 161 degrees</li>
<li>None of the above</li>
</ol>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<ol start="2">
<li>The Middle Core thigh angle was 155 degrees</li>
</ol>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<p>When the he left and right hand grip are set correctly and the arms are dropped to the chest wall, what happens?</p>
<ol>
<li>The shaft sets at exactly 45 degrees to the ground</li>
<li>The spine angle is set at 155 degrees</li>
<li>The thigh angle is set at 161 degrees</li>
<li>The shaft is parallel to the ground</li>
</ol>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<ol start="4">
<li>The shaft is parallel to the ground<br>
<strong>Note</strong>:  This is an important observation as it is quite simple to see if your grip is accurate at address.  If you don't have the correct power spot set on the underside of the grip or if your grip is a bit too weak or too strong in one hand, the shaft will not be parallel to the ground and your will feel the difference in pressure on your elbows created when your arms drop.  The shaft will be pointed up or down, not parallel to the ground..</li>
</ol>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<p>What did the cereal box example show with regard to angles</p>
<ol>
<li>It showed that the shoulder angle would be 155 when the secondary tilt was set</li>
<li>It showed that the hip line would be 155 degrees when the secondary tilt was set</li>
<li>It showed that the spine angle would be 155 degrees when the secondary tilt was set</li>
<li>All of the above</li>
<li>None of the above</li>
</ol>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<ol start="4">
<li>All of the above</li>
</ol>
<h2 id="creatingabalancedsetupusinga155degreecarryinganglepart2">Creating a Balanced Setup Using a 155 Degree Carrying Angle Part 2</h2>
<blockquote>
<p><strong>Video 10</strong><br>
3 Minutes</p>
</blockquote>
<iframe width="560" height="315" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/RZJ8JkdbB48?si=gjNfj2ZFF-FuGg47" title="YouTube video player" frameborder="0" allow="accelerometer; autoplay; clipboard-write; encrypted-media; gyroscope; picture-in-picture; web-share" referrerpolicy="strict-origin-when-cross-origin" allowfullscreen></iframe>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<p>As a definition, the Carrying Angle is:</p>
<ol>
<li>The angle of the finish position in the golf swing</li>
<li>The angle of the carry strap on your golf bag when you pick up your bag.</li>
<li>The angle of your stride when walking</li>
<li>The angle of range of motion through the body</li>
</ol>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<ol start="4">
<li>The angle of range of motion through the body</li>
</ol>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<p>When the angles of the arms on the chest wall or grip do not match the carrying angle</p>
<ol>
<li>There is no affect until impact</li>
<li>There is a restriction of shoulder rotation in the backswing or through swing</li>
<li>There is no change through the swing</li>
<li>None of the above</li>
</ol>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<ol start="2">
<li>There is a restriction of shoulder rotation in the backswing and / or through swing</li>
</ol>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="question">Question********</h1>
<p>When I grip the club, point it upward at 45 degrees and drop my arms, what is &quot;created&quot; if my grip is GOOD?</p>
<ol>
<li>My forearms, when measured 90 degrees to the ground, equals my carrying angle</li>
<li>My upper arms from my elbow to my shoulder, when measured 90 degrees to the ground, equals my carrying angle</li>
<li>Balance is created</li>
<li>None of the above</li>
</ol>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<ol start="2">
<li>My upper arms from my elbow to my shoulder, when measured 90 degrees to the ground, equals my carrying angle</li>
</ol>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<p>What is a simple test to determine if I have a good left and right hand grip on the club while standing in my Performance Stance Width Range (PSR)?</p>
<ol>
<li>Hit balls and check to see if I have center face contact</li>
<li>My ball flight will be on line and straight</li>
<li>When I drop my arms from 45 degrees, the club shaft will be parallel to the ground</li>
<li>I will be able to work the ball left or right without difficulty</li>
</ol>
<h1 id=""></h1>
<p>Answer</p>
<blockquote>
<ol start="3">
<li>When I drop my arms from 45 degrees, the club shaft will be parallel to the ground</li>
</ol>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<p>As shown in this video, the Middle Core Player rotates to the top of the swing and</p>
<ol>
<li>Their center of mass (COM) is over the target side <strong>AND</strong> their lead knee points behind the ball</li>
<li>Their center of mass (COM) is over the pelvis <strong>AND</strong> their lead knee points at ball</li>
<li>Their center of mass (COM) is on the trail side <strong>AND</strong> their lead knee points in front of the ball</li>
<li>None of the above</li>
</ol>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<ol start="2">
<li>Their center of mass (COM) is over the pelvis <strong>AND</strong> their lead knee points at ball</li>
</ol>
</div>]]></content:encoded></item><item><title><![CDATA[Carrying Angle Part 2: The Upper Core Player]]></title><description><![CDATA[<div class="kg-card-markdown"><p>Copyright, Wright Balance® 2026</p>
<blockquote>
<p>&quot;<em>It's not what happens to you but how you react to it that matters</em>&quot;<br>
Epictetus 55 AD to 135 AD</p>
</blockquote>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h2 id="howtousethisebook">How to Use this eBook</h2>
<blockquote>
<p>I have edited the video of our March, 2026 Zoom session into 7 short videos, each followed by a</p></blockquote></div>]]></description><link>https://instructions.wrightbalance.com/carrying-angle-the-upper-core-player/</link><guid isPermaLink="false">69dfce7133f75d000162ae0c</guid><dc:creator><![CDATA[David F. Wright]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Sun, 19 Apr 2026 23:06:19 GMT</pubDate><content:encoded><![CDATA[<div class="kg-card-markdown"><p>Copyright, Wright Balance® 2026</p>
<blockquote>
<p>&quot;<em>It's not what happens to you but how you react to it that matters</em>&quot;<br>
Epictetus 55 AD to 135 AD</p>
</blockquote>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h2 id="howtousethisebook">How to Use this eBook</h2>
<blockquote>
<p>I have edited the video of our March, 2026 Zoom session into 7 short videos, each followed by a brief quiz.  Your time is valuable, I know.  If you have time to view each video, I would encourage you to do so.  If time is tight, take the quizzes following each video.  If you have no problem answering the quiz questions correctly, advance to the next quiz.  When you struggle with a quiz, watch the brief video.</p>
<p>Please know that this content will appear on your annual recertification exam.</p>
</blockquote>
<h2 id="thedisadvantageofthelowercoreplayerpart1">The Disadvantage of the Lower Core Player Part 1</h2>
<p>4 minutes &amp; 30 seconds</p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<iframe width="560" height="315" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/VEpGov5GkrA?si=CRKj1pgtLr4dWsUY" title="YouTube video player" frameborder="0" allow="accelerometer; autoplay; clipboard-write; encrypted-media; gyroscope; picture-in-picture; web-share" referrerpolicy="strict-origin-when-cross-origin" allowfullscreen></iframe>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>Is it Possible for a Lower Core Player to change their Core Zone to Upper Core?</p>
</blockquote>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>As a general rule, Yes.  However, to produce a 161 - 164 degree Carrying Angle the carrying angle to be tested at different Stance Widths of the Upper Core, perhaps in the narrowest stance width, 5 inches.</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p>Is it Possible for a Upper Core Player to change their Core Zone to Lower Core?</p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>That is highly unlikely since the beginning Carrying Angle is quite shallow (high 150 degrees to high 160 degrees)  When we get to increasing speed and rotation by combining Core Zones, you will want to move the Upper Core Player into the Lower Core<br>
range to increase ease of rotation.</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p>The Performance Stance Range (plus or minus 1 inch) for the Lower Core Player is:</p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<ol>
<li>17 to 25 inches</li>
<li>20 to 28 inches</li>
<li>16 to 24 inches</li>
<li>8 to 16 inches</li>
</ol>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<ol start="2">
<li>20 to 28 inches</li>
</ol>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<p>The Performance Stance Range -PSR- (plus or minus 1 inch) for the Upper Core Player is:</p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<ol>
<li>17 to 25 inches</li>
<li>20 to 28 inches</li>
<li>16 to 24 inches</li>
<li>8 to 16 inches</li>
</ol>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<ol start="4">
<li>8 to 16 inches</li>
</ol>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<p>Of the three (3) Core Zones, why does the Lower Core player have the greatest disadvantage in the short game?</p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/Hr1YLGy"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/Hr1YLGy.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p>As the Lower Core Player narrows their stance, their hip line opens or closes (generally opens) and their shoulder and stance lines cross either behind (from an open hip line) or in front (from a closed hip line).  As the hips and shoulders cross their grip continues to change and their internal rotation of their hands and club path changes.  The same thing happens with the Middle Core Players but to a lesser extent.</p>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<p>Other than Core Symmetry, what is the <strong>greatest</strong> impact the Carrying Angle has at address?</p>
<ol>
<li>Posture</li>
<li>Stance Width</li>
<li>Grip</li>
<li>Alignment</li>
</ol>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<ol start="3">
<li>Grip</li>
</ol>
</blockquote>
<h2 id="levelingtheplayingfieldforthelowercoreplayerpart2">Leveling the Playing Field for the Lower Core Player Part 2</h2>
<p>6 minutes &amp; 30 seconds</p>
<iframe width="560" height="315" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/D2LuwZyV-WI?si=3O_W2AAXThlCvHbA" title="YouTube video player" frameborder="0" allow="accelerometer; autoplay; clipboard-write; encrypted-media; gyroscope; picture-in-picture; web-share" referrerpolicy="strict-origin-when-cross-origin" allowfullscreen></iframe>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<p>When I added tape to my trail hand, which of the following <em><strong>DID NOT</strong></em> change?</p>
<ol>
<li>Hip Line from 0 to 36 inches</li>
<li>My hips squared for the short game</li>
<li>My Posture set was good in all stance widths</li>
<li>My grip was the same in both hands</li>
</ol>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<ol start="4">
<li>My grip was <strong>NOT</strong> the same in both hands due to the difference in the Carrying Angle on my left and right side prior to the Wright Balance® Express.</li>
</ol>
</blockquote>
<p>Since my Carrying Angle did not change, my left and right hand grip angles were not the same and <em><strong>DID NOT</strong></em> change and <em><strong>DID NOT</strong></em> match</p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p>How do I change my Carrying Angle so that I have Core Symmetry through my Kinetic Chain and my grip is the same angle in both my left and right hands?</p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>The Wright Balance® Express, when done in any stance width &quot;color&quot; with matching power spots in both hands will create the same carrying angle in both left and right arms and the angle of the grip will also be the same in the left and right hands.</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<p>What will disrupt my Core and return me to being square only in my Performance Stance Range (PSR) after placing tape on the Power Spots of my trail hand?</p>
<ol>
<li>A ring on my lead hand</li>
<li>Placing tape on any two fingers next to each other</li>
<li>Taping <em><strong>only</strong></em> my Dominant Core Power Spot on my trail hand</li>
<li>All of the above</li>
</ol>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<ol start="4">
<li>All of the above</li>
</ol>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>What is the last thing you should focus on in the first lesson?</p>
</blockquote>
<ol>
<li>Posture</li>
<li>Alignment</li>
<li>Stance Width</li>
<li>Grip</li>
</ol>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<ol start="4">
<li>Grip   Recall from the video that my trail hand was 4 degrees &quot;stronger&quot; (clockwise) than my right hand.  Your student may have found their &quot;neutral&quot; grip.  You don't want to change the grip until you begin with a yardstick or paint stick and, ideally, after the Wright Balance® Express.</li>
</ol>
</blockquote>
<h2 id="uppercorevideo3">Upper Core Video 3</h2>
<p>9 minutes &amp; 20 seconds</p>
<iframe width="560" height="315" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/0zFJQVzwmF8?si=dJmCl6Jy6ZijDVtv" title="YouTube video player" frameborder="0" allow="accelerometer; autoplay; clipboard-write; encrypted-media; gyroscope; picture-in-picture; web-share" referrerpolicy="strict-origin-when-cross-origin" allowfullscreen></iframe>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>When a player arrives without having done the Wright Balance® Express exercise and their Carrying Angle is not the same on the left arm as the right arm, what does this tell you?</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>The player's grip will not be the same on both sides.  Thus, the backswing or through swing will require an adjustment in the grip.</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>How can a Wright Balance® Professional adjust the grip to be certain their is no restriction in shoulder rotation in the backswing or through swing.</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>Place a bar on the player's hips and adjust each hand clockwise or counterclockwise until the hips are square. <em><strong>OR</strong></em>, more importantly, have the player do the Wright Balance® Express to create the same Carrying Angle and the angle of the grip in both hands.</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>What impact does doing the Wright Balance® Express in Upper Core Stance Widths at 35 inches vs 5 inches have on the Carrying Angle.</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>The wider the Stance Width when doing the Wright Balance® Express, the wider the Carrying Angle.  Thirty-five (35) inches for example might create a 156 degree Carrying angle and 5 inches might create 164 degrees.</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>If I want a very shallow Carrying Angle compared to what I currently have, I would do the Wright Balance® Express at a:</p>
</blockquote>
<ol>
<li>Wider Stance Width</li>
<li>Narrower Stance Width</li>
<li>3 inches Wider</li>
<li>None of the above</li>
</ol>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h2 id="answer">Answer</h2>
<blockquote>
<ol start="2">
<li>Narrower Stance Width</li>
</ol>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>An Upper Core Player wants to use more body in their golf swing and move from Upper Core to Lower Core by doing the Wright Balance® Express.  Is that possible?</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>It is highly unlikely that the Upper Core Dominant individual is able to create a Carrying Angle that would produce the under delivery to the ball of a Lower Core Player.  On the other hand, it is likely that a Lower Core Player can do the Wright Balance® Express in a narrow Upper Core Stance Width and create a shallow enough Carrying Angle and play as an Upper Core Player.  Why?  It is easier to reduce a Lower Core Carrying Angle to Upper Core than to increase an Upper Core Carrying Angle to Lower Core.  Anatomically it is more difficult.  However, don't let these comments stop you from testing the above.  Experience is the measurement of truth.</p>
</blockquote>
<h2 id="uppercorevideo4">Upper Core Video 4</h2>
<blockquote>
<p>5 minutes &amp; 30 seconds</p>
</blockquote>
<iframe width="560" height="315" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/QUo-RwUKy1k?si=PXx8OEOg_9H5jEwY" title="YouTube video player" frameborder="0" allow="accelerometer; autoplay; clipboard-write; encrypted-media; gyroscope; picture-in-picture; web-share" referrerpolicy="strict-origin-when-cross-origin" allowfullscreen></iframe>
>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>When I interlock my trail middle finger and my lead thumb, fully extend my arms and let my arms drop to my chest, what am I determining?</p>
</blockquote>
<ol>
<li>My Dominant Core Zone</li>
<li>My arms position and type of grip I will use</li>
<li>My ideal posture</li>
<li>My ideal knee flex</li>
</ol>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<ol start="2">
<li>My arms position and type of grip I will use</li>
</ol>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>My Upper Core 8 inch Performance Stance Range (PSR) is:</p>
</blockquote>
<p>1.16 to 24 inches<br>
2.12 to 20 inches<br>
3.8 to 16 inches<br>
4.10 to 18 inches</p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<ol start="3">
<li>8 to 16 inches</li>
</ol>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>If my Carrying Angle is not the same on both sides, how does that impact my setup to the ball?</p>
<ol>
<li>My secondary tilt will change depending on the club I am hitting</li>
<li>My stance width will not always be the same</li>
<li>There is no impact on my setup</li>
<li>My left and right hand grip will never be the same</li>
</ol>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<ol start="4">
<li>My left and right hand grip will never be the same</li>
</ol>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>Which Core Zone has the greatest advantage in the Short game?</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>The Uppoer Core since the Upper Core Player can narrow their stance to as little as 8 inches to hit a short shot.  The Middle Core Player can only be as narrow as 16 inches before the hips rotate and the clubface opens or closes.  The Lower Core Player can only be as narrow as 20 inches.  At 18 inches, the Lower Core Player's hips will open or close as will the clubface</p>
</blockquote>
<h2 id="uppercorevideo5">Upper Core Video 5</h2>
<p>.6 Minutes &amp; 52 seconds</p>
<iframe width="560" height="315" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/MZ-LGFTNGnk?si=k7HsCj8TqD1OjdGn" title="YouTube video player" frameborder="0" allow="accelerometer; autoplay; clipboard-write; encrypted-media; gyroscope; picture-in-picture; web-share" referrerpolicy="strict-origin-when-cross-origin" allowfullscreen></iframe>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>What happens to the Carrying Angle following the Wright Balance® Express?</p>
<ol>
<li>The Carrying Angle is the same on both sides</li>
<li>The Carrying Angle becomes greater</li>
<li>The Carrying Angle does nothing after the Wright Balance® Express</li>
<li>None of the above</li>
</ol>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<ol>
<li>The Carrying Angle is the same on both sides</li>
</ol>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>I am an Upper Core Player.  My Carrying Angle is 157 degrees.  What do I need to do to reduce my carrying angle to an Upper Core range of 161 to 164 degrees.</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>Do the Wright Balance® Express at narrower stance widths until I find the stance width that creates that 161 to 164 range.</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>The Carrying Angle is most easily tested by doing what?</p>
<ol>
<li>Placing your hand on a digital protractor and testing shoulder rotation</li>
<li>Use a long iron to determine delivery to the ball</li>
<li>Stand tall and turn your palms forward</li>
<li>None of the above</li>
</ol>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<ol>
<li>Placing your hand on a digital protractor and testing shoulder rotation</li>
</ol>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<p>What grip do I suggests will be the best grip for the Upper Core Player and Why?</p>
<ol>
<li>Butterfly</li>
<li>Complimentary</li>
<li>10 finger grip</li>
<li>It doesn't matter</li>
</ol>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<ol>
<li>
<ol>
<li>Butterfly   A Butterfly Grip produces what EA Tischler describes as a &quot;covering&quot; or &quot;on top&quot; delivery to the ball whereas a complimentary grip is more of a &quot;side cover&quot;.  An Upper Core player has more of an &quot;on top&quot; delivery to the ball.</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ol>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>How many degrees change in your Carrying Angle can you predict you will have for every stance width in your Dominant Core Zone.</p>
<ol>
<li>2 degrees</li>
<li>1.5 degrees</li>
<li>1 degree.</li>
<li>You need to test it to find out.  Everyone is different</li>
</ol>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<ol start="4">
<li>You need to test it to find out.  Everyone is different</li>
</ol>
</blockquote>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h1 id="video6">Video 6</h1>
<p>7 minutes and 14 seconds</p>
<iframe width="560" height="315" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/8QZzUfQ5RVs?si=ImxmlR5FyGMzgmNO" title="YouTube video player" frameborder="0" allow="accelerometer; autoplay; clipboard-write; encrypted-media; gyroscope; picture-in-picture; web-share" referrerpolicy="strict-origin-when-cross-origin" allowfullscreen></iframe>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>What is the purpose of the alignment stick as demonstrated in this video</p>
</blockquote>
<ol>
<li>Teaching heel to toe balance</li>
<li>Demonstrating Sequence of Motion and impact of loading the trail heel</li>
<li>Emphasizing the importance of using the Downswing Path Test</li>
<li>All of the above</li>
</ol>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<ol start="4">
<li>All of the above</li>
</ol>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>In this video I demonstrate loading the trail heel.  What does the Downswing Path Test (DPT) show when the trail heel is loaded.</p>
</blockquote>
<ol>
<li>The club path test shows the hips <strong>are</strong> square to the target line</li>
<li>The club path test shows the hips <strong>are not</strong> square to the target line</li>
<li>The club path test showed an open hip line</li>
<li>2 and 3 above</li>
</ol>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<ol start="4">
<li>2 and 3 above</li>
</ol>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>The Upper Core Player starts their backswing with</p>
<ol>
<li>The shoulders</li>
<li>Everything together</li>
<li>The lead knee ir trail hip</li>
<li>It doesn't matter</li>
</ol>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<ol start="3">
<li>The lead knee or trail hip</li>
</ol>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>What is the one of the most important things you should teach your student?</p>
<ol>
<li>Grip</li>
<li>Posture</li>
<li>Sequening of Motion</li>
<li>The Downswing Path Test (DPT)</li>
</ol>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<ol start="4">
<li>The Downswing Path Test (DPT)</li>
</ol>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>When gripping a yardstick or a golf club, the shaft should be paralell to the ground. Why?</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>The Carrying Angle will show up in the lead hand and shaft when the yardstick or golf club is gripped correctly and the arms position on the chest wall is correct.</p>
<p>When the club is gripped, the arms are firm and extended and drop to the chest, the shaft is naturally parallel to the ground and the Carrying Angle is created in the lead arm and shaft. When the shaft <strong>IS NOT</strong> parallel to the ground as the arms drop, there is an issue with the grip or arms position or both.   This is one of numerous places the Carrying Angle is set at address.  If this angle is not correct, the rest of the address positions will not match the Carrying Angle.</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="video7">Video 7</h1>
<p>4 minutes &amp; 42 seconds</p>
<iframe width="560" height="315" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/dGe5VZFxx0c?si=gir0-_EdqESyNNf6" title="YouTube video player" frameborder="0" allow="accelerometer; autoplay; clipboard-write; encrypted-media; gyroscope; picture-in-picture; web-share" referrerpolicy="strict-origin-when-cross-origin" allowfullscreen></iframe>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>Why should the arms be away from the chest wall when practicing grip?</p>
</blockquote>
<ol>
<li>To be certain the clubface is square</li>
<li>The arms position, like the grip, impacts shoulder rotation</li>
<li>To allow room for the placement of the trail hand</li>
<li>None of the above</li>
</ol>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<ol start="2">
<li>The arms position, like the grip, impacts shoulder rotation.  If the arms are set on the chest wall when practicing grip, the feedback when testing hip line while practicing grip will be related to the arms on the chest wall, not grip.</li>
</ol>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>What impact does the incorrect arms position have on the backswing and through swing?</p>
</blockquote>
<ol>
<li>There is no impact</li>
<li>The grip will override any impact of the arms position</li>
<li>There will be a restriction in shoulder rotation</li>
<li>None of the above</li>
</ol>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<ol start="3">
<li>There will be a restriction in shoulder rotation</li>
</ol>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>How do you determine the arms position on the chest wall?</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>Stand tall.  Interlock your trail hand middle finger Power Spot with the same Core Zone Power Spot of your lead thumb.  Extend your arms in front, relax and let your arms drop to your chest wall.  If done correctly, when you leave your arms on your chest wall you will have full shoulder rotation if you use the motion sequence of your Core Zone in the backswing and through swing.</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>What happens if I don't have the correct arms position on my chest wall?</p>
</blockquote>
<ol>
<li>Nothing if my grip and motion sequence matches my Core Zone</li>
<li>I will over swing in my backswing</li>
<li>I will have restricted shoulder rotation</li>
<li>None of the above</li>
</ol>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<ol start="3">
<li>I will have restricted shoulder rotation</li>
</ol>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>I am an Upper Core Player.  What happens if I set my arms on my chest wall like a Lower Core Player?</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>I will have restricted shoulder rotation.</p>
<p>I added this question because so many players have read Ben Hogan's book:<em><strong>The 5 Fundamentals</strong></em>.  In that book is an illustration showing the arms tied together creating what would likely be a Lower Core arms position.  Your students will have read this book.  OR, how about the different size balls that we use for students to hold between their arms during a lesson to get the feeling of a 1 piece take away?  These teaching aids  fit one Core Zone, but not all three.</p>
</blockquote>
</div>]]></content:encoded></item><item><title><![CDATA[Carrying Angle Part 1: The Lower Core Player]]></title><description><![CDATA[<div class="kg-card-markdown"><p><strong>This content is from the Wright Balance® Zoom session February 23, 2026</strong></p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p>Copyright, Wright Balance® 2026</p>
<blockquote>
<p>&quot;<em>It's not what happens to you but how you react to it that matters</em>&quot;<br>
Epictetus 55 AD to 135 AD</p>
</blockquote>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h3 id="howtousethisebook">How to Use this eBook</h3>
<blockquote>
<p>I have edited the video of our</p></blockquote></div>]]></description><link>https://instructions.wrightbalance.com/carrying-angle-introduction/</link><guid isPermaLink="false">69af10bf33f75d000162ad9d</guid><dc:creator><![CDATA[David F. Wright]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Fri, 20 Mar 2026 20:15:30 GMT</pubDate><content:encoded><![CDATA[<div class="kg-card-markdown"><p><strong>This content is from the Wright Balance® Zoom session February 23, 2026</strong></p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p>Copyright, Wright Balance® 2026</p>
<blockquote>
<p>&quot;<em>It's not what happens to you but how you react to it that matters</em>&quot;<br>
Epictetus 55 AD to 135 AD</p>
</blockquote>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h3 id="howtousethisebook">How to Use this eBook</h3>
<blockquote>
<p>I have edited the video of our February, 2026 Zoom session into 11 short videos, each followed by a brief quiz.  Your time is valuable, I know.  If you have time to view each video, I would encourage you to do so.  If time is tight, take the quizzes following each video.  If you have no problem answering the quiz questions correctly, advance to the next quiz.  When you struggle with a quiz, watch the brief video.</p>
<p>Please know that this content will appear on your annual recertification exam.</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="carryingangle">Carrying Angle</h1>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p>In the first video I introduce the Carrying Angle and the conversation I had with Michael Mellman, MD at the top of the range during one of our Friday AM sessions..  Dr. Mellman brought the Carrying Angle to the research setting. Little did we know at the time how important the Carrying Angle is to balance, range of motion and Core Symmetry.   This is an image of Dr. Mellman in 1997 at the top of the range at Pelican Hill GC, Newport Coast, CA, teaching me about the Carrying Angle.</p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/5Gf4M8x"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/5Gf4M8x.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p>In the next image is the measurement of the Carrying Angle during the research at the Centinela Hospital Biomechanics Lab.  This shows the Carrying Angle being measured using a goniometer.</p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p>That is JR Ruda, a Cal Berkley Golf Team Member when he participated as one of the elite amateurs. Cal Berkley won the NCAA Tournament that year.</p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/1XWtnl8"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/1XWtnl8.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p>Following the research in 2000 - 2006, we began to use a digital protractor to measure the Carrying Angle as shown in these illustrations.</p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/QHMDMLl"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/QHMDMLl.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/1eqZ2lm"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/1eqZ2lm.png" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p>For a deeper dive into the history of the Carrying Angle measurement, click on this eBook link:</p>
<h3 id="thepowerofwrightbalanceanglesthecarryingangle">The Power of Wright Balance® Angles: The Carrying Angle</h3>
<p><a href="https://instructions.wrightbalance.com/the-power-of-angles/">https://instructions.wrightbalance.com/the-power-of-angles/</a></p>
<h2 id="video1">Video 1</h2>
<h2 id="introductiontothecarryingangle">Introduction to the Carrying Angle</h2>
<p><strong>Video 1</strong> 6 minutes and 45 seconds</p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<iframe width="560" height="315" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/fT4oiFPo7LI?si=Fbijb6XK2B4HwCAc" title="YouTube video player" frameborder="0" allow="accelerometer; autoplay; clipboard-write; encrypted-media; gyroscope; picture-in-picture; web-share" referrerpolicy="strict-origin-when-cross-origin" allowfullscreen></iframe>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p>The Carrying Angle is responsible for</p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<ol>
<li>Power Recruitment</li>
<li>Range of Motion</li>
<li>Angles of the body and club through the swing</li>
<li>All of the above</li>
</ol>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>4</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p>Where does the carrying Angle show up in the golf swing?</p>
<ol>
<li>Down the trail arm and shaft at address</li>
<li>In the trail arm at the top of the swing</li>
<li>Down the line at address in the lead arm and shaft</li>
<li>In shaft lean</li>
<li>All of the above</li>
</ol>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>5</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p>The Carrying Angle Originated</p>
<ol>
<li>In basic geometry</li>
<li>In 1865 Medicine</li>
<li>In elementary physics</li>
<li>In quantum mechanics</li>
</ol>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>2</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p>Why do I agree with the literature that says women have a greater carrying angle than men?</p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<ol>
<li>The carrying angle measurement has been used primarily on women</li>
<li>Original subjects in Dr Jobe's lab at Centinela Hospital showed that women's carrying angles were greater than men</li>
<li>Most Women are Middle and Lower Core.  As you move from Upper to Lower Core, the Carrying Angle naturally becomes greater</li>
<li>None of the above</li>
</ol>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>3</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="video2">Video 2</h1>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p>3 minutes 46 seconds</p>
<h2 id="howthehandshanginoutofthelowercorezonepsr">How the Hands Hang in &amp; Out of the Lower Core Zone PSR</h2>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<iframe width="560" height="315" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/IdsJSAkZ-Os?si=l7Akwq6zbrRkyR30" title="YouTube video player" frameborder="0" allow="accelerometer; autoplay; clipboard-write; encrypted-media; gyroscope; picture-in-picture; web-share" referrerpolicy="strict-origin-when-cross-origin" allowfullscreen></iframe>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p>A Lower Core player has a Performance Stance Width Range (PSR) of:</p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<ol>
<li>20 to 28 inches</li>
<li>The PSR always has a plus or minus 1 inch possibility when tested</li>
<li>The player's hips will always be square in their PSR</li>
<li>All of the above</li>
</ol>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>4</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p>The Carrying Angle is measured</p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<ol>
<li>When palms are rotated forward,down the forearm 90 degrees to the ground</li>
<li>When one shoulder is higher and the hip on the same side is also higher</li>
<li>With consideration of chest width</li>
<li>When leg length is different</li>
</ol>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>1</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p>When standing inside the PSR, the internal vs external rotation of the hands will:</p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<ol>
<li>Show greater internal rotation of the hand on the opposite side of the &quot;low shoulder&quot;.</li>
<li>Always hang the same unless the player has a shoulder injury</li>
<li>Show no change inside or outside the PSR</li>
<li>None of the above</li>
</ol>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>2</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="video3">Video 3</h1>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h2 id="carryinganglegripshoulderrotationbalanceovercenterofarches">Carrying Angle: Grip, Shoulder Rotation &amp; Balance Over Center of Arches</h2>
<blockquote>
<p>4 minutes &amp; 50 seconds</p>
</blockquote>
<iframe width="560" height="315" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/NrL1JM82Wmk?si=PnApLa2RwmKJ9Fry" title="YouTube video player" frameborder="0" allow="accelerometer; autoplay; clipboard-write; encrypted-media; gyroscope; picture-in-picture; web-share" referrerpolicy="strict-origin-when-cross-origin" allowfullscreen></iframe>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p>What am I preparing to do in the following image?</p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/EYlTK7C"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/EYlTK7C.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<ol>
<li>Check my Grip</li>
<li>Checking to see if my Grip matches my Carrying Angle</li>
<li>Test my shoulder rotation in my backswing</li>
<li>All of the above</li>
<li>None of the above</li>
</ol>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>4</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p><strong>Prior to the Wright Balance® Express</strong> when testing my grip, as related to my carrying angle, if I have full rotation in my backswing but my shoulder rotation is limited in the through swing with the same angle as shown here,</p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/eXZHIDb"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/eXZHIDb.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p><strong>why do I have restriction in my through swing as shown in the above image?</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>I am out of balance at ground level</li>
<li>My Carrying Angle, and therefore my grip, does not match (not the same) on my left vs right side</li>
<li>My arms position is not set properly on my chest wall</li>
<li>None of the above</li>
</ol>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>2</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="video4">Video 4</h1>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h2 id="squaringthehipsfrom0to36inches">Squaring the Hips from 0 to 36 Inches</h2>
<blockquote>
<p>7 minutes</p>
</blockquote>
<iframe width="560" height="315" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/wLeh7-QSoUw?si=QGYAFtNmqwQ-VQGB" title="YouTube video player" frameborder="0" allow="accelerometer; autoplay; clipboard-write; encrypted-media; gyroscope; picture-in-picture; web-share" referrerpolicy="strict-origin-when-cross-origin" allowfullscreen></iframe>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<p>What is the Performance Stance Range(PSR) for the Lower Core Player</p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<ol>
<li>10 to 28 inches</li>
<li>16 to 28 inches</li>
<li>20 to 30 inches</li>
<li>20 to 28 inches</li>
</ol>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>4</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<p>What impact does a wedding band on my lead hand have on my hips when I am square from 0 to 36 inches?</p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<ol>
<li>I don't know. I am not allowed to remove my wedding band</li>
<li>If it is at all tight on my finger, my hips will remain open or closed EXCEPT in my PSR</li>
<li>My hips will be open or closed in every stance width, even my PSR</li>
<li>None of the above</li>
</ol>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>2</p>
</blockquote>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p>I have not done the Wright Balance® Express. Which of the following did adding tape to the 3 Power Spots of my trail hand <strong>NOT IMPACT:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Squared my hips from 0 to 36 inches</li>
<li>Leveled my hips and shoulders</li>
<li>My hands hung the same in all stance widths</li>
<li>My balance at ground level was the same in all stance widths</li>
</ol>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>2</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p>After placing tape on the Power Spots of my trail hand, what do I need to do to level my hips and shoulders in all stance widths?</p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<ol>
<li>Place tape on the Power Spots of my left hand</li>
<li>Place tape on all 3 Power Spots of my right thumb</li>
<li>The Wright Balance® Express</li>
<li>None of the above</li>
</ol>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>3</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p>What does the Wright Balance® research show regarding Middle Core Player, Tiger Woods' unwitting advantage when he played with tape on his Upper Core Power Spot of his right hand?</p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/RpimL0L"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/RpimL0L.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<ol>
<li>Tiger's hips were square from 0 to 36 inches where other Middle Core Players were square from 0 to 24 inches giving him a short game advantage</li>
<li>Tiger's hips were square from 0 to 24 inches where other Middle Core Players were square from 16 to 24 inches giving him a short game advantage</li>
<li>Tiger had no advantage on the field.  That is a made-up myth by Tiger haters</li>
<li>None of the above</li>
</ol>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>2</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<p>Based upon what we know about the Wright Balance® Express and Performance Stance Ranges (PSR), in what Core Zone would amateurs have the greatest disadvantage in the short game, putter through short irons.</p>
<ol>
<li>Upper Core</li>
<li>Lower Core</li>
<li>Middle Core</li>
<li>No Core Zone has an advantage in the short game.</li>
</ol>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>2</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="video5">Video 5</h1>
<h2 id="handswillhangthesamewhen">Hands Will Hang the Same When...</h2>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p>4 minutes</p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<iframe width="560" height="315" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/NNQMW5otzR8?si=S4AHvM1c9qz1oHZh" title="YouTube video player" frameborder="0" allow="accelerometer; autoplay; clipboard-write; encrypted-media; gyroscope; picture-in-picture; web-share" referrerpolicy="strict-origin-when-cross-origin" allowfullscreen></iframe>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p>When the trail hand has tape on each of the Power Spots and there are no 2 fingers next to each other with tape</p>
<ol>
<li>Hands will hang the same but grip is not the same as Carrying Angle</li>
<li>Hands will hang the same and the grip will be different in the trail hand regardless of Carrying Angle</li>
<li>Hands will hang the same and grip is the same in both hands and directly related to the Carrying Angle of either the lead or trail arm</li>
<li>None of the above</li>
</ol>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>3</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p>When a player arrives for a lesson and ask you to check their grip</p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p>1.Know that one shoulder is lower and one hip higher and the Carrying Angle will always be the same. This means I can set both left and right hand grip at the same angle<br>
2.The easiest way to set the grip so that both the left and right hands are the same is to tape the Power Spots of the trail hand separating the tape positions so that no 2 fingers next to each other are the same.  Then, the hands will hang the same and the left and right hand grip can be set at the same angle.<br>
3. The best thing to do is not try to change the grip as the player has likely figured out what works for them.<br>
4. None of the above</p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>2</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p>Why does the Lower Core Player want a Carrying Angle of 148 degrees or more creating a greater angle</p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<ol>
<li>A Carrying Angle of 148 degrees or greater will move the player's balance further back in the middle of their feet promoting an easier clearance of the hips and under delivery to the ball</li>
<li>A Carrying Angle of 148 degrees or greater  will promote a stronger complimentary grip that facilitates an Under Delivery to the ball through impact</li>
<li>A Carrying Angle of 148 degrees or greater (when posture is set to also match 148 in the spine and thigh angle and a 148 degree matching grip), produces the maximum opportunity to recruit the linear and rotational forces from the ground.</li>
<li>All of the above</li>
</ol>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>4</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="video6">Video 6</h1>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h2 id="creatinganincreaseinthecarryingangle">Creating an Increase in the Carrying Angle</h2>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p>What to do to create a Carrying Angle of 148 or greater</p>
<blockquote>
<p>9 minutes</p>
</blockquote>
<iframe width="560" height="315" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/ZUjj9EhIA14?si=nXOkA8NVVrnySdk4" title="YouTube video player" frameborder="0" allow="accelerometer; autoplay; clipboard-write; encrypted-media; gyroscope; picture-in-picture; web-share" referrerpolicy="strict-origin-when-cross-origin" allowfullscreen></iframe>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p>I did the Wright Balance®  Express at a Lower Core Stance Width of 18 inches.  That produced a Carrying Angle of 152 degrees.  What Stance Width do I need to use to increase my Carrying Angle to at least 148 degrees?</p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<ol>
<li>Test a Lower Core Stance Width doing the Wright Balance® Express.  You would test stance widths narrower than 18 inches until you reach a Carrying Angle of at least 148 degrees.</li>
<li>Stretch your shoulders in a doorway by leaning with your forearm on the door facing and leaning forward to stretch your shoulder until you reach 148 degrees</li>
<li>Test Lower Core Stance Widths doing the Wright Balance® Express that are wider than 18 inches until you reach at least a 148 degree Carrying Angle.</li>
<li>None of the above</li>
</ol>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>3</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p>What happens to the trail hip when the hips open, regardless of Core Zone, even when the player has done the Wright Balance® Express, taped the hands, etc.?</p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<ol>
<li>Nothing as long as the player does the Wright Balance® Express</li>
<li>The player's trail hip will always rise</li>
<li>The player's lead hip will rise</li>
<li>None of the above</li>
</ol>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>2</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p>Why do I want to use a Complimentary Grip as a Lower Core Player?</p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<ol>
<li>I want an &quot;under delivery&quot; to the ball.  A Complimentary grip will facilitate that &quot;under delivery&quot;.</li>
<li>I want an &quot;under delivery&quot; to the ball.  A Butterfly grip will facilitate that &quot;under delivery&quot;.</li>
<li>I can just grip the club how I want and work on a motion that creates that under delivery.</li>
<li>None of the above.</li>
</ol>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>1</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="video7">Video 7</h1>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h2 id="increasingthecarryingangleto148degrees">Increasing the Carrying Angle to 148 Degrees</h2>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p>5 minutes &amp; 40 seconds</p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<iframe width="560" height="315" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/_tHSa4vheHM?si=LYItmpN1AlHP32Ok" title="YouTube video player" frameborder="0" allow="accelerometer; autoplay; clipboard-write; encrypted-media; gyroscope; picture-in-picture; web-share" referrerpolicy="strict-origin-when-cross-origin" allowfullscreen></iframe>
<blockquote>
<p>Note: This video shows me changing my Carrying Angle by 6 degrees by doing the Wright Balance® Express at 24 inches.  When I did the Wright Balance® Express at 18 inches, my Carrying Angle was 152.</p>
<p><strong>These results are highly individual.  You must test each student to determine how much change they will experience in Carrying Angle at different Stance Widths.  I moved from 18 inches to 24 inches, 6 inches wider, and changed my Carrying Angle by 6 degrees.  Lower Core Players will have greater changes in Carrying Angle by going to a wider Stance Width within their Core Zone.  Each of the 11 stance widths in each Core Zone will change the Carrying Angle.  When you go wider to do the Wright Balance® Express, you will increase the Carrying Angle.  When you move to a narrower Stance Width and do the Wright Balance® Express, you will produce a shallower Carrying Angle.  The Middle Core Dominant Players will move fewer degrees than your Lower Core Dominant Player. The Upper Core Dominant Players will move in fewer degrees than your Lower Core and Middle Core Dominant Players.</strong></p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<p>I am a Lower Core Player and I have done the Wright Balance® Express at a Lower Core Stance Width 21 inches.  In order to change my  Carrying Angle to produces a greater angle at address, I would do the Wright Balance® Express at:</p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<ol>
<li>Lower Core 9 inches</li>
<li>Lower Core 12 inches</li>
<li>Lower Core 24 inches</li>
<li>None of the above</li>
</ol>
<blockquote>
<p>Note:  If you have the &quot;old&quot; vinyl strip, 9 and 21 inches don't appear as Lower Core.  Please know 9 and 21 inches are Lower Core in the most recent evolution of Wright Balance® research.</p>
</blockquote>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/ukxpGQ8"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/ukxpGQ8.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>3</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p>To produce the same Carrying Angle on my left and right side, I would:</p>
<ol>
<li>Put tape on the Power Spots of both hands</li>
<li>Do the Wright Balance® Express</li>
<li>Stretch my shoulders by leaning forward through a doorway with my forearm in the side of the door facing</li>
<li>None of the above</li>
</ol>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>2</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<p>Following the Wright Balance® Express:</p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<ol>
<li>My thigh angle will be the same as my Carrying Angle</li>
<li>My grip &quot;strength&quot; / &quot;weakness&quot; will be the same in my left and right hands</li>
<li>I will have aligned my Kinetic Chain in one stance width</li>
<li>All of the above</li>
<li>None of the above</li>
</ol>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>4</p>
<p><strong>Note: For a right-handed player, a &quot;stronger&quot; grip means that their hand or hands are rotated clockwise on the club.  A &quot;weaker&quot; grip is when the hands are rotated counter-clockwise on the club. This description is just the opposite for left-handed players.  This &quot;jargon&quot; only confuses your students.  Define the jargon for your students as you use it.  Otherwise, they will likely think they should know what you are talking about and say nothing as you lose them in thought.</strong></p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="video8">Video 8</h1>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h2 id="therepeatingcarryingangleataddress">The Repeating Carrying Angle at Address</h2>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p>7 minutes</p>
<iframe width="560" height="315" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/sahNkF6COj8?si=Ek6v0jvuQnKEQAGd" title="YouTube video player" frameborder="0" allow="accelerometer; autoplay; clipboard-write; encrypted-media; gyroscope; picture-in-picture; web-share" referrerpolicy="strict-origin-when-cross-origin" allowfullscreen></iframe>
>
# Question
>
Following the Wright Balance Express:
>
1. My hips and shoulders are level
2. My Stance Width to practice and play is generally much narrower
3. My trail hand grip is easier to set on the club due to the difference in my left and right hand
4. None of the above
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>1</p>
</blockquote>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<p>When a Lower Core Player does the Wright Balance® Express, when standing on an alignment stick, they will be in balance:</p>
<ol>
<li>Over the balls of their feet</li>
<li>Over the center of their arches</li>
<li>Just behind the balls of the feet and forward of the center of their arches</li>
<li>On their heels</li>
</ol>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>2</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<p>What impact does a yardstick have on balance when practicing my grip?</p>
<ol>
<li>A yardstick will move my balance forward since it is so small in my hands</li>
<li>A yardstick will move me back in my stance</li>
<li>A yardstick will have no impact on my heel to toe balance</li>
<li>None of the above</li>
</ol>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>3</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<p>In the video, I have set my Carrying Angle at 148 degrees.  That measured 148 degrees shows up in my lead arm and shaft when the digital protractor is set at 148 degrees and:</p>
<ol>
<li>I stand tall, hold the yardstick in my lead hand parallel to the ground and measure my forearm and shaft angle</li>
<li>I am in my address position and measure my forearm and shaft angle with shaft lean set</li>
<li>I let my arms hang at my side</li>
<li>1 and 2 above</li>
<li>None of the above</li>
</ol>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>4</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p>As a Lower Core Player, when I get set at address:</p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<ol>
<li>My spine angle will be 148 - 10 degrees</li>
<li>My spine angle will be 148 + 10 degrees</li>
<li>My spine angle will be 148 + or - 10 degrees</li>
<li>My spine angle will be 148 degrees</li>
</ol>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>4</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p>My Carrying Angle will be present at address:</p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<ol>
<li>In my shaft lean</li>
<li>In my thigh angle</li>
<li>In my trail arm and shaft face on</li>
<li>All of the above</li>
</ol>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>4</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p>Why do some players have a different angle of their lead and trail hand grip at address?</p>
<ol>
<li>They have gripped the club incorrectly in both hands</li>
<li>They have 2 different angles of their left and right hands as their hands hang at their sides</li>
<li>They change their grip too often</li>
<li>None of the above</li>
</ol>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>2</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="video9">Video 9</h1>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h2 id="leadhandhipalignment">Lead Hand &amp; Hip Alignment</h2>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p>30 seconds</p>
<iframe width="560" height="315" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/tqquShqUvf8?si=l9vD5rkLqCvTsT0R" title="YouTube video player" frameborder="0" allow="accelerometer; autoplay; clipboard-write; encrypted-media; gyroscope; picture-in-picture; web-share" referrerpolicy="strict-origin-when-cross-origin" allowfullscreen></iframe>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<p>If I have placed tape on the Power Spots of my Trail Hand separated by a finger between each Power Spot and do the Wright Balance® Express</p>
<ol>
<li>My hips square</li>
<li>My Shoulders Level</li>
<li>My Hips Level</li>
<li>My Carrying Angle is the same on my Left and Right Side</li>
<li>All of the above</li>
</ol>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>5</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p>My hips and shoulders are level and my hips  are square in all stance widths.  I have tape on the Power Spots of my trail hand. Following the Wright Balance® Express. I <strong>place a ring</strong> on my trail hand, what happens to my Kinetic Chain?<br>
.</p>
<ol>
<li>Nothing</li>
<li>My hips open and my trail hip rises and trail shoulder lowers</li>
<li>I experience a sensation of better balance</li>
<li>None of the above</li>
</ol>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>2</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="video10">Video 10</h1>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h3 id="thecarryingangleandarmspositionrelationship">The Carrying Angle and Arms Position Relationship</h3>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p>4 minutes &amp; 50 seconds</p>
<iframe width="560" height="315" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/B4LqKJKOQUc?si=HTEJBu1zm6fPuhr-" title="YouTube video player" frameborder="0" allow="accelerometer; autoplay; clipboard-write; encrypted-media; gyroscope; picture-in-picture; web-share" referrerpolicy="strict-origin-when-cross-origin" allowfullscreen></iframe>
>
# Question
>
When I set my arms on my Chest Wall as shown in this video, as I stand tall, my: 
<ol>
<li>Forearms are equal to my Carrying Angle</li>
<li>My Upper arms are equal to my Carrying Angle</li>
<li>My shaft hangs at 45 degrees and is equal to my Carrying angle</li>
<li>My Carrying Angle won't be present in this standing tall position</li>
<li>None of the above</li>
</ol>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>2</p>
</blockquote>
<h2 id="question">Question</h2>
<p>I use my repeating Carrying Angle when created in this standing tall position with the club shaft parallel to the ground to:</p>
<ol>
<li>Set my distance from the ball</li>
<li>Set my ball position</li>
<li>Set my secondary tilt</li>
<li>All of the above</li>
<li>None of the above</li>
</ol>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>4</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h3 id="trueorfalse">True or False</h3>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p>When standing tall, my left and right hand grip have produced freedom of shoulder rotation back and through when tested. My club shaft is parallel to the ground and my arms are set on my chest wall.  I must leave my arms on my chest wall <strong>until the club is grounded</strong> while setting my secondary tilt, posture, ball position and distance from the ball.</p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>True</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<p>When your hip line is level and posture and secondary tilt are &quot;neutral&quot; when set at address, the weight distribution in my feet will be 50 percent left and 50 percent right. My hips and shoulder angles will be parallel and my spine, when observed from the front, is 90 degrees to the ground, <strong>all equal to my Carrying Angle</strong>.</p>
<p>What happens to the angle of my hips, shoulders and spine at address if I setup before I do the Wright Balance Express and I have a high trail hip?</p>
<ol>
<li>The angle of my shoulders and hips will not be parallel or equal to my Carrying Angle</li>
<li>The angle of my spine when observed from the front will not be equal to my carrying angle</li>
<li>My left to right balance at address will  not be 50-50.</li>
<li>All of the above</li>
</ol>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>4</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<blockquote>
<p><strong>Note:  I am not doing the Wright Balance® Express in the following illustrations</strong>.</p>
</blockquote>
<p>I extend my arms out as shown here...</p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/SH8PR3D"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/SH8PR3D.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p>...and then, I keep my arms fully extended and &quot;firm&quot; and let them drop to my chest as shown here</p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/fdo9DZQ"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/fdo9DZQ.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p>What position of my Carrying Angle have I created in this <strong>Standing Tall</strong> posture?</p>
<ol>
<li>My arms position on my chest wall at address</li>
<li>My Lower Core Thigh Angle</li>
<li>My Lower Core Spine Angle</li>
<li>None of the above</li>
</ol>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>1</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<p>There has been a good bit of discussion regarding a butterfly versus complimentary grip. Remember, I am still in a 148 degree Carrying Angle and in my Lower Core.   What do you notice in the trail hand once the arms have dropped on the chest wall.</p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/fdo9DZQ"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/fdo9DZQ.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<ol>
<li>The hands naturally appear to be in a complimentary grip position</li>
<li>The trail hand is set for a Lower Core Under Delivery to the ball</li>
<li>My Grip will be rotated to a Strong (clockwise) position</li>
<li>All of the above</li>
</ol>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>4</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p>When my arms positions are not set the same as my Carrying Angle on my chest wall, what happens to my shoulder rotation</p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<ol>
<li>Arms position on the Chest Wall has nothing to do with shoulder rotation</li>
<li>I will have restricted shoulder rotation</li>
<li>Neither 1 or 2</li>
<li>It is time to go to lunch</li>
</ol>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>2</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h3 id="trueorfalse">True or False</h3>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p>When the Lower Core Player is set at address, they will have the least amount of Secondary Tilt.</p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>False</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="video11">Video 11</h1>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h2 id="gripsizeandbalance">Grip Size and Balance</h2>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p>7 minutes &amp; 21 seconds</p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
 <iframe width="560" height="315" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/PwlcahgiKEM?si=9omvNLqpI_Bs1hcY" title="YouTube video player" frameborder="0" allow="accelerometer; autoplay; clipboard-write; encrypted-media; gyroscope; picture-in-picture; web-share" referrerpolicy="strict-origin-when-cross-origin" allowfullscreen></iframe>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<blockquote>
<h3 id="trueorfalse">True or False</h3>
</blockquote>
<p>You are testing grip size using the Wright Balance® bat measurement system. When placing your hand on the bat, you must engage the Power Spot of the Middle Finger Core Zone you are measuring or your measurements <strong>WILL NOT</strong> be accurate</p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h2 id="answer">Answer</h2>
<blockquote>
<p>True</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p>When the hips first square on the lowest point on the Wright Balance® bat measurement system, you have</p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<ol>
<li>Approximately 1/2 inch tolerance from that point on the bat</li>
<li>Approximately 25 thousandths of an inch tolerance from that point on the bat</li>
<li>Approximately 50 thousandths of an inch tolerance from that point on the bat</li>
<li>Approximately 1/4 inch of tolerance from that point up on the bat</li>
</ol>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>3</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p>Standing on an alignment stick</p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<ol>
<li>Will move you off balance</li>
<li>Is a way to determine exact balance and estimate Dominant Core Zone</li>
<li>Is how you should have your student hit balls</li>
<li>None of the above</li>
<li>Two and three above</li>
</ol>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>5</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h3 id="trueorfalse">True or False</h3>
<p>My Grip Size no longer matters as long as I have done the Wright Balance® Express</p>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>False</p>
</blockquote>
</div>]]></content:encoded></item><item><title><![CDATA[Giving a First Lesson: Finding the Dominant Core Zone via Power, PSR & Power Spots Web1]]></title><description><![CDATA[<div class="kg-card-markdown"><p>Copyright, Wright Balance® 2026</p>
<blockquote>
<p><strong>“Facts do not cease to exist because they are ignored.”</strong> Aldous Huxley</p>
</blockquote>
<p>I was with Jim Nittoli, PGA and his golf staff at San Aantonio CC giving each an introduction to Wright Balance®.  Jim asked me to video the last of 7 lessons.  That is what</p></div>]]></description><link>https://instructions.wrightbalance.com/giving-a-first-lesson/</link><guid isPermaLink="false">699b584533f75d000162ad7e</guid><dc:creator><![CDATA[David F. Wright]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Sat, 07 Mar 2026 20:34:16 GMT</pubDate><content:encoded><![CDATA[<div class="kg-card-markdown"><p>Copyright, Wright Balance® 2026</p>
<blockquote>
<p><strong>“Facts do not cease to exist because they are ignored.”</strong> Aldous Huxley</p>
</blockquote>
<p>I was with Jim Nittoli, PGA and his golf staff at San Aantonio CC giving each an introduction to Wright Balance®.  Jim asked me to video the last of 7 lessons.  That is what follows.  I have edited this lesson with Nick into segments for you to follow.</p>
<blockquote>
<p>Note:  There are <strong>4 positions</strong> tested to determine the player's Dominant Core Zone.  You will <strong>NEVER</strong> find only one or two of these confirmations of the Dominant Core Zone.  There will always be <strong>4 &quot;tests&quot;</strong> that  <strong>MATCH</strong> the player's Dominant Core Zone:</p>
<ol>
<li>Power Test without a club</li>
<li>Performance Stance Range (PSR)</li>
<li>Grip Power Spots</li>
<li>Extended Performance Stance Range (PSR) when Wright Balance® Bands are applied</li>
</ol>
</blockquote>
<h3 id="testingpowerwithoutaclub">Testing Power Without A Club</h3>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<iframe width="560" height="315" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/WAqKxhpDcxo?si=j2TqVdrnL8FOPtey" title="YouTube video player" frameborder="0" allow="accelerometer; autoplay; clipboard-write; encrypted-media; gyroscope; picture-in-picture; web-share" referrerpolicy="strict-origin-when-cross-origin" allowfullscreen></iframe>
<p>The first stance width I am testing is at 13 inches.  That is the Power test for the Upper Core. If this is Nick's Dominant Core Zone, he will have Power. His hips will be square between 8 &amp; 16 inches plus or minus 1 inch.</p>
<blockquote>
<p><strong>Note:</strong> When a player has power during this test, you won't be able to move them off balance. A player will demonstrate power in only one of the three stance widths tested here as you can see in the video</p>
</blockquote>
<p>The second test is for the Middle Core where Nick assumes a stance width of 18 inches.  That is the Power test stance width for the Middle Core. if this is Nick's Dominant Core Zone, he will have Power and his hips will be square between 16 and 24 inches plus or minus 1 inch.</p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p>The third test is for the Lower Core where Nick assumes a stance width of 26 inches.  Twenty-six inches is the Power test stance width for the Lower Core. If this is Nick's Dominant Core Zone, he will have Power and his hips will be square between 20 and 28 inches plus or minus 1 inch.  This test is done at 26 inches.  Twenty-six (26) inches is outside the width of a Middle Core test.</p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p>As you can  see from the videos, Nick had the most Power at 18 inches.  As a Middle Core Player, Nick's hips will be square between 16 and 24 inches.  Sixteen (16) to 24 inches is Nicks Performance Stance Range (PSR).</p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p>The following 1 minute video was shot in 2023.  It demonstrates why we pick  a stance width inside the Performance Stance Range (PSR).  Note that one inch wider creates a loss of power as shown here.</p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<iframe width="560" height="315" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/q4jFYg7Fj4I?si=lfizF9QdCTALMY43" title="YouTube video player" frameborder="0" allow="accelerometer; autoplay; clipboard-write; encrypted-media; gyroscope; picture-in-picture; web-share" referrerpolicy="strict-origin-when-cross-origin" allowfullscreen></iframe>
<p>Not only is there a loss of power outside the Performance Stance Range (PSR), the clubface also opens or closes as a player steps outside their Dominant Core Zone Stance Range.</p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p>The following photos are of Colin Montgomerie in the Wright Balance® Biomechanics Studio in Southern California in 2020. Colin is an Upper Core Player. He is in his Performance Stance Range (8 to 16 inches).  Note in the following photo Colin is standing at 16 inches and his putter face is square.</p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/W6wdHoG"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/W6wdHoG.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p>When he stepped <strong>Wider than his Performance Stance Range (17 inches) his putter face closes</strong></p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/f1afQTc"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/f1afQTc.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p>As you can see in these photos, not only is there a loss of power outside a player's 8 inch Performance Stance Range (PSR), the clubface opens or closes.</p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h3 id="testingthematchingstancewidthrangepsr">Testing the Matching Stance Width Range (PSR)</h3>
<blockquote>
<p>Note:  If your student has an injury that precludes the Power Test, this test of their Performance Stance Width Range (PSR) is where you would begin.</p>
</blockquote>
<p>In the next video I test Nick's Middle Core Stance Width Range to confirm the observation of Power in his Middle Core Zone.</p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p>Recall that Nick had the greatest Power at 18 inches.  The Middle Core Stance Width Range is 16 to 24 inches, plus or minus 1 inch. The Performance Stance Range will always <strong>MATCH</strong> the observed Power Test. This test will be the second confirmation of Core Zone.  If your student is Middle Core, they will be square between 16 and 24 inches plus or minus one inch.</p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<iframe width="560" height="315" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/4om-6clbWdw?si=ivsYea0WG7qic_Ne" title="YouTube video player" frameborder="0" allow="accelerometer; autoplay; clipboard-write; encrypted-media; gyroscope; picture-in-picture; web-share" referrerpolicy="strict-origin-when-cross-origin" allowfullscreen></iframe>
>
<h3 id="testingmatchingpowerspots">Testing Matching Power Spots</h3>
<p>This test is your third confirmation of Core Zone.  As a Middle Core Player, Nick's power will be tested with his current grip.</p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p>The first step in testing the Power Spots in golfers is to have your student grip their club, swing to the top and stop. Observe the position of their lead knee.</p>
<blockquote>
<p>Note:  Stand facing your student as they swing to the top and stop. Look at their lead knee. Their lead knee will tell you how they started their golf swing.</p>
<ol>
<li>If their lead knee goes behind the ball, they started their swing with their lead knee or their trail hip.</li>
<li>If their lead knee points at the ball, they started their swing with their shoulders and hips together.<br>
3.If their lead knee points in front of the ball, they started their swing with their shoulders.<br>
Below is a link to and eBook showing the lead knee and Center of Mass (COM) of tour players of different Core Zones (Upper, Middle &amp; Lower).<br>
When you observe your student, their <strong>Center of Mass will match their Core Zone in your better player (Upper Core COM = Target Side; Middle Core COM = Centered over Pelvis; Lower Core COM = Trail Side.)</strong>  When evaluating players who have had instruction to, for example, load their trail heel at the top of the swing, their COM won't match their lead knee.</li>
</ol>
<p>Here is a link to the eBook showing tour players' lead knee and COM in each of the three Core Zones.</p>
</blockquote>
<blockquote>
<h4 id="matchingcharacteristicsofcenterofmasshipturnandleadkneeatthetopoftheswingbycorezone">Matching Characteristics of Center of Mass,  Hip Turn and Lead Knee at the Top of the Swing by Core Zone</h4>
</blockquote>
<p><a href="https://instructions.wrightbalance.com/stance-width-ranges-by-core-region/">https://instructions.wrightbalance.com/stance-width-ranges-by-core-region/</a></p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p><em><strong>Make certain you see your student stops at the top of their swing and say:</strong></em> &quot;Hold that position.&quot; Show them how you are going to step under the downswing path, place your hand on the butt of the club and provide active resistance in their downswing.</p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p>Then, step back and tell them to swing to the top of their backswing again and <strong>STOP</strong>. Once again, be certain they <strong>STOP</strong> at the top of their swing before you move under the downswing path.  <strong>STEP UNDER THE BUTT OF THE CLUB</strong> placing your palm on the butt of the club as you demonstrated. <strong>Tell them to start their downswing</strong> only after you are under the path of the downswing and you feel the butt of the club in your palm.  When you feel the pressure in your palm, apply maximum resistance on the downswing path as shown here.</p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p>If your student does not have the Power Spots of their Dominant Core Zone set on the underside of the grip in the middle finger of each hand, they will have no power and you will easily push them off balance.</p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/YdmCuaV"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/YdmCuaV.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p>Next I show Nick the placement of the club across his middle finger determines his Power.  This is easily demonstrated to students.</p>
<h3 id="thethirdconfirmationofdominantcorezonepowerspots">The Third Confirmation of Dominant Core Zone: Power Spots</h3>
<iframe width="560" height="315" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/jbecoa_cIpY?si=FU68yXO-TPSjXb7x" title="YouTube video player" frameborder="0" allow="accelerometer; autoplay; clipboard-write; encrypted-media; gyroscope; picture-in-picture; web-share" referrerpolicy="strict-origin-when-cross-origin" allowfullscreen></iframe>
>
When first tested for power, Nick was easily moved off balance.  Recall that testing for Power without a club, Nick's Power was at 18 inches, inside the Middle Core Performance Stance Range.  Additionally his hips were square between 16 and 24 inches, the Performance Stance Range (PSR). 
>
Your third confirmation is a test for Power when the grip is set so that your student's grip is across the **Middle Core Power Spots on the Middle Finger of the Left & Right hands** and on the underside of the grip. 
>
When his grip was checked to determine where the grip crossed his middle finger, his lead hand had the grip across the crease of the first knuckle up from his palm, the Middle Core Power Spot.  However, when checking his right hand, the grip crossed his middle finger on the first pad up from the palm, the Upper Core Power Spot. 
>
<a href="https://imgur.com/ylisUhB"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/ylisUhB.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a>
>
I showed Nick where he should place his right hand, the crease of the first knuckle up.  Nick was then tested and demonstrated power with that subtle grip change. 
>
### The fourth Confirmation of the Dominant Core Zone: Extending the Performance Stance Range (PSR)
>
In the following video I review with Nick, a Middle Core player, that his 8 inch playing stance width is between 16 and 24 inches plus or minus one inch.  That means his hips will be square only between 16 and 24 inches as Nick demonstrates in this video. I emphasized that to extend his Performance Stance Range (PSR) and to set the hips square in any stance width (0 to 36 inches), that all rings, bad-aids, etc must be removed from the lead hand and lead foot.
>
<iframe width="560" height="315" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/QXmX4RPq-jE?si=IX-WnnObJTpLGCcF" title="YouTube video player" frameborder="0" allow="accelerometer; autoplay; clipboard-write; encrypted-media; gyroscope; picture-in-picture; web-share" referrerpolicy="strict-origin-when-cross-origin" allowfullscreen></iframe>
>
>**Note**: The Middle Core Power Spot is the first knuckle crease up from the palm.  The Upper Core Power Spot is the first pad just above the palm on any finger of the trail hand.  The Lower Core Power Spot is the second pad up from the palm above the Middle Core knuckle crease on the trail hand.   
>
>When I covered Nick's Upper Core Power Spot on his middle finger of his trail hand, Nick's hips became square from the previously 16 to 24 inches to 0 to 24 inches.  
>
<a href="https://imgur.com/RpimL0L"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/RpimL0L.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a>
>
>When I add a piece of tape to Nick's Lower Core Power spot (the second pad up from the palm) and covered his Middle Core Power Spot on his THUMB of his trail hand, Nick's hips became square from 0 to 36 plus inches.  
>
<a href="https://imgur.com/G53RHID"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/G53RHID.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a>
>
>Note: If I placed a piece of tape on any two fingers next to each other, as Tiger did on occasion as shown below, his performance stance range would be reduced to his original 16 to 24 inches.
>
<a href="https://imgur.com/trReXWT"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/trReXWT.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a>
>
If he taped his hand as Tiger did on occasion, he would lose the short game benefits he gained with the tape on 3 fingers, ***NOT*** next to each other and ***EACH*** covering a different Power Spot.
>
## Grip Sizing Nick
>
If a player reports no neck, shoulders or wrists injuries, I would test their current grip size using the following strategy.  Why? You will often find that a player has the proper grip size on their clubs. 
>
<iframe width="560" height="315" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/CQ02rWBKYCk?si=YEkZWm-eACNGo-97" title="YouTube video player" frameborder="0" allow="accelerometer; autoplay; clipboard-write; encrypted-media; gyroscope; picture-in-picture; web-share" referrerpolicy="strict-origin-when-cross-origin" allowfullscreen></iframe>
>
If the players grips don't fit, this video is a demonstration of how to determine grip size using a Wright Balance grip size and the vinyl strip with the Core Zone Balanced Stance Widths
>
<iframe width="560" height="315" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/OqolJ5Cxs3E?si=g8LkSZn23ns9E1ou" title="YouTube video player" frameborder="0" allow="accelerometer; autoplay; clipboard-write; encrypted-media; gyroscope; picture-in-picture; web-share" referrerpolicy="strict-origin-when-cross-origin" allowfullscreen></iframe>
>
Note that Nick's grip Size as measured on the bat was 790 mils when he gripped the smallest end of the bat.  When he took his golf club at the butt, his hips rotated.  When he moved up the butt of the club toward the bare shaft, his hips squared to his stance line.   I measured his grip size at his middle finger as 840.  Note that there is a 50 mil difference between Nick's smallest measured size to his largest measured size.  
>
The following chart was made for club fitters to use when fitting grips.
>
<a href="https://imgur.com/Nv9J2Jw"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/Nv9J2Jw.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a>
>
## The Research Origin of Grip Sizing.
>
The following brief video summarizes the research protocols used in Dr. Frank Jobe's Biomechanics Lab at Centinela Hospital between 1999 and 2006.  Pilot studies were done in 1999 and 2000 to test the research protocols and the formal study began in 2001.
>
<iframe width="560" height="315" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/97L8PQ6Nafk?si=vfF6e42lBb20rmPL" title="YouTube video player" frameborder="0" allow="accelerometer; autoplay; clipboard-write; encrypted-media; gyroscope; picture-in-picture; web-share" referrerpolicy="strict-origin-when-cross-origin" allowfullscreen></iframe>
<blockquote>
<p><strong>Out of this balance research evolved:</strong><br>
1, The calculations of left &amp; right hand Grip Sizes for irons and wood and putter<br>
2. The Performance Stance Ranges were determined for each Core Zone<br>
3. Power Testing to determine Dominant Core Zone<br>
4. Power Spots<br>
5. Core Zones<br>
6. Determining the Dominant Core Zone<br>
7. Extending the Performance Stance Range<br>
8. Grip<br>
9  The Downswing Club Path Test (DPT) ( This test determines precise corrections in setup and sequencing of motion. The Downswing Club Path Test demonstrates the club path through impact providing <strong>immediate</strong> feedback to the student and teaching professional)<br>
10. The Wright Balance Express Exercise for Core Symmetry<br>
11. Vision &amp; Balance<br>
12. Which hand to hold the club in behind the ball<br>
13. Alignment to the ball<br>
14. Grip as related to shoulder rotation &amp; balance<br>
15. Posture and the repeating Carrying Angle through the swing<br>
16. Sequencing of Motion by Core Zone<br>
17. Center of Mass and Lead Knee position at the top of the swing<br>
18. Training professionals in how to assess the player's Dominant Core Zone and matching characteristics of each Core Zone as shown in this eBook<br>
19. Teaching to a player's regional body strength and recruiting maximum power and consistency and more</p>
</blockquote>
<h2 id="adeeperlookatgripsize">A Deeper Look at Grip Size</h2>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p>Some players add extra wraps and / or use larger grips like Jumbo Max to find their grip size that produces balance that matches their Core Zone as shown in these illustrations.</p>
<blockquote>
<p>Note: Wright Balance Professionals always measure to the Middle Finger of the lead hand.  Determine where the Middle Finger of the lead hand is located after the player places their hands on the club, not 2 inches down from the butt of the club:</p>
</blockquote>
<h2 id="playerswhoincreasegripsize">Players Who Increase Grip Size</h2>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h3 id="brysondechambeau">Bryson DeChambeau</h3>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/KtprSZs"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/KtprSZs.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h3 id="bubbawatson">Bubba Watson</h3>
<p><strong>Plus 12 /14 wraps Masters 2012 2014</strong></p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h3 id="retiefgoosen">Retief Goosen</h3>
<p><strong>Jumbo / OverSize plus 7 Extra Wraps wraps<br>
Won the US Open 2001 &amp; 2004</strong></p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h3 id="tonyfinau">Tony Finau</h3>
<p><strong>13 Extra Wraps</strong></p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h3 id="scottiescheffler">Scottie Scheffler</h3>
<p>6 Extra Wraps</p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h3 id="brysondechambeau">Bryson Dechambeau</h3>
<p>Jumbo Max</p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h3 id="dennispaulsonpgatourveteran">Dennis Paulson PGA Tour Veteran</h3>
<p><strong>Standard with 6 extra wraps under right hand...1990s before no taper grips</strong></p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h3 id="kevinstadler">Kevin Stadler</h3>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/lwEYyvh"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/lwEYyvh.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<blockquote>
<p>Kevin gripped the club so the butt was in his palm.  Kevin is an Upper Core Player with a very shallow carrying angle. As a result, when he setup to swing he appeared to have very little if any knee flex.  He had knee flex but it was very slight.   As a result of the grip being in his palm over many years, Kevin broke the hamate bone in his left hand.  A hamate bone injury like Kevin's is generally found in baseball where the hitter grips the bat with the little finger under the knob and there is pressure on the hamate bone. Why did Kevin grip the club in his palm?  I would suggest that Kevin's posture was so tall that standard grip size in his teenage years was too short.  However, in college, no matter what length club Kevin used, he would always move the grip into his palm.  Interestingly he uses a long putter to this day.  I would say his putter length choice is also due to a very shallow carrying angle and what appears on first observation as no knee flex.  Kevin's injury is a good reason to adopt the use of a paint stick and yardstick when teaching grip.</p>
</blockquote>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h2 id="playerswhogripdownontheclubtofindthebalancethatmatchestheircorezone">Players Who Grip Down on the Club to Find the Balance that Matches Their Core Zone</h2>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h3 id="anthonykim">Anthony Kim</h3>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/2pBWTLu"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/2pBWTLu.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/hCuH5VP"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/hCuH5VP.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<h3 id="brookehenderson">Brooke Henderson</h3>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/pQdLqnq"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/pQdLqnq.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<h3 id="tommyfleetwood">Tommy Fleetwood</h3>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/wd9hEsu"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/wd9hEsu.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<h3 id="pgatourplayerbobesmithwithagripsizethatfits">PGA Tour Player Bob E Smith with a Grip Size that Fits</h3>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/W3SqQlw"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/W3SqQlw.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<h3 id="bobesmithwithagripsizethatistoosmall">Bob E Smith with a Grip Size that is Too Small</h3>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/zJcpo1f"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/zJcpo1f.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<h1 id="puttergripsize">Putter Grip Size</h1>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p>The following video shows the original testing of putter grip size in Dr. Frank Jobe's biomechanics lab at Centinela Hospital in 2005.</p>
<iframe width="560" height="315" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/lvswGZfdPm4?si=Ds8EMa032FWyq2QG" title="YouTube video player" frameborder="0" allow="accelerometer; autoplay; clipboard-write; encrypted-media; gyroscope; picture-in-picture; web-share" referrerpolicy="strict-origin-when-cross-origin" allowfullscreen></iframe>
<p>This brief video summarizes the putting protocol I used for the Balance research at Centinela Hospital from pilot studies in the late 1990s through 2007. This video highlights one of the pro subjects, Ramon Brobio. Ramon won the putting title on the Asian Tour in 2004. Notice the deterioration in Ramon's performance when he changes putter grip sizes from his measured size to a size that is too small. Grip size impacts heel to toe balance which in turn opens and closes the hip line altering club path. The balance results were gleaned from the data captured by the 1000 force sensors in each of the subject's shoes and changes in body angles as measured by the light sensors on the player's body.</p>
<h2 id="fittingstudentsputtergripsize">Fitting Student's Putter Grip Size</h2>
<blockquote>
<p>Add <strong>350 mils</strong> to the measured irons and woods grip size in your students <strong>Dominant Core Zone Stance Widths</strong> to determine their <strong>Putter Grip Size.</strong></p>
</blockquote>
</div>]]></content:encoded></item><item><title><![CDATA[San Antonio PGA Summit: Wright Balance® 2/10/26]]></title><description><![CDATA[<div class="kg-card-markdown"><h2 id="davidfwrightphdpgajimnittolipga">David F. Wright, Ph.D., PGA &amp; Jim Nittoli, PGA</h2>
<p>Copyright, Wright Balance® 2026</p>
<h3 id="theseebooksareforyourreviewfollowingthisseminar">These eBooks are for your review following this seminar:</h3>
<ol>
<li>This eBook shows PGA Tour players and the Core Zone that matches their Swing</li>
</ol>
<h2 id="thethreeswingsofwrightbalance">The Three Swings of Wright Balance®</h2>
<p><a href="https://instructions.wrightbalance.com/the-three-swings-of-wright-balance/">https://instructions.wrightbalance.com/the-three-swings-of-wright-balance/</a></p>
<ol start="2">
<li>This eBook</li></ol></div>]]></description><link>https://instructions.wrightbalance.com/grip-sizing-2/</link><guid isPermaLink="false">6980fdbd33f75d000162ad45</guid><dc:creator><![CDATA[David F. Wright]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Thu, 05 Feb 2026 22:53:17 GMT</pubDate><content:encoded><![CDATA[<div class="kg-card-markdown"><h2 id="davidfwrightphdpgajimnittolipga">David F. Wright, Ph.D., PGA &amp; Jim Nittoli, PGA</h2>
<p>Copyright, Wright Balance® 2026</p>
<h3 id="theseebooksareforyourreviewfollowingthisseminar">These eBooks are for your review following this seminar:</h3>
<ol>
<li>This eBook shows PGA Tour players and the Core Zone that matches their Swing</li>
</ol>
<h2 id="thethreeswingsofwrightbalance">The Three Swings of Wright Balance®</h2>
<p><a href="https://instructions.wrightbalance.com/the-three-swings-of-wright-balance/">https://instructions.wrightbalance.com/the-three-swings-of-wright-balance/</a></p>
<ol start="2">
<li>This eBook is an overview of how to determine Grip Size by Core Zone.  Grip size changes heel to toe balance.  Even if a player knows their Core Zone Dominance and what their matching swing elements are, an incorrect grip size will compromise balance changing path and performance.</li>
</ol>
<h2 id="gripsizing">Grip Sizing</h2>
<p><a href="https://instructions.wrightbalance.com/grip-sizing-by-core-zone/">https://instructions.wrightbalance.com/grip-sizing-by-core-zone/</a></p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/giFOoAt"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/giFOoAt.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/vj5KCQV"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/vj5KCQV.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/X0lGq4g"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/X0lGq4g.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/iQzEjcF"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/iQzEjcF.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<h1 id="thethreecorezones2016">The Three Core Zones 2016</h1>
<h3 id="thisillustrationisof3corezoneswith3subregionsineachzonecurrently2026thereare11subregionsineachofthe3zonesstilleachpersonhasonlyonedominantcorezone">This illustration is of 3 Core Zones with 3 subregions in each Zone.  Currently (2026) there are 11 subregions in each of the 3 Zones.  STILL, each person has only ONE &quot;Dominant Core Zone&quot;</h3>
<p><img src="http://i.imgur.com/WiQscJ6.jpg" alt="enter image description here"></p>
<h1 id="balancebycorezone">Balance By Core Zone</h1>
<ol>
<li>
<blockquote>
<p><strong>Remove All Rings &amp; Tape on Fingers, Toes and band-aids Before Testing</strong>,</p>
</blockquote>
</li>
<li>
<blockquote>
<p><strong>Inquire about neck, shoulder, back, wrist, etc injuries.  If yes, there is an alternate test shown at the end of this overview</strong></p>
</blockquote>
</li>
</ol>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h2 id="howtotest">How to Test</h2>
<blockquote>
<p>If your player has no neck or shoulder issues, this is a simple test to use in each of the 8 inch Performance Zone Stance Widths</p>
<p><strong>Use an alignment stick to stand on and note your balance in the stance width of demonstrated strength as illustrated by the feet imprints on a balance mat.  You will note that your hips square only in your 8 inch Stance Range of your demonstrated power</strong></p>
</blockquote>
<iframe width="560" height="315" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/q4jFYg7Fj4I?si=cdQPKdBfqshBnzvD" title="YouTube video player" frameborder="0" allow="accelerometer; autoplay; clipboard-write; encrypted-media; gyroscope; picture-in-picture; web-share" referrerpolicy="strict-origin-when-cross-origin" allowfullscreen></iframe>
<h2 id="uppercore816inchesplusorminus1inch">Upper Core (8 - 16 inches plus or minus 1 inch)</h2>
<blockquote>
<p>Test first at 10 to 14 inch stance width.  If power, test to find absolute 8 inch performance range plus or minus one inch as shown in the video demonstrating how to test.</p>
</blockquote>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/YtGiC7w"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/YtGiC7w.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<h2 id="howtotestvideoreview">How to Test Video Review</h2>
<blockquote>
<p><strong>Use 8 to 16 inch Stance Width Range for Testing</strong></p>
</blockquote>
<iframe width="560" height="315" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/q4jFYg7Fj4I?si=cdQPKdBfqshBnzvD" title="YouTube video player" frameborder="0" allow="accelerometer; autoplay; clipboard-write; encrypted-media; gyroscope; picture-in-picture; web-share" referrerpolicy="strict-origin-when-cross-origin" allowfullscreen></iframe>
>
<p><img src="http://i.imgur.com/PvzXzAq.jpg" alt="enter image description here"></p>
<p><img src="http://i.imgur.com/zni2NBk.jpg" alt="enter image description here"></p>
<blockquote>
<p>If this is your stance width Zone of Power, add knee flex within the 8 to 16 inch range and you will note that your balance is over the BALLS OF YOUR FEET. Note that if you stand wider than 16 inches or narrower than 8 inches (plus or minus one inch) that your weight moves forward in one foot and back in the other.</p>
<p>Use an alignment stick to stand on and note your balance over the balls of your feet as shown by the feet imprints on a balance mat in the above illustrations.  You will note that you stay balanced &amp; your hips remain square only between 8 &amp; 16 inches plus or minus 1 inch</p>
</blockquote>
<h2 id="middlecore1624inchesplusorminus1inch">Middle Core (16 - 24 inches plus or minus 1 inch)</h2>
<blockquote>
<p>Test first at 18 inch stance width due to overlapping stance Widths .  If power, test to find absolute 8 inch performance range plus or minus one inch (16 to 24 inches) as shown in the video demonstrating how to test.</p>
</blockquote>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/3j6ZMny"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/3j6ZMny.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<h2 id="howtotestvideoreview">How to Test Video Review</h2>
<blockquote>
<p><strong>Use 16 to 24 inch Stance Width Range for Testing</strong></p>
</blockquote>
<iframe width="560" height="315" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/q4jFYg7Fj4I?si=cdQPKdBfqshBnzvD" title="YouTube video player" frameborder="0" allow="accelerometer; autoplay; clipboard-write; encrypted-media; gyroscope; picture-in-picture; web-share" referrerpolicy="strict-origin-when-cross-origin" allowfullscreen></iframe>
<p><img src="http://i.imgur.com/GAy2lWT.jpg" alt="enter image description here"></p>
<p><img src="http://i.imgur.com/3in6Tq8.jpg" alt="enter image description here"></p>
<blockquote>
<p>If this is your stance width Zone of Power, add knee flex within the 16 to 24 inch range and you will note that your balance is just behind the BALLS OF YOUR FEET and Forward of the CENTER OF YOUR ARCHES. Note that if you stand NARROWER than 16 inches or WIDER than 24 inches (plus or minus one inch) that your weight moves forward in one foot and back in the other.</p>
<p>Use an alignment stick to stand on and note your balance just behind the balls of your feet and just forward of the center of your arches as shown by the feet imprints on a balance mat in the above illustrations.  You will note that you stay balanced &amp; your hips remain square only between 16 &amp; 24 inches plus or minus 1 inch</p>
</blockquote>
<h2 id="lowercore2028inchesplusorminus1inch">Lower Core (20 - 28 inches plus or minus 1 inch)</h2>
<blockquote>
<p>Test first at 26 inch stance width due to overlapping stance Widths with Middle Core.  If power, test to find absolute 8 inch performance range plus or minus one inch (20 to 28 inches) as shown in video demonstrating how to test.</p>
</blockquote>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/PDU0HuO"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/PDU0HuO.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<h2 id="howtotestvideoreview">How to Test Video Review</h2>
<blockquote>
<p><strong>Use 20 to 28 inch Stance Width Range for Testing</strong></p>
</blockquote>
<iframe width="560" height="315" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/q4jFYg7Fj4I?si=cdQPKdBfqshBnzvD" title="YouTube video player" frameborder="0" allow="accelerometer; autoplay; clipboard-write; encrypted-media; gyroscope; picture-in-picture; web-share" referrerpolicy="strict-origin-when-cross-origin" allowfullscreen></iframe>
<p><img src="http://i.imgur.com/iACtBH9.jpg" alt="enter image description here"></p>
<p><img src="http://i.imgur.com/fCSqoiw.jpg" alt="enter image description here"></p>
<blockquote>
<blockquote>
<p>If this is your stance width Zone of Power, add knee flex within the 20 to 28 inch range and you will note that your balance is OVER the CENTER OF YOUR ARCHES. Note that if you stand NARROWER than 20 inches or WIDER than 28 inches (plus or minus one inch) that your weight moves forward in one foot and back in the other.</p>
</blockquote>
<p>Use an alignment stick to stand on and note your balance is over the center of your arches as shown by the feet imprints on a balance mat in the above illustrations.  You will note that you stay balanced &amp; your hips remain square only between 20 &amp; 28 inches plus or minus 1 inch</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="dominantcorezone">Dominant Core Zone</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>Each of us has one <strong>Dominant Zone</strong> You just experienced your <strong>Dominant Zone</strong> if you participated in this exercise.  Each <strong>Dominant Zone</strong> has:</p>
</blockquote>
<ul>
<li>A predictable left and right hand Grip</li>
<li>A predictable Stance Width Range (PSR)</li>
<li>A predictable Sequence of Motion</li>
<li>A predictable Posture</li>
<li>A predictable amount of foot flare for maximum ground reaction force</li>
<li>A predictable point of heel to toe balance in the predictable Stance Width Range (PSR)</li>
</ul>
<h1 id="history">History</h1>
<h1 id="1992">1992</h1>
<p><img src="http://i.imgur.com/GKv8c9L.jpg" alt="enter image description here"></p>
<p><img src="http://i.imgur.com/9147EZs.jpg" alt="enter image description here"></p>
<p><img src="http://i.imgur.com/p8L6Mqv.jpg" alt="enter image description here"></p>
<h1 id="1995">1995</h1>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/L4s9Lg7"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/L4s9Lg7.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<h1 id="1998">1998</h1>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/W2v5Yjd"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/W2v5Yjd.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<h1 id="20002006">2000 - 2006</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>Dr. Frank Jobe's Biomechanics Lab (Tommy John Surgery) at Centinela Hospital, Los Angeles</p>
<ol>
<li>Four (4) Biomedical Technicians</li>
<li>Frank Jobe, MD Orthopedic Surgeon to LA Dodgers &amp; Centinela Medical Van for PGA Tour</li>
<li>Michael Melman, MD, Internist / Team Physician for the LA Dodgers</li>
<li>Robert Watkins, MD Orthopedic Surgeon (Spine Surgeon) consultant to PGA Tour</li>
<li>James M. Smith Biophysicist</li>
<li>David F. Wright, Ph.D.,PGA Balance Researcher wrote research protocols and did the data analysis</li>
</ol>
</blockquote>
<blockquote>
<p><strong>1000 Force Sensors in each shoe</strong></p>
<p><strong>75</strong> distinct captures</p>
<p><strong>4</strong> different 6 iron grip Sizes for each player as measured by hand size (6 irons provided by Cleveland Golf)</p>
<p><strong>4</strong> different putter grip Sizes for each player as measured by hand size (putters provided by Cleveland Golf)</p>
</blockquote>
<h2 id="insoleforforcesensors">Insole for Force Sensors</h2>
<p><img src="http://i.imgur.com/PhKzAVJ.jpg" alt="enter image description here"></p>
<h2 id="forcesensorinsoleswereteatheredtothelabcomputerforcapture">Force Sensor Insoles were Teathered to the Lab Computer for Capture</h2>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/6YqDPTz"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/6YqDPTz.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/i21jyYP"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/i21jyYP.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/joU1hUF"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/joU1hUF.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/Gwbu7Hf"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/Gwbu7Hf.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/7mDvz3X"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/7mDvz3X.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<h2 id="linesofforce">Lines of Force</h2>
<blockquote>
<p>Able to predict club path through impact with one of the these three lines of force: Downswing Club Path (DCP)</p>
</blockquote>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/BFjBEvI"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/BFjBEvI.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p><img src="http://i.imgur.com/yiDPHTS.jpg" alt="enter image description here"></p>
<p><img src="http://i.imgur.com/yXFOvOZ.jpg" alt="enter image description here"></p>
<h3 id="pgatourplayerkevinstadler">PGA Tour Player Kevin Stadler</h3>
<p><img src="http://i.imgur.com/OyRxM50.jpg" alt="enter image description here"></p>
<p><img src="https://i.imgur.com/3Oz7Yhz.jpg" alt="enter image description here"></p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/BFjBEvI"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/BFjBEvI.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p><img src="http://i.imgur.com/yiDPHTS.jpg" alt="enter image description here"></p>
<p><img src="http://i.imgur.com/yXFOvOZ.jpg" alt="enter image description here"></p>
<h3 id="sandrapalmerlpgatourplayergolfhalloffame">Sandra Palmer, LPGA Tour Player &amp; Golf Hall of Fame</h3>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/pMYCBzc"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/pMYCBzc.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<h1 id="corezones">Core Zones</h1>
<h1 id="2009">2009</h1>
<h2 id="3corezoneswith3subregionsineachzoneeachofthe3subregionsisrecruitedbystancewidth">3 Core Zones with 3subregions in each Zone.  Each of the 3 subregions is recruited by Stance Width.</h2>
<p><img src="http://i.imgur.com/WiQscJ6.jpg" alt="enter image description here"></p>
<p>Balance Mat with 1000 sensors under each foot (Tech Scan) &amp; continued testing Core Zones...</p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/AJ3lWjs"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/AJ3lWjs.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p>...and Grip Size</p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/TBpouQF"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/TBpouQF.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<h1 id="2017">2017</h1>
<h2 id="europeanpgatourplayercolinmontgomerie">European PGA Tour Player Colin Montgomerie</h2>
<p><strong>Inside his Performance Stance Range(8 to 16 inches) putter is square</strong></p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/W6wdHoG"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/W6wdHoG.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p><strong>Wider than his Performance Stance Range (17 inches)&amp; putter face closes</strong></p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/f1afQTc"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/f1afQTc.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<h1 id="2020">2020</h1>
<h3 id="3corezoneswith5subregionsineachzoneeachsubregionisrecruitedbystancewidth">3 Core Zones with 5 subregions in each Zone. Each subregion is recruited by stance Width</h3>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/k4AMLmq"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/k4AMLmq.png" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<h1 id="202526">2025 - 26</h1>
<h3 id="3corezoneswith11subregionsineachzoneeachsubregionisrecruitedbystancewidth">3 Core Zones with 11 subregions in each Zone. Each subregion is recruited by stance Width</h3>
<p>Illustration Pending</p>
<h1 id="gripsizing">Grip Sizing</h1>
<h2 id="measurementhistory">Measurement History</h2>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/W2v5Yjd"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/W2v5Yjd.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/nGmwm4j"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/nGmwm4j.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/78KbnFA"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/78KbnFA.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/tqUttwp"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/tqUttwp.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/Z1nIwYU"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/Z1nIwYU.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<h3 id="gripsizeismeasuredinthousandthsofaninchmils1mil1thousandthofaninch">Grip Size is Measured in thousandths of an Inch (mils) 1 mil= 1 thousandth of an inch</h3>
<p>**This image shows a grip size of 875 mils on a standard grip.  Wright Balance measures to the middle finger of the lead hand.  Industry standard is to measure 2 inches down from the butt.</p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/LvpwkSv"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/LvpwkSv.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<h2 id="puttergripsizeislargerthanironsandwoods">Putter Grip Size is Larger than irons and woods</h2>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/f6k9ahX"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/f6k9ahX.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<h2 id="testinggripsizewithlpgatourplayerlaurierinker">Testing Grip Size with LPGA Tour Player, Laurie Rinker</h2>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/DnOKYKW"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/DnOKYKW.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<h2 id="thisgripdoesnotfitlaurie">This Grip Does Not Fit Laurie</h2>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/1D0R65O"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/1D0R65O.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<h2 id="testinglauriewithagripthatfitsherhandsize">Testing Laurie with a Grip that Fits Her Hand Size</h2>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/n3IaIKY"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/n3IaIKY.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<h2 id="bobesmithgripstoosmall">Bob E Smith Grips Too Small</h2>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/zJcpo1f"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/zJcpo1f.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<h2 id="pgatourplayerbobesmithwithgripsthatfit">PGA Tour Player Bob E Smith with Grips that Fit</h2>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/W3SqQlw"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/W3SqQlw.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<h1 id="playerswhoincreasegripsize">Players Who Increase Grip Size</h1>
<h2 id="brysondechambeau">Bryson DeChambeau</h2>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/KtprSZs"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/KtprSZs.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<h2 id="bubbawatson">Bubba Watson</h2>
<p><strong>Plus 12 /14 wraps Masters 2012 2014</strong></p>
<h2 id="retiefgoosen">Retief Goosen</h2>
<p><strong>Jumbo / OverSize plus 7 Extra Wraps wraps<br>
Won the US Open 2001 &amp; 2004</strong></p>
<h2 id="tonyfinau">Tony Finau</h2>
<p><strong>13 Extra Wraps</strong></p>
<h2 id="scottiescheffler">Scottie Scheffler</h2>
<p>6 Extra Wraps</p>
<h1 id="brysondechambeau">Bryson Dechambeau</h1>
<p>Jumbo Max</p>
<h2 id="dennispaulson">Dennis Paulson</h2>
<p><strong>Standard with 6 extra wraps under right hand...90s before no taper grips</strong></p>
<h2 id="kevinstadler">Kevin Stadler</h2>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/lwEYyvh"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/lwEYyvh.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<h1 id="playerswhogripdownontheclub">Players Who Grip Down on the Club</h1>
<h2 id="anthonykim">Anthony Kim</h2>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/2pBWTLu"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/2pBWTLu.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/hCuH5VP"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/hCuH5VP.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<h2 id="brookehenderson">Brooke Henderson</h2>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/pQdLqnq"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/pQdLqnq.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<h2 id="tommyfleetwood">Tommy Fleetwood</h2>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/wd9hEsu"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/wd9hEsu.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<h1 id="balancebycorezone">Balance By Core Zone</h1>
<p>Upper Core (8 - 16 inches plus or minus 1 inch)</p>
<p><img src="http://i.imgur.com/PvzXzAq.jpg" alt="enter image description here"></p>
<p><img src="http://i.imgur.com/zni2NBk.jpg" alt="enter image description here"></p>
<p>Middle Core (16 - 24 inches plus or minus 1 inch)</p>
<p><img src="http://i.imgur.com/GAy2lWT.jpg" alt="enter image description here"></p>
<p><img src="http://i.imgur.com/3in6Tq8.jpg" alt="enter image description here"></p>
<p>Lower Core (20 - 28 inches plus or minus 1 inch)</p>
<p><img src="http://i.imgur.com/iACtBH9.jpg" alt="enter image description here"></p>
<p><img src="http://i.imgur.com/fCSqoiw.jpg" alt="enter image description here"></p>
<h1 id="theimpactofgripsizebycorezone">The Impact of Grip Size by Core Zone</h1>
<h1 id="bobesmithuppercore">Bob E Smith (Upper Core)</h1>
<h2 id="playinggripsize">Playing Grip Size</h2>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/W3SqQlw"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/W3SqQlw.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<h2 id="toosmallagrip">Too Small a Grip</h2>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/zJcpo1f"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/zJcpo1f.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<h2 id="gripsizetoosmall">Grip Size Too Small</h2>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/94yGWi7"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/94yGWi7.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/asCdOg6"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/asCdOg6.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/BujFJ7S"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/BujFJ7S.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<h2 id="gripsizetoobig">Grip Size Too Big</h2>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/1lgWrNm"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/1lgWrNm.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/Qg7DfTH"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/Qg7DfTH.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/UDW5Vaj"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/UDW5Vaj.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<h1 id="balancesummarybycorezone">Balance Summary by Core Zone</h1>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/V4cEcTT"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/V4cEcTT.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<h1 id="tapeonmiddlelowercorepowerspotsontrailhandremoveringsonleadhandsquarehiplinefrom0inchesto36incheswithequalpowerinallstancewidths">Tape on Middle &amp; Lower  Core Power Spots on Trail Hand  (remove rings on lead hand)= Square hip line from 0 inches to 36 inches with equal power in all stance widths</h1>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/MLZaFvc"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/MLZaFvc.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<h1 id="tapeonupperandlowercorepowerspotsontrailhandremoveringsonleadhandsquarehiplinefrom0inchesto36incheswithequalpowerinallstancewidths">Tape on Upper and Lower Core Power Spots on Trail Hand (remove rings on lead hand)= Square hip line from 0 inches to 36 inches with equal power in all stance widths</h1>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/FyUJAff"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/FyUJAff.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<h1 id="tapeonmiddleuppercorepowerspotsontrailhandremoveringsonleadhandsquarehiplinefrom0inchesto36incheswithequalpowerinallstancewidths">Tape on Middle &amp; Upper Core Power Spots on Trail Hand (remove rings on lead hand)= Square hip line from 0 inches to 36 inches with equal power in all stance widths</h1>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/0OfLp70"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/0OfLp70.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p>NOTE:  If your student has a neck or shoulder injury and you can't test their Power by Core Zone, this video demonstrates testing 8 inch stance range with a bar on the person's hips. In this video, the 8 inch range tested is an Upper Core Player.</p>
<iframe width="560" height="315" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/QgkzrBQ2PUc?si=sjTnjKZALoMBXpI5" title="YouTube video player" frameborder="0" allow="accelerometer; autoplay; clipboard-write; encrypted-media; gyroscope; picture-in-picture; web-share" referrerpolicy="strict-origin-when-cross-origin" allowfullscreen></iframe>
<p>*&gt;If your player has no neck or shoulder issues, this is a simple test to use in each of the Performance Zone Stance Widths (Upper Core 8 to 16 inches; Middle Core 16 to 24 inches &amp; Lower Core 20 t 28 inches).  Each of the stance ranges is plus or minus 1 inch on both ends of the 8 inch range.</p>
<iframe width="560" height="315" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/q4jFYg7Fj4I?si=cdQPKdBfqshBnzvD" title="YouTube video player" frameborder="0" allow="accelerometer; autoplay; clipboard-write; encrypted-media; gyroscope; picture-in-picture; web-share" referrerpolicy="strict-origin-when-cross-origin" allowfullscreen></iframe>
</div>]]></content:encoded></item><item><title><![CDATA[Questions for Wright Balance® Professionals Certification / Recertification (Quiz 1)]]></title><description><![CDATA[<div class="kg-card-markdown"><blockquote>
<p>**Copyright, Wright Balance® 2026</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="1question">1. Question</h1>
<p>When the trail hip is high at address (set up) when observed from behind as shown here,</p>
<blockquote>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/DvxHEXw"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/DvxHEXw.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
</blockquote>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/FI8w1ud"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/FI8w1ud.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/LD8PzFo"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/LD8PzFo.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<blockquote>
<p>you will likely see which of the following in a standing tall posture Face-on?**</p>
</blockquote>
<blockquote>
<ol>
<li>The shoulders and hips are level</li>
<li>The trail shoulder is lower and<br>
the</li></ol></blockquote></div>]]></description><link>https://instructions.wrightbalance.com/questions-for-wright-balance-teachers/</link><guid isPermaLink="false">691b8a9d33f75d000162ac46</guid><dc:creator><![CDATA[David F. Wright]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Sun, 25 Jan 2026 23:24:52 GMT</pubDate><content:encoded><![CDATA[<div class="kg-card-markdown"><blockquote>
<p>**Copyright, Wright Balance® 2026</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="1question">1. Question</h1>
<p>When the trail hip is high at address (set up) when observed from behind as shown here,</p>
<blockquote>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/DvxHEXw"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/DvxHEXw.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
</blockquote>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/FI8w1ud"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/FI8w1ud.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/LD8PzFo"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/LD8PzFo.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<blockquote>
<p>you will likely see which of the following in a standing tall posture Face-on?**</p>
</blockquote>
<blockquote>
<ol>
<li>The shoulders and hips are level</li>
<li>The trail shoulder is lower and<br>
the trail hip is higher</li>
<li>The trail hand internally rotates more than the lead hand</li>
<li>None of the above</li>
</ol>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>2</p>
</blockquote>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h1 id="2question">2. Question</h1>
<p>Pelvic rotation is easily corrected  in all stance widths:</p>
<blockquote>
<ol>
<li>In <strong>Two MINUTES</strong></li>
<li>By propagation of force from tape on 3 Power Spots of the trail hand</li>
<li>By doing the Wright Balance® Express Exercises</li>
<li>All of the Above</li>
</ol>
<blockquote></blockquote>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="2answer">2. Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>4 All of the Above</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="3question">3. Question</h1>
<p>When tested, &amp; the Lead Hand Grip is too strong, it will:</p>
<blockquote>
<ol>
<li>Restrict shoulder rotation in the through swing</li>
<li>Restrict shoulder rotation in the backswing</li>
<li>Is unrelated to shoulder rotation</li>
<li>None of the above</li>
</ol>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="3answer">3.  Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<ol start="2">
<li></li>
</ol>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="4question">4. Question</h1>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p>You have done The Wright Balance Express 2 minute Exercise in a standing tall posture and your  arms and hands hang exactly the same in all stance widths as shown pre and post exercise here,</p>
<blockquote>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/qrL4MzA"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/qrL4MzA.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
</blockquote>
<blockquote>
<p>1 The grip is set at the same angle as the carrying angle<br>
2.The proper grip is tested without a club by shoulder rotation<br>
3.Both hands are set exactly the same as the carrying angle to have unrestricted rotation in the backswing and the through swing<br>
4. All of the above</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="4answer">4.  Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<ol start="4">
<li>All of the above</li>
</ol>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="5question">5. Question</h1>
<p>What is the exercise that levels the shoulders &amp; hips, lowers the trail hip at address and last for over 24 hours?</p>
<p>The following illustrations show the before and after.</p>
<p>The <em><strong>raised</strong></em> trail hip <strong>BEFORE</strong> and <strong>AFTER</strong></p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/LD8PzFo"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/LD8PzFo.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/rZtG7lQ"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/rZtG7lQ.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p>The trail hip <strong>AFTER</strong></p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/5tooheB"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/5tooheB.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/3iEB97S"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/3iEB97S.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<blockquote>
<ol>
<li>An internal oblique exercise</li>
<li>An external oblique exercise</li>
<li>The &quot;Dead Bug&quot; exercise tested in Dr. Frank Jobe's biomechanics lab</li>
<li>The Wright Balance® Express in one Stance Width</li>
<li>All of the above</li>
</ol>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>4</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="6question">6. Question</h1>
<p>Dr. Wright has looked at grip size  &amp; how it  impacts BALANCE since 1992.  He has concluded with Proof of Concept that:</p>
<ol>
<li>A Handle size that does not fit the person's hand impacts heel to toe balance but not rotation inside the Performance Stance Range (PSR) if the grip is assumed after the stance is set</li>
<li>A Handle size that does not fit the person's hand <strong>ALSO</strong> creates <strong>NO</strong> pelvic rotation <em><strong>outside</strong></em> the Dominant Core Performance Stance Range regardless when the grip is assumed</li>
<li>Following the Wright Balance® Express, the person can play with any handle size they choose.</li>
<li>All of the above</li>
</ol>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>1</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="7question">7 Question</h1>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p>When the shoulders and hips are level and the hands hang exactly the same at the player's side, how is the grip set in the lead and trail hands?**</p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<ol>
<li>The same as the player's Carrying Angle</li>
<li>The &quot;V&quot; of the lead thumb and index finger should be pointing at their chin</li>
<li>If it is an Upper Core Player, they should always use a complimentary grip</li>
<li>If it is an Upper Core Player, they should use a &quot;butterfly&quot; grip</li>
<li>None of the above</li>
</ol>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>1</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="8question">8. Question</h1>
<p>The following illustrations from 2015 show setting the lead hand at a precise angle to maximize backswing rotation.</p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/1bdAK4s"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/1bdAK4s.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/86iICGM"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/86iICGM.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p>How is this precise angle determined?</p>
<blockquote>
<ol>
<li>By using the player's spine angle after they set their posture</li>
<li>By using the player's carrying angle</li>
<li>By setting a player's grip on a club and testing multiple positions to find the proper angle of the lead hand</li>
<li>When the trail palm covers the lead thumb, that is the angle of the grip of the lead hand</li>
</ol>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>2</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="9question">9 Question</h1>
<p>How does your average student look when standing tall face on?</p>
<ol>
<li>One shoulder is lower</li>
<li>The hip on the same side of the low shoulder is high</li>
<li>There is an internal rotation of the hand opposite of the high hip and low shoulder</li>
<li>All of the above</li>
</ol>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>4</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="10question">10 Question</h1>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p>The following illustration is of a player standing on Smart 2 Move balance plates.  What Core Zone would the player showing this balance configuration be?</p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/p2F9LcC"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/p2F9LcC.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<ol>
<li>Upper Core</li>
<li>Middle Core</li>
<li>Lower Core</li>
<li>When this configuration is present, the player can play comfortably from any position.</li>
</ol>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>1</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="11question">11 Question</h1>
<p>If a player starts the club back with hips shoulders, arms and hands together, where will the lead knee point at the top of their swing?</p>
<p>1, Behind the Ball<br>
2. In front of the Ball<br>
3. At the Ball<br>
4. None of the above</p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>3</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="12question">12 Question</h1>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p>Why should a player stand on an alignment stick when practicing?</p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<ol>
<li>To be certain they load their trail heel at the top of their swing</li>
<li>To experience balance as a straight line through their swing</li>
<li>To test their ability to rotate to their lead heel in their downswing.</li>
<li>None of the above</li>
<li>All of the above</li>
</ol>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>2</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="13question">13 Question</h1>
<p>What am I testing in this illustration?</p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/n3IaIKY"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/n3IaIKY.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<ol>
<li>Grip Power Spots</li>
<li>Grip Size</li>
<li>The downswing path</li>
<li>Stance width balance</li>
<li>None of the above</li>
</ol>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>2</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="14question">14 Question</h1>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p>What is the downside of a grip size that does not fit even though you set your stance before you assume your grip on the club?</p>
<ol>
<li>If the grip is too small, it will generally move you toward your toes.</li>
<li>If the grip is too big, it will generally move you toward your heels.</li>
<li>An improper grip size will compromise how you use the ground.</li>
<li>All of the above</li>
<li>None of the above</li>
</ol>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>4</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="15question">15 Question</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>The following illustration shows the impact grip size has on balance.  I am standing on a balance mat that was used in 2008 to study all factors of setup that impact balance. Note the &quot;line of force&quot; created by the grip size.</p>
</blockquote>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/TBpouQF"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/TBpouQF.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<blockquote>
<p>Does this grip fit?</p>
</blockquote>
<ol>
<li>Yes</li>
<li>No</li>
<li>Maybe</li>
<li>None of the above</li>
</ol>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>2</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="16question">16 Question</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>If I were to set up and do the downswing path test (DPT) and this &quot;line of force&quot; was the result what downswing path would this line of force create?</p>
</blockquote>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/yXFOvOZ"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/yXFOvOZ.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<ol>
<li>Outside-in and steep</li>
<li>A very shallow path</li>
<li>Square to the target line</li>
<li>None of the above</li>
</ol>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>1</p>
</blockquote>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h1 id="17question">17 Question</h1>
<p>What am I testing in the following photo?</p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/2cFVDCn"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/2cFVDCn.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<ol>
<li>The player's ability to balance without a club</li>
<li>A measured amount of resistance being recorded at his feet</li>
<li>The Dominant Core Zone</li>
<li>The Dominant Stance Width</li>
<li>None of the above</li>
</ol>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>3</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="18question">18 Question</h1>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p>There is a loss of power when the grip does not fit.  This image shows testing a handle size that fits.  Note the strength this player has when force is applied to the downswing path when the grip size <strong>FITS</strong>.</p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/AfbPUvD"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/AfbPUvD.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p>This image shows the loss of balance when force is applied to the downswing path when the grip <strong>DOES NOT</strong> fit.</p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/PItTe1m"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/PItTe1m.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p>The images above are important for determining if a grip fits or does not fit.  What is the next thing to do if you test a player as shown in these images and you move them off balance when testing?</p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<ol>
<li>Change the player's stance width to a different Core Zone</li>
<li>Have the player change their posture and retest</li>
<li>Be certain their Power Spots are set on the underside of the grip</li>
<li>Measure the player's hand size</li>
<li>None of the above</li>
</ol>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>4</p>
</blockquote>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h1 id="19question">19 Question</h1>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p>What should you suggest to your student when they present with a high trail hip when observed from behind at address?</p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<ol>
<li>Change their Dominant Core Zone so the trail hip lowers</li>
<li>Use secondary tilt to move the trail hip lower</li>
<li>Do the Wright Balance® Express Exercises</li>
<li>Change their stance width until their trail hip</li>
<li>None of the above</li>
</ol>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>3</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="20question">20 Question</h1>
<p>Grip size is measured in mils.  One (1) mil is:</p>
<ol>
<li>One thousandth of a millimeter</li>
<li>One quarter of a millimeter</li>
<li>One thousandth of an inch</li>
<li>One quarter of an inch</li>
</ol>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>3</p>
</blockquote>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h1 id="21question">21 Question</h1>
<p>What is being tested in the following illustration?</p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/tqUttwp"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/tqUttwp.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<ol>
<li>Balance</li>
<li>Lead hand Grip Size</li>
<li>Grip</li>
<li>Lead hand Power Spot</li>
<li>None of the above</li>
</ol>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>2</p>
</blockquote>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h1 id="22question">22. Question</h1>
<p>If the trail hand grip doesn't match the carrying angle or the exact angle of how the trail hand hangs in a particular stance width, what impact does that have on shoulder rotation?</p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<ol>
<li>The through swing shoulder rotation will be restricted</li>
<li>The backswing shoulder rotation will be restricted</li>
<li>The trail hand has no impact on shoulder rotation</li>
<li>None of the above</li>
</ol>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>1</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="23question">23 Question</h1>
<p>My student sets up and I am testing his power as shown in this illustration.</p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/2cFVDCn"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/2cFVDCn.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p>What am I testing for power if I have my student stand at 18 inches?</p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<ol>
<li>The Lower Core Zone</li>
<li>The Middle Core Zone</li>
<li>The Upper Core Zone</li>
<li>My student's power in his arms and hands</li>
<li>None of the above</li>
</ol>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>2</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="24question">24. Question</h1>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p>If I have my student use a paint stick to practice, what are they working on?</p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/E1E3lDI"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/E1E3lDI.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<ol>
<li>Wrist Cock</li>
<li>Grip</li>
<li>A flat lead wrist</li>
<li>All of the above</li>
<li>None of the above</li>
</ol>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>4</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="25question">25 Question</h1>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p>My student sets up and I am testing his power as shown in this illustration.</p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/2cFVDCn"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/2cFVDCn.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p>What am I testing for power if I have my student stand at 12 inches?</p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<ol>
<li>The Lower Core Zone</li>
<li>The Middle Core Zone</li>
<li>The Upper Core Zone</li>
<li>My student's power in his arms and hands</li>
<li>None of the above</li>
</ol>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>3</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="26question">26 Question</h1>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p>My student sets up and I am testing his power as shown in this illustration.</p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/2cFVDCn"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/2cFVDCn.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p>What Stance Width do I use to test his Lower Core Power?</p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<ol>
<li>20 - 24 inches</li>
<li>10 - 12 inches</li>
<li>26 - 27 inches</li>
<li>None of the above</li>
</ol>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>3</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="27question">27 Question</h1>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p>Why is the Downswing Club Path Test a Gold Standard for Wright Balance®?</p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<ol>
<li>It is used to test grip</li>
<li>It is used to test posture</li>
<li>It is used to test sequence of motion by Core Zone</li>
<li>It is never used to test ball flight or spin rate</li>
<li>All of the above</li>
</ol>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>5</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="28question">28 Question</h1>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/xAhhmi4"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/xAhhmi4.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p>Tiger is a middle Core player, what was his secret but unwitting advantage.</p>
<ol>
<li>He had a workout program that amplified his power with his irons and woods</li>
<li>His coaches were better than other player's coaches.  That is why many tour players would leave their coaches and seek out Tiger's.</li>
<li>His hips were square from 0 to 24 inches while other Middle Core Players were square from 16 to 24 inches</li>
<li>His putter grip size created a path that was true to his target line</li>
</ol>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>3</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="29question">29 Question</h1>
<p>What did Harvey Penick teach players to use to work on their grip?</p>
<ol>
<li>A yardstick</li>
<li>A wedge</li>
<li>A driver</li>
<li>A mid iron</li>
</ol>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>1</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="30question">30 Question</h1>
<p>How does a Wright Balance® Professional teach ball position, secondary tilt &amp; distance from the ball?</p>
<ol>
<li>Grip club with face clip and shaft parallel to the ground</li>
<li>Grip club with proper arms position on the chest wall</li>
<li>Grip Club so the Carrying Angle is set in the upper arms before addressing ball</li>
<li>Keeping elbows on the chest wall until the clubface is grounded</li>
<li>All of the above</li>
</ol>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>5</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="31question">31 Question</h1>
<p>What was Tigers Unwitting Secret that created a square hip line from 0 to 24 inches?</p>
<ol>
<li>He trained so much on balance that he was in better balance than most all other players</li>
<li>He worked on balance by making swings while standing on a large ball<br>
3.He placed tape on the middle finger Upper Core Power Spot of his trail hand<br>
4.He gripped the club before he assumed his posture and stance</li>
</ol>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>3</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="32question">32 Question</h1>
<p>What has no impact on heel to toe balance at address</p>
<ol>
<li>A grip that is too small</li>
<li>A grip that is too big</li>
<li>A yardstick</li>
<li>None of the above</li>
</ol>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>3</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="33question">33 Question</h1>
<p>To Learn how to place your hands on the club, use a paint stick and the downswing club path test (DPT).  What does the DPT show if the heel pad is too much on top of the paint stick?</p>
<ol>
<li>The trail hip will rise if the hips close</li>
<li>The hips will open or close when adding knee flex</li>
<li>The club path will still be on plane when tested</li>
<li>If the Player has done the Wright Balance Express, the heel pad position has no impact</li>
</ol>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>2</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="34question">34 Question</h1>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p>Where do you test the Downswing Club Path (DPT)?</p>
<ol>
<li>Always halfway through the backswing</li>
<li>Always at the top of the swing</li>
<li>Always with your stance and body facing the target line standing tall then adding knee flex</li>
<li>Always with your stance and body facing the target line while in your setup posture</li>
<li>None of the above</li>
</ol>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>3</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="35question">35 Question</h1>
<p>What grip created my fingers appearing parallel (as shown in the illustration below) when I open my hands when using a paint stick to practice?</p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/cFegzDl"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/cFegzDl.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<ol>
<li>I covered my lead thumb with my palm</li>
<li>I added my Power Spot on my trail middle finger to the paint stick before covering my lead palm</li>
<li>My lead hand grip is stronger than my trail hand grip</li>
<li>When I tape my Upper Core Power Spot of my trail hand</li>
</ol>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>2</p>
</blockquote>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h1 id="36question">36 Question</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>As Middle Core players, how did Sam Snead and Bobby Jones Start their swing?</p>
</blockquote>
<ol>
<li>They started their swing with their shoulders</li>
<li>They started their swing with their arms and hands</li>
<li>They started their swing with everything together (Upper and Lower Core simultaneously)</li>
<li>They started their swing with their lead knee or their trail hip</li>
</ol>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>3</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="37question">37 Question</h1>
<p>What does the following process do?</p>
<p>Have your student step to 11 inches, stand tall looking straight ahead with a bar on their hips.  Once they have assumed that stance width, hand them a large cup.</p>
<ol>
<li>If your Student's Dominant Core Zone is Lower, their hips will remain square</li>
<li>If your Student's Dominant Core Zone is Middle, their hips will remain square</li>
<li>If your student's hips rotate open or closed, you know that their Dominant Core Zone <strong>IS NOT</strong> their Upper Core</li>
<li>If your Student's Dominant Core Zone is  their Lower Core, their hips will remain square</li>
</ol>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>3</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="38question">38 Question</h1>
<p>Each of us has an 8 inch Performance Stance Range (PSR).</p>
<p>If your student's performance stance range is 16 to 24 inches, what is their Dominant Core Zone?</p>
<ol>
<li>Upper Core Zone</li>
<li>Middle Core Zone</li>
<li>Lower Core Zone</li>
<li>16 to 24 inches is not one of the 8 inch ranges we test</li>
</ol>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>2</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="39question">39 Question</h1>
<p>What was Tiger's unwitting secret that produced an advantage on the field? Remember, Tiger was a Middle Core Player.  His performance stance range (PSR) was 16 to 24 inches.</p>
<ol>
<li>He practiced a posture that gave him square hips from 0 to 24 inches</li>
<li>He put tape on his middle finger Upper Core Power Spot and his PSR moved to 0 to 24 inches</li>
<li>His trail thumb was touching his index finger of his lead hand and his PSR moved to 0 to 24 inches</li>
<li>He put tape on the second toe of his lead foot and his PSR moved to 0 to 24 inches</li>
</ol>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>2</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="40question">40 Question</h1>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p>What impact does placing tape on both the Upper Core Power Spot of the middle finger of the trail hand and the ring finger have on Performance Stance Range (PSR) as shown here in this photo of Tiger?</p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/trReXWT"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/trReXWT.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<ol>
<li>When 2 fingers next to each other are taped, regardless of location, the person returns to their 8 inch PSR and loses any advantage in stance width</li>
<li>The taping of fingers next to each other, especially on the trail hand, expands the Performance Stance Range (PSR) from the normal 8 inch range to 0 to 36 inches.</li>
<li>There is no effect other than the expansion of the 8 inch range to 24 total inches</li>
<li>None of the above</li>
</ol>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>1</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="41question">41 Question</h1>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p>Note Colin Montgomerie's lead knee is behind the ball at the top of his swing.</p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/91qlPec"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/91qlPec.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p>What does this lead knee tell us about how Colin started his golf swing?</p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<ol>
<li>With his shoulders &amp; Upper Body</li>
<li>With his arms and hands</li>
<li>With his lead knee or trail hip</li>
<li>With everything together</li>
<li>None of the above</li>
</ol>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>3</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="42question">42 Question</h1>
<p>Why can't grip size be checked inside a player's Performance Stance Range?</p>
<ol>
<li>Once the stance is set inside the performance range, the hips will remain square on any stance width when testing with the Wright Balance bat</li>
<li>Grip size won't show up in the first test of grip size regardless of stance width</li>
<li>None of the above</li>
<li>All of the above</li>
</ol>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>1</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="43question">43 Question</h1>
<p>If a Player's Performance Stance Width Range is between 8 and 16 inches, what is their Dominant Core Zone?</p>
<ol>
<li>Upper Core Zone</li>
<li>Middle Core Zone</li>
<li>Lower Core Zone</li>
<li>The 8 to 16 inch range is not a Core Zone</li>
</ol>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>1</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="44question">44 Question</h1>
<p>What happens if you tape 3 fingers of the trail hand (as shown in the illustration below) and remove all rings and band-aids from your lead hand and lead and trail feet.</p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/G53RHID"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/G53RHID.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<ol>
<li>You have eliminated a square hip line except inside the 8 inch Performance Stance Range (PSR)</li>
<li>Your hip line will be square from 0 to 36 inches</li>
<li>Your hip line will be square in each of the 8 inch ranges up to 28 inches</li>
<li>None of the above</li>
</ol>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>2</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="45question">45 Question</h1>
<p>What would be your Dominant Core Zone if your hips were square from 20 to 28 inches but rotated in any other stance width wider or narrower</p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<ol>
<li>Upper</li>
<li>Lower</li>
<li>Middle</li>
<li>That is not a 8 inch range for any Core Zone</li>
</ol>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>2</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="46question">46 Question</h1>
<p>How did Payne Stewart start his golf swing?</p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/VwPAjVu"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/VwPAjVu.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<ol>
<li>Arms and Hands</li>
<li>Everything together</li>
<li>His lead knee or trail hip</li>
<li>None of the above</li>
</ol>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>3</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="47question">47 Question</h1>
<p>Where would you expect to find this players Performance Stance Range?</p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/PvzXzAq"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/PvzXzAq.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<ol>
<li>16 to 24 inches</li>
<li>8 to 16 inches</li>
<li>20 to 28 inches</li>
<li>None of the above</li>
</ol>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>2</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="48question">48 Question</h1>
<p>How did Paula Creamer start her golf swing</p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/DmGt2V3"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/DmGt2V3.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<ol>
<li>Everything together</li>
<li>Lead knee or trail hip</li>
<li>Shoulders</li>
<li>None of the above</li>
</ol>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>3</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="49question">49 Question</h1>
<p>What does this image of Jai being tested show you?</p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/YdmCuaV"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/YdmCuaV.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<ol>
<li>The grip size does not fit</li>
<li>The Power Spots are not set correctly</li>
<li>Jai is not in his Performance Stance Range</li>
<li>None of the above</li>
</ol>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>2</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="50question">50 Question</h1>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p>I have a student who has had multiple back surgeries and a knee replacement.  What Core Zone could I potentially move him to so that he would have less torque in his backswing and through swing.</p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<ol>
<li>Middle Core Zone</li>
<li>Lower Core Zone</li>
<li>Upper Core Zone</li>
<li>Neutral Core Zone</li>
</ol>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>1</p>
</blockquote>
</div>]]></content:encoded></item><item><title><![CDATA[January 23 Training Draft 3]]></title><description><![CDATA[<div class="kg-card-markdown"><p>Copyright, Wright Balance® 2026</p>
<blockquote>
<p>&quot;Nature knows no right or wrong, only balance and imbalance&quot;<br>
Anonymous</p>
</blockquote>
<p>Many players have remarkable golf swings but not all can play at the highest level.  Hemmingway described in a sentence what separates people who rise to the top of their arena from those</p></div>]]></description><link>https://instructions.wrightbalance.com/january-23-training/</link><guid isPermaLink="false">6971066d33f75d000162ad17</guid><dc:creator><![CDATA[David F. Wright]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Fri, 23 Jan 2026 15:27:16 GMT</pubDate><content:encoded><![CDATA[<div class="kg-card-markdown"><p>Copyright, Wright Balance® 2026</p>
<blockquote>
<p>&quot;Nature knows no right or wrong, only balance and imbalance&quot;<br>
Anonymous</p>
</blockquote>
<p>Many players have remarkable golf swings but not all can play at the highest level.  Hemmingway described in a sentence what separates people who rise to the top of their arena from those who continue to struggle.  This quote encompasses all golfers regardless of their swing mechanics.</p>
<blockquote>
<p>&quot;The world breaks everyone and afterward many are strong at the broken places.&quot;</p>
</blockquote>
<p>Earnest Hemmingway 1929  <em><strong>A Farewell to Arms</strong></em></p>
<p>This statement is about mental toughness.  We will be exploring much more in this realm and what creates this state of resilience in the future.  I want you to understand that great play is <strong>NOT</strong> just about a great golf swing.  Great play is about picking yourself up after repeated failures and behaving as though you are about to make your first swing of the day, regardless of your past experiences.</p>
<blockquote>
<p>*&quot;When the Kinetic chain is aligned producing body symmetry, physical stress is at a minimum and performance is at a maximum&quot;  *<br>
David F. Wright 2026</p>
</blockquote>
<blockquote>
<p><em>&quot;Experience is the Measurement of TRUTH&quot;</em><br>
<em>David F. Wright 2018</em></p>
</blockquote>
<h2 id="findingbalance">Finding Balance</h2>
<p>As we train today, I will show you how to align your Kinetic Chain so that when we teach setup and motion, your student will have a setup with balance through the entire kinetic chain.  With this balance and an aligned kinetic chain, you and your students will create maximum ground reaction force, consistency and increased distance.</p>
<p>If you haven't reviewed the following eBooks, even after this training, these eBooks are a must to understand, review and provide to your students.  They will identify with the swings of the Tour Player's in their Core Zone and be more open to your instruction.</p>
<h3 id="the3swingsofwrightbalance">The 3 Swings of Wright Balance®</h3>
<p><a href="https://instructions.wrightbalance.com/the-three-swings-of-wright-balance/">https://instructions.wrightbalance.com/the-three-swings-of-wright-balance/</a></p>
<h3 id="thekineticchain">The Kinetic Chain</h3>
<p><a href="https://instructions.wrightbalance.com/the-wright-balance-express-the-kinetic-chain/">https://instructions.wrightbalance.com/the-wright-balance-express-the-kinetic-chain/</a></p>
<h2 id="conversationswithyourstudents">Conversations with Your Students:</h2>
<p>&quot;There are 3 Zones of the body where balance at ground level sets heel to toe balance. Each of us has <strong>only one</strong> of these three Zones that we are born with.  Each Zone has predictable heel to toe balance.  We call this one Zone our Dominant Zone.  This particular Zone we are born with is also where we have the most strength.</p>
<p>Each Zone has an 8 inch Stance Range where we have our best balance and strength when performing any activity.</p>
<p>The three Zones of Body are:</p>
<ol>
<li>Upper</li>
<li>Middle</li>
<li>Lower</li>
</ol>
<p>The Upper Body Zone at ground level sets heel to toe balance over the balls of the feet.  Upper Body Zone strength  is centered from the neck to the lower sternum.</p>
<p>The Middle Body Zone at ground level sets heel to toe balance just behind the balls of the feet and forward of the center of the arches.  Middle Body Zone strength is centered from the lower sternum to the naval.</p>
<p>Lower Body Zone Dominance sets heel to toe balance over the center of the arches.  Lower Body Zone strength is centered from the naval to the pelvic floor.</p>
<p>The following are abbreviations you will find throughout this eBook.</p>
<h2 id="acronyms">Acronyms:</h2>
<p><strong>DPT</strong>= The Wright Balance® Downswing Club Path Test<br>
<strong>PSR</strong>=  The Wright Balance® Performance Stance Range with:</p>
<blockquote>
<ol>
<li>The Upper Core PSR is <strong>8 to 16</strong> inches plus or minus 1 inch;</li>
<li>The Middle Core PSR is <strong>16 to 24</strong> inches plus or minus 1 inch; ;</li>
<li>The Lower Core PSR is <strong>20 to 28 inches</strong> plus or minus 1 inch</li>
</ol>
</blockquote>
<p><strong>WBX</strong> = The Wright Balance® Express, a 2 minute exercise that creates symmetry in all planes of motion,  levels the hips and shoulders and creates the same carrying angle in both left and right arms</p>
<h2 id="definitions">Definitions:</h2>
<p><strong>Planes of Motion</strong>= Body movement in lines parallel to the Planes of Motion:</p>
<blockquote>
<ol>
<li><strong>Rotational Plane</strong> (or Transverse / Axial Plane) is Observed as pelvic rotation; internal external rotation of hands, etc. and any rotation parallel to these motions</li>
</ol>
</blockquote>
<blockquote>
<ol start="2">
<li><strong>Sagittal Plane</strong> (Step forward and back and observe pelvic rotation and up and down movement of hips and shoulders)</li>
</ol>
</blockquote>
<blockquote>
<ol start="3">
<li><strong>Coronal / Frontal Plane</strong>    Hip &amp; Shoulder Height and any parallel motion in side to side movement</li>
</ol>
</blockquote>
<blockquote>
<p><strong>Kinetic Chain</strong> = The &quot;links&quot; of the body in a chain like fashion.  The kinetic chain includes the skeleton, ligaments, tendons, muscle and fascia.  The connection of the links in the kinetic chain determines subsequent body alignment as measured by the Planes of Motion.  When the Kinetic chain  is aligned, this produces body symmetry, physical stress is at a minimum and performance is at a maximum.</p>
</blockquote>
<blockquote>
<p><strong>Propagation of Force</strong> = Movement of &quot;force&quot; through the body based upon pressure at focal points (the hands for Wright Balance®).  This process is also known as &quot;mechanotransduction&quot; where a mechanical force (pressure on Power Spots) produces changes in the Core as measured by Planes of Motion.</p>
</blockquote>
<p>This eBook covers a review of the research on Propagation of Force:</p>
<p><a href="https://instructions.wrightbalance.com/how-power-spots-create-propagation-of-force/">https://instructions.wrightbalance.com/how-power-spots-create-propagation-of-force/</a></p>
<p><strong>Tiger Tape</strong>= Tape covering the non-dominant power spots on the trail hand producing a square hip line in the front and back of the rotational plane in all stance widths when standing tall with and without knee flex. However, even though your hips remain square, you will notice a subtle change in clubface when moving inside or outside the <strong>PSR</strong>.  When testing balance while standing  on an alignment stick you will notice that there is no change in heel to toe balance meaning that the Dominant Zone remains constant regardless of stance width within the 0 to 36 inches.</p>
<p><strong>California Freeway Finger</strong>= The middle finger used to do the <strong>WBX</strong> Students will either laugh or be disgusted by this definition.  Remember we recall things to which we attach emotion, humor or disgust.  Your student won't forget to use the middle finger when doing the <strong>WBX</strong> or taping for play.</p>
<p><strong>Alignment Stick</strong>= Used for standing on and testing points of heel to toe balance in each foot and when testing balance and grip size</p>
<p><strong>Paint Stick</strong> = Used for teaching grip via Harvey Penick</p>
<p><strong>Yardstick</strong> = Used for setting posture, distance from ball and ball position <strong>ONLY</strong> after learning grip.</p>
<p><strong>Face Clips</strong> = 2 Plastic Clips, one that attaches to the Grip for full swing and the other attaches to the shaft of the putter.  A card is centered  to the middle grove of an iron on the grip clip; the clip on the putter shaft is aligned square to the top edge of the putter head, not the leading edge</p>
<p><strong>AHA Test</strong> = When you stand with your palm on the butt of the club and test a student's power that is said to be their &quot;AHA&quot; moment.<br>
<strong>Upper Core</strong><br>
<strong>Middle Core</strong><br>
<strong>Lower Core</strong><br>
<strong>OR</strong> when you test for the Dominant Core Zone by each Performance Stance Range (<strong>PSR</strong>) as demonstrated in this video testing an Upper Core Player.</p>
<iframe width="560" height="315" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/q4jFYg7Fj4I?si=cdQPKdBfqshBnzvD" title="YouTube video player" frameborder="0" allow="accelerometer; autoplay; clipboard-write; encrypted-media; gyroscope; picture-in-picture; web-share" referrerpolicy="strict-origin-when-cross-origin" allowfullscreen></iframe>
<h1 id="dominantcorezone">Dominant Core Zone</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>Each of us has one <strong>Dominant Zone</strong> with demonstrated strength based upon:</p>
</blockquote>
<ul>
<li>A predictable left and right hand Grip</li>
<li>A predictable Stance Width Range (PSR)</li>
<li>A predictable Sequence of Motion</li>
<li>A predictable Posture</li>
<li>A predictable amount of foot flare for maximum ground reaction force</li>
<li>A predictable point of heel to toe balance in the predictable Stance Width Range (PSR)</li>
</ul>
<p>This video was shot in 2026 while I was training Jim Nittoli's staff at SACC where he is the director of golf and a teaching staff of 7 professionals.</p>
<p>In this video I am testing Nick, a teaching professional and demonstrating how to find the Dominant Core Zone using the Power test in 3 different stance widths.</p>
<iframe width="560" height="315" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/WAqKxhpDcxo?si=p8wHxOWX1tnUniwY" title="YouTube video player" frameborder="0" allow="accelerometer; autoplay; clipboard-write; encrypted-media; gyroscope; picture-in-picture; web-share" referrerpolicy="strict-origin-when-cross-origin" allowfullscreen></iframe>
<blockquote>
<p><strong>Note</strong> The first stance width I am testing is at 13 inches.  That is the Power test for the Upper Core where, if this is Nick's Dominant Core Zone he will have Power and his hips will be square between 8 &amp; 16 inches plus or minus 1 inch.  The second test I test is for the Middle Core where Nick assumes a stance width of 18 inches.  That is the Power test  stance width for the Middle Core where, if this is Nick's Dominant Core Zone he will have Power and his hips will be square between 16 and 24 inches plus or minus 1 inch. The third test  I do is for the Lower Core where Nick assumes a stance width of 26 inches.  That is the Power test stance width for the Lower Core where, if this is Nick's Dominant Core Zone, he will have Power and his hips will be square between 20 and 28 inches plus or minus 1 inch and outside the width of a Middle Core test.  As you can  see from the video, Nick had the most Power at 18 inches suggesting he is a Middle Core Player.  the next video will test his stance width to confirm this observation of Power.</p>
</blockquote>
<p>The following video was made in 2023 demonstrating the same process and also that one inch outside the Dominant Core Zone Stance Width will result in demonstrated loss of Power.  Thus in testing the 3 Core Zones, I pick a stance width that falls in the middle and outside the other Performance Stance Range for the other 2 Core Zones.</p>
<iframe width="560" height="315" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/q4jFYg7Fj4I?si=lfizF9QdCTALMY43" title="YouTube video player" frameborder="0" allow="accelerometer; autoplay; clipboard-write; encrypted-media; gyroscope; picture-in-picture; web-share" referrerpolicy="strict-origin-when-cross-origin" allowfullscreen></iframe>
<p>The next video will show a test of Nick's Middle Core Stance Width Range to confirm this observation of Power in his Middle Core Zone. Recall that Nick had the greatest Power at 18 inches.  The Middle Core Stance Width Range is 16 to 24 inches, plus or minus 1 inch as shown here.</p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/3j6ZMny"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/3j6ZMny.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<iframe width="560" height="315" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/4om-6clbWdw?si=ivsYea0WG7qic_Ne" title="YouTube video player" frameborder="0" allow="accelerometer; autoplay; clipboard-write; encrypted-media; gyroscope; picture-in-picture; web-share" referrerpolicy="strict-origin-when-cross-origin" allowfullscreen></iframe>
<p>Next I move to testing Nick's grip for Power.  The placement of the club across his middle finger determines his Power.  This is easily demonstrated to students.</p>
<iframe width="560" height="315" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/jbecoa_cIpY?si=FU68yXO-TPSjXb7x" title="YouTube video player" frameborder="0" allow="accelerometer; autoplay; clipboard-write; encrypted-media; gyroscope; picture-in-picture; web-share" referrerpolicy="strict-origin-when-cross-origin" allowfullscreen></iframe>
<p>When first tested for power, Nick was easily moved off balance.  Testing demonstrated that Nick is a Middle Core Player.  When his grip was checked  where the grip crossed his middle finger, his lead hand had the grip across the crease of the first knuckle up from his palm, the Middle Core Power Spot.  When checking his right hand, the grip crossed his middle finger on the first pad up from the palm, the Upper Core Power Spot.  I showed Nick where he should place his right hand, the crease of the first knuckle up.  Nick was then tested and demonstrated power with that subtle grip change.</p>
<blockquote>
<p>Note: Each Dominant Zone has an individual Grip Size for precise heel to toe balance.  Once the Dominant Zone is determined, use one of the 11 Stance Widths in your student's Dominant Zone.  When you find the grip size using the short bat or cue stick, if your student keeps their left foot on the zero mark and changes their Stance Width to any of the other 10 Stance Widths in their Dominant Zone, you will note that their hips remain square.  If they step to one of the other 2 non-dominant Zone Stance Widths, you will see rotation of their hips.<br>
Each  Dominant Zone has measurable and predictable strength based upon grip Power Spots (Upper, Middle or Lower).</p>
</blockquote>
<blockquote>
<p>Note:  This test is in addition to or in Lieu of using the &quot;AHA&quot; test (having your student swing to the top and placing your palm on the butt of the club and testing Power).  When possible I would encourage you to use the &quot;AHA test.  The &quot;AHA&quot; test is described and illustrated later in this eBook. If you are changing your student's Power Spots in their grip, this will be their first insight into why they should move the grip more or less into the fingers.</p>
</blockquote>
<p>If your student has a history of neck, shoulder, back, wrist, etc. injuries use the following protocol instead of the &quot;AHA&quot; test. Regardless, you will follow the &quot;AHA&quot; test with the protocol below.  Your student will need to understand their Wright Balance® Performance Stance Range.</p>
<h3 id="testingthewrightbalanceperformancestancerangepsr">Testing the Wright Balance® Performance Stance Range PSR</h3>
<p>Place a bar on your hips. Let's determine your Dominant Core Zone.  Using the Wright Balance® vinyl strip. Stand at 12 inches (Upper Core).  After you assume your stance, do not move your feet.  Take the coffee cup and grip it in your lead hand in your <strong>PALM</strong>.  Move only your left foot and move to 18 inches (Middle Core) and then 26 inches (Lower Core).  Set your stance in these widths and only <strong>AFTER</strong> assuming your stance, hold a cup or grip expander in your palm and add knee flex.  Your hips will remain square ONLY when you are in your Dominant Core Zone.  In your 2 non-dominant core Zones, your hips will rotate open or closed.</p>
<blockquote>
<p><strong>Note: You are likely wondering: &quot;Why take the cup only after  assuming your stance width?&quot;  BECAUSE you must set your Lower Kinetic Chain (Stance) before setting the Upper Kinetic Chain (Grip).  If you set up holding the coffee cup, your hips will always be open or closed.  This process is based on Grip Sizing.  We originally believed that and incorrect grip size opens or closes the hips.  It only moves heel to toe balance WHEN BOTH hands are placed on the club.  That is why we do grip sizing using the lead hand to begin.</strong></p>
</blockquote>
<h3 id="thebarisntmovingenoughformetodeterminethedominantcorezonewherethehipsaresquareinonlyoneofthe3zones">&quot;The Bar Isn't Moving Enough for me to Determine the Dominant Core Zone Where the Hips are Square in Only One of The 3 Zones.&quot;</h3>
<p>For years I have heard that it is difficult to determine the Dominant Core Zone because there is little to no hip rotation in any Stance Width.  The cup or grip expander, when gripped deep in the palm, is the same as an  oversized grip which will magnify hip rotation when the player is out of balance. The cup or grip expander has no impact on  hip rotation if the player is in their Dominant Wright Balance® Performance Stance Range (PSR).  The only movement the player will experience in their balance is heel to toe.  The cup or grip expander will likely move them toward their heels.</p>
<h3 id="findingthewrightbalanceperformancestancerangepsrprotocol">Finding The Wright Balance® Performance Stance Range (PSR) Protocol</h3>
<p>Determine the Wright Balance® Performance Stance Range PSR using a CUP or Grip Expander to magnify grip size.  Use the starting Stance Widths below to determine the 8 inch Performance Stance Range.</p>
<p>Once your student is in one of the Stance Widths listed below, hand them a cup or grip expander to hold in the palm of their hand with their fingers around it.</p>
<p><strong>If your students hips squared after they were handed the cup or grip expander at:</strong></p>
<p>12 inches= Upper Core Their Performance Stance Width Range is 8 to 16 inches plus or minus 1 inch</p>
<p>18 inches = Middle Core Their Performance Stance Width Range is 16 to 24 inches plus or minus 1 inch</p>
<p>26 inches= Lower Core Their Performance Stance Width Range is 20 to 28 inches plus or minus 1 inch</p>
<h2 id="footflare">Foot Flare</h2>
<p><strong>FOLLOWING</strong> the Wright Balance® Express in their address position, your student should flare to place their femur and hip joint in their normal alignment.</p>
<p>Find the <strong>&quot;Natural Flare&quot;</strong> your student should use.  Observe your student as they walk away from you and back toward you and note the amount of foot flare as they do.  A person who walks with either or both feet angled away from the midline of their body is demonstrating the natural position of the interface between their femur and hip joint.  That is their <strong>&quot;natural&quot;</strong> position of balance and the position where they will have their greatest balance at address.</p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/X8lXaoE"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/X8lXaoE.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p>OR, stand and talk with your student and notice how they adjust their stance after 1 or 2 minutes.</p>
<p>If your student would attempt to balance on 1 foot, you would find that their &quot;natural flare&quot; would be the position where they have the longest balance hold.</p>
<blockquote>
<p>NOTE: Traditional instruction teaches flare of the feet to create a deeper turn.  You will find that some of your students,  when told to flare their lead foot in an unnatural position will actually create pelvic rotation in the direction opposite of the flare.  Stay with what is natural. Test how the student walks as you observe from behind and note how they stand relaxed...</p>
</blockquote>
<h2 id="handshangthesameinsideyourpsronlyafterthewrightbalanceexpresswbx">Hands Hang the Same Inside Your PSR only After the Wright Balance Express® (WBX)</h2>
<p>Note that your hands hang exactly the same inside your Wright Balance® Performance Stance Range (PSR) and one or both hands rotate when your stance is outside outside your PSR after the Wright Balance Express (WBX) and with <strong>NO TAPE</strong>. When you apply tape, as you learned during the training, AND following the Wright Balance Express (WBX), your hands will hang the same in all stance widths.</p>
<h3 id="notehipshoulderheightinsideyourstudentswrightbalanceperformancestancerangepsr">Note Hip &amp; Shoulder Height inside your students Wright Balance Performance Stance Range (PSR)</h3>
<p>In the majority of players you will note that one shoulder is lower than the other and one arm hangs lower. The hip on the side where one shoulder is lower is almost always higher.  Both of these factors are shown in the illustration below.</p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/ii1oP6s"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/ii1oP6s.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<h2 id="ifthetrailhipishigherataddress">If the trail hip is higher at Address:</h2>
<ol>
<li>The angle of attack with both putter and full swing will be steeper.</li>
<li>Your student's ability to set secondary tilt will be compromised</li>
<li>Hip turn in the backswing will be restricted without some compensation (for example straightening the trail leg in the backswing)</li>
</ol>
<blockquote>
<p>Note: The Wright Balance® Express (WBX) levels the shoulders and hips and creates core symmetry in all planes of motion.  Following the Wright Balance® Express  (WBX), the Kinetic Chain is aligned and your student's body is set to maximize the recruitment of ground reaction forces.</p>
</blockquote>
<h2 id="theahatest">The AHA Test</h2>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/pzNH9rz"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/pzNH9rz.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p>The &quot;AHA&quot; Test is imperative for your student to understand the change in power with different Power Spot grip positions.  The &quot;AHA&quot; test also confirms the Wright Balance® Performance Stance Width Range (PSR) and Dominant Core Zone.</p>
<h2 id="thelowbudgetbiofeedbackforbalanceanalignmentstick">The &quot;Low Budget Biofeedback for Balance&quot;: An Alignment Stick</h2>
<ol>
<li>Place a bar on your hips.</li>
<li>Stand in your Performance Stance Width Range (PSR).</li>
<li>Stand on an alignment stick and find the balance of your Dominant Core Zone.  You will easily find your balance as a straight line between your left and right feet.</li>
<li>Note that your hips are square on that alignment stick when you are set on the heel to toe balance points of your Dominant Core Zone</li>
<li>With the bar on your hips indicating a square hip line, change the balance on the alignment stick by stepping forward one inch and back one inch.</li>
<li>Note the rotation of your hips when you are out of balance.</li>
</ol>
<p>While standing on an alignment stick place a sleeve on your a non-dominant Power Spots of both  hands.  <strong>Note</strong> that even though Performance Stance Range moved to a different Core Zone, your heel to toe balance remains unchanged.</p>
<blockquote>
<p>NOTE:  The only way to move heel to toe balance is by doing the Wright Balance® Express WBX in different Stance Widths on the vinyl strip with a Core Zone. There are  Eleven (11) Different Stance Widths in each Core Zone. Each of these Stance Widths, when doing the WBX moves heel to toe balance forward or back within that Zone.  You will do the WBX in different Stance Widths (one of the 11 color coded Stance Widths) during training.</p>
<p>The narrower the Stance Width in any Dominant Zone when doing the WBX moves the heel to toe weight forward.  The wider the Stance Width in a particular Dominant Zone moves the weight back within that Zone.  For Example, if you do the Wright Balance Express at 8 inches and then add knee flex, you will note that your weight is on your toes.  If you then do the Wright Balance Express at a Stance Width of 35 inches and add knee flex, you will note that your weight has moved toward the back edge of the balls of your feet, still in the Upper Core Zone but back in that balance Zone at ground level.  You can change the player's delivery to the ball by simply changing to wider or narrower stance width.</p>
</blockquote>
<h2 id="expandingtheperformancestancerange">Expanding the Performance Stance Range</h2>
<p>If your Dominant Core Zone is Upper Core and you place tape or sleeves on the Middle and Lower Core Power Spots of your trail hand,  your performance Stance Width expands to 0 to 36 inches.  However, you will note that your heel to toe balance remains constant as shown here:</p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/zni2NBk"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/zni2NBk.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p>If your Dominant Core Zone is Middle Core, and you tape the Power Spots of your Upper and Lower Core on your trail hand, you will note that your heel to toe balance remains constant (as shown here) even though your balanced Stance Widths changed to 0 to 36 inches:</p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/3in6Tq8"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/3in6Tq8.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p>If your Dominant Core Zone is Lower Core, When you tape the Power Spots for Upper and Middle Core of your trail hand, you will note that your heel to toe balance remains constant (as shown here) even though your balanced Stance Widths changed from 0 to 36 inches:</p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/iACtBH9"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/iACtBH9.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<h2 id="whentosetthelowerkineticchainvsupperkineticchain">When to set the Lower Kinetic Chain vs Upper Kinetic Chain</h2>
<p>Next, use the Wright Balance® Downswing club Path Test (DPT) while setting the correct kinetic chain (Lower Body) versus incorrect kinetic chain Upper Body.  This video demonstrates how important it is to set the Lower Kinetic Chain (Stance) before the Upper Kinetic (Grip).  It also shows how the majority of your students will create an open hip line when their grip (Upper Kinetic Chain) is assumed before the lower kinetic Chain (Stance).</p>
<iframe width="560" height="315" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/CnKr66BaACM?si=5ygI3d0_FfR4266x" title="YouTube video player" frameborder="0" allow="accelerometer; autoplay; clipboard-write; encrypted-media; gyroscope; picture-in-picture; web-share" referrerpolicy="strict-origin-when-cross-origin" allowfullscreen></iframe>
<h3 id="testthisprocessusingacuporgripexpanders">&gt;<strong>Test this process using a cup or grip expanders</strong></h3>
<h2 id="putterpaththepsrpowerspotsfaceclipdpt">PUTTER PATH, the PSR, Power Spots, Face Clip &amp; DPT</h2>
<ol>
<li>Set up with a Putter in your PSR with Power Spots set.  Make a Stroke and Use the DPT &amp; Face Clip on Putter</li>
<li>Note Face clip <strong>Path with PSR and Power Spots on putter &amp; DPT</strong></li>
<li>Note: Face clip and <strong>Path with PSR WRONG Power Spots</strong> and test with DPT</li>
<li>Note Face Clip <strong>Path with Wrong PSR</strong> via the DPT</li>
<li><strong>Repeat #1 above</strong></li>
</ol>
<h2 id="setreleaseofputterandfullswing">SET &amp; RELEASE OF PUTTER AND FULL SWING</h2>
<p>There is a good bit online regarding the set and release of the club.  As you will see from this exercise, the set and release of the club is a function of balance.</p>
<p>With a putter, move to the balls of your feet (Upper Core) and be certain to stay their.  Relax your arms and hands by taking a deep breath and relaxing your shoulders (traps).  Mid way through your exhale start the putter back for a SHORT putt and hold the backstroke.  Note how quickly you feel the putter set.  Now stay on the balls of your feet and make a through stroke.  You will note and feel the release of the putter.</p>
<p>Next, move your weight over the center of your arches (Lower Core).  Again, stay over the center of your arches and feel the backstroke and notice there is little to no set of the club.  If you stay over the center of your arches you will note that there is little to no release of the putter in the through stroke.</p>
<p>WHY?  The set and release of the club is a function of heel to toe balance.  The set and release of the club is predictable and matches the player's playing Core Zone.</p>
<p>Here is a link to a YouTube video I made 8 or 9 years ago on the set and release of the club.</p>
<iframe width="560" height="315" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/K4aFSJEIGuI?si=RnoQs7hU6Z1qPdlO" title="YouTube video player" frameborder="0" allow="accelerometer; autoplay; clipboard-write; encrypted-media; gyroscope; picture-in-picture; web-share" referrerpolicy="strict-origin-when-cross-origin" allowfullscreen></iframe>
<h2 id="theimpactofshoulderrotation">The Impact of Shoulder Rotation</h2>
<p>The following graphics on <em><strong>Shoulder Rotation</strong></em> as related to distance. were done, after extensive calculations, by our resident Physicist, Dr. James M. Smith.</p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/assKOag"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/assKOag.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/8m9YoRK"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/8m9YoRK.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<h2 id="backswingsequenceofmotion">Backswing Sequence of Motion</h2>
<p>These videos show Posture, Sequence of Motion and the Downswing Path Test (DPT) for the Upper, Middle and Lower Core Players.</p>
<h3 id="uppercoreposturesequenceofmotionthewrightbalancedownswingpathtestdpt">Upper Core Posture, Sequence of Motion &amp; the Wright Balance® Downswing Path Test (DPT)</h3>
<blockquote>
<p>Note: The testing described here is <strong>BEFORE</strong> the Wright Balance Express (WBX) Exercise used when teaching sequence of motion.  Once the Wright Balance® Express is done in a particular Stance Width, you are locked into one Core Zone and heel to toe balance does not change, regardless of stance width.</p>
</blockquote>
<p>Add finger sleeves to Upper Core Power Spots of both hands and move to your Upper Core Performance Range (PSR)</p>
<iframe width="560" height="315" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/ilfnLpnYGxo?si=SBqTaXAUFCm5-pT5" title="YouTube video player" frameborder="0" allow="accelerometer; autoplay; clipboard-write; encrypted-media; gyroscope; picture-in-picture; web-share" referrerpolicy="strict-origin-when-cross-origin" allowfullscreen></iframe>
<h3 id="middlecoreposturesequenceofmotionthewrightbalancedownswingclubpathtest">Middle Core Posture, Sequence of Motion &amp; the Wright Balance® Downswing Club Path Test</h3>
<p>Add finger sleeves to your Middle Core Power Spots of both hands and move to your Upper Core Performance Range (PSR)</p>
<iframe width="560" height="315" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/hCgs_8-XtTk?si=qCYIow6PEbPbEbN6" title="YouTube video player" frameborder="0" allow="accelerometer; autoplay; clipboard-write; encrypted-media; gyroscope; picture-in-picture; web-share" referrerpolicy="strict-origin-when-cross-origin" allowfullscreen></iframe>
<h3 id="lowercoreposturesequenceofmotionthewrightbalancedownswingclubpathtest">Lower Core Posture, Sequence of Motion &amp; the Wright Balance® Downswing Club Path Test</h3>
<p>Add finger sleeves to your Lower Core Power Spots of both hands and move to your Lower Core Performance Range (PSR)</p>
<iframe width="560" height="315" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/VNU0yXOslRk?si=SNGxfjg5UQro5I8K" title="YouTube video player" frameborder="0" allow="accelerometer; autoplay; clipboard-write; encrypted-media; gyroscope; picture-in-picture; web-share" referrerpolicy="strict-origin-when-cross-origin" allowfullscreen></iframe>
<h2 id="theoriginofthewrightbalancedownswingclubpathtestdpt">The Origin of The Wright Balance® Downswing Club Path Test (DPT)</h2>
<p>Research in Dr. Frank Jobe's biomechanics lab at Centinela Hospital in the early 2000s shed a precise light on the balance position at ground level and path with the putter. The following images were shot during the putting segment in the Biomechanics Lab.  Each player had 40 light sensors on their body, 1000 force sensors in their shoes and light sensors on the putter and irons.</p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/iU71hxo"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/iU71hxo.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/j7aA43x"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/j7aA43x.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/XpiuPBv"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/XpiuPBv.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p>When the putter path was observed as square to the line, the following balance image of the force / pressure sensors was present 100 percent of the time from address through the stroke to finish.</p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/uVdCYoH"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/uVdCYoH.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p>When the putter path was outside-in, this was a predictable observation at ground level <strong>before and after the stroke</strong>.  Note the position of heel to toe balance as shown by the force / pressure sensors.</p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/yXFOvOZ"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/yXFOvOZ.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p>When the putter path was inside - out, this was a predictable observation of the force / pressure sensors at ground level.  Note the position of heel to toe balance. Note the center of force / pressure forward in the left foot and back in the right foot.</p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/BFjBEvI"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/BFjBEvI.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p>Each research subject had a multiple data collection points with putter where they had a bar on their hips.  The orientation of the bar matched the balance configuration observed with the force / pressure sensors at ground level.</p>
<p>Those observations were tested over several years.  It was determined that the full swing could be tested similar to the way the putter was tested. In the full swing, having the player stop at any point at address or in motion before impact, stand tall and face their target line and add knee flex, the observed line of PRESSURE was predictive of the path the club would follow in the downswing:  The Wright Balance® Downswing Club Path Test (DPT).  As long as the player didn't move their feet, the orientation of the hips correctly predicted the path the putter, irons and woods would take through impact.</p>
<p>Posture, when to Grip the club, Grip, Stance Width, Shaft Lean and Sequence of Motion tests were added to the full swing and putter path tests.  The grip and posture tests identified full swing and putter path 100 percent of the time.</p>
<p>When testing the address position with students I observed that shaft plane changed when the student was in balance...</p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/ODpjj69"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/ODpjj69.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p>...versus out of balance:</p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/dJ5cu6V"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/dJ5cu6V.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<h2 id="pressurevsforcethewrightbalancedownswingclubpathtest">Pressure Vs Force &amp; the Wright Balance® Downswing Club Path Test</h2>
<p>Pressure is the measured observation of your body as you stand on a balance mat. That pressure becomes FORCE as your kinetic chain starts in motion (kinematics) in any activity. The ground FORCE that is applied is directly related to the amount of FORCE that is recruited from the ground.</p>
<p>FORCE**** is the effort or energy you actively apply or recruit through your body's kinetic chain. Forces in the golf swing are categorized as Horizontal (Linear), Rotational (Torque), and Vertical.</p>
<h3 id="pressuretoforcetopressurethewrightbalancedownswingclubpathtest">Pressure to Force to Pressure: The Wright Balance® Downswing Club Path Test</h3>
<p>The Relationship of PRESSURE and the beginning  &quot;recruitment&quot; of FORCE starts in the address position.  Each position at address (Posture, when the club is gripped, grip, shaft lean, stance, etc) creates either a symmetrical line of PRESSURE at ground level as shown here...</p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/uVdCYoH"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/uVdCYoH.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p>or a variation on one of the two resulting lines of PRESSURE</p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/yXFOvOZ"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/yXFOvOZ.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/BFjBEvI"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/BFjBEvI.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<h2 id="lineofpressuretopressuretest">Line of PRESSURE TO PRESSURE Test</h2>
<p>The line of PRESSURE TO PRESSURE is done before swing motion begins.  In the full swing, the player starts with a line of pressure.  Wright Balance® teaching creates a symmetrical line of pressure at address by matching the player's playing Core Zone to a corresponding Performance Stance Width Range (PSR); Posture; noting when to place their hands on the club, the Grip and Shaft Lean.</p>
<p>The Line of Pressure is measured by a line connecting the center of PRESSURE of one foot to the center of PRESSURE of the other foot as shown here.</p>
<blockquote>
<p>NOTE: Each of these address positions (stance width, posture, grip, shaft lean)  is tested separately and, when properly set, creates a symmetrical line of PRESSURE (a straight line).   <strong>When any one of the address positions is set incorrectly, the Line of Pressure is diagonal from the Center of Pressure in one foot to the enter of PRESSURE in the other foot.</strong></p>
</blockquote>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/uVdCYoH"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/uVdCYoH.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p>The Wright Balance® Dowswing Club Path Test is done with each of the set up positions, one at a time.  When, for example, the Performance Stance Range (PSR) matches the Core Zone, the line of PRESSURE will be a straight line as shown here.</p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/uVdCYoH"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/uVdCYoH.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p>When the player sets up outside their matching Performance Stance Range, the line of pressure will result in one of the following lines of PRESSURE.</p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/yXFOvOZ"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/yXFOvOZ.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/BFjBEvI"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/BFjBEvI.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<h2 id="howtodothewrightbalancedownswingclubpathtestdpt">How to Do the Wright Balance® Downswing Club Path Test (DPT)</h2>
<p>You can test EVERY address position and backswing and through swing motion to impact using the Wright Balance Downswing Club Path Test from grip to sequence of motion.  For example when testing lead hand grip, from the address position, the player stands, in a tall position facing the target line and adds knee flex. You can magnify hip rotation or lack thereof by giving the player a cup or grip expander to hold in the palm of their trail hand.   If the line of PRESSURE is square. That feedback reinforces the player's practice and your teaching.  Next, move to the trail hand only when the player shows a consistent lead hand grip.</p>
<p>Let's assume your player has gone through each phase of their setup repeatedly with consistent success.  Now you are observing their full swing in a lesson and their ball striking or putting is not good.  What do you do?  You check each address position before motion begins.</p>
<p>If, when the player stands tall facing their target line their hips are rotated with the DPT, it's time to test each address position.  You know that one problem is in their setup.  Note their Performance Stance Range --PSR , check each hand for grip, lead hand cup, shaft lean, posture set and posture angles, etc.  When the address position is determined using the DPT, have your student swing to the top and hold that position, then return to square, stand tall and add knee flex.  You can even take the club at this point and give them a cup or grip expander to hold in their trail hand to amplify any hip rotation. If the DPT results in a square hip line, your student can return to ball striking.  If the DPT shows an open or closed hip line, you can check sequence of motion.  If the hips are square, your student can now swing to the top and you can test their impact position with the DPT.  Tell your student not to make a full swing, just stop at impact. Do they need secondary tilt? Is their downswing sequence not a match for their Core Zone?  Begin the correction(s) here.</p>
<p>This <strong>immediate</strong> feedback sets the stage for <strong>immediate</strong> correction and learning for both you and your student.</p>
<p>Research showed that these positions will be the resulting Downswing Club Path through impact when their is hip rotation when doing the DPT.</p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/yXFOvOZ"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/yXFOvOZ.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/BFjBEvI"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/BFjBEvI.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p>The simple corrections are in one of the address positions or in motion when tested one at a time with the Wright Balance® Downswing Club Path Test (DPT).</p>
<p>Based upon Wright Balance® research, your ability to recruit maximum ground forces is determined by your Core Zone and setup (address position of your kinetic chain) and a sequence of motion that matches your Core Zone.</p>
<p>If your fundamentals don't match your Core Zone or your sequence of motion moves toward the toes or heels, this compromises your ability to recruit maximum ground force, regardless of how much pressure you try to apply.  These factors can be &quot;teased out&quot; using the Wright Balance® Downswing Club Path Test (DPT).</p>
<h2 id="testingasequencingofmotionfallacy">Testing a Sequencing of Motion Fallacy</h2>
<p>Testing a Teaching Fallacy with the Wright Balance® Downswing Club Path Test (DPT)</p>
<p>I learned and taught for years that a player should load their weight into their trail heel at the top of the swing.  Posture,a Performance Stance Width Range (PSR) and Sequencing of Motion that matches your or your student's Core Zone  must precede this tesing.   Then, without a club, test the backswing to the top of the swing purposely loading your weight in your trail heel.  Stop at the top without moving your feet and do the Wright Balance® Downswing Club Path Test. You will note that the line of Force created is an inside - out path or an outside - in path as a predictor of the impact path.</p>
<h3 id="testingthebalancelineofforceinthebackswing">Testing the Balance Line of Force in the Backswing</h3>
<p>Wright Balance® Downswing Club Path research confirms that balance is a straight line in the golf swing.  If is important for your student to practice this process.  Be certain to use the Wright Balance diary for daily practice.</p>
<blockquote>
<p><strong>NOTE</strong>: It is important for your student to have a ball on the floor in front of them when they practice any of the setup drills.</p>
</blockquote>
<ol>
<li>Have your student stand on an alignment stick with a bar on their hips.  Their hips will only be square <strong>when and only when</strong> their heel to toe balance matches their Core Zone as experienced by the pressure of the alignment stick under their feet.<br>
2.Next, in their Dominant Core Zone set the Wright Balance® Performance Stance Width Range (PSR) and Posture.<br>
3.Use the Wright Balance® Downswing Club Path Test to be certain Stance Width Range (PSR) and posture have been set correctly.</li>
<li>Next you are going to have your student rotate to the top of their swing and load their weight into their trail heel <strong>USING THE SEQUENCE OF MOTION THAT MATCHES THEIR CORE ZONE</strong>.</li>
<li>Return to square, and do the Wright Balance® Downswing Club Path Test. Note that their hips open or close when loading the trail heel at the top of the swing.</li>
<li>Again, have your student reset their feet on the alignment stick and find the balance line that matches their Core Zone where their hips are square.  As they start their motion to the top have your student focus on staying in the starting balance position of their trail foot as they get to the top of their swing.</li>
<li>Have your student return to square without moving their feet. Do the Wright Balance® Downswing Club Path Test. If Posture and Sequence of Motion matched their Core Zone their hips will be square.</li>
<li>If your student's hips are open or closed when doing the Wright Balance® Downswing Club Path Test, test Posture and Sequence of Motion  separately and repeat the test on the alignment stick.</li>
</ol>
<blockquote>
<p>Note: As an aside, there is a theory that posits when the Kinetic Chain is aligned to deliver maximum force from the ground, the &quot;propagation of force&quot; throughout your body is facilitated by the fascia system.   The fascia system acts as a &quot;tension structure.&quot; When force is applied correctly through your Core, hands and feet, there is a balanced application of force across your entire core through your kinetic chain to and from the ground.  This is when maximum power is created.</p>
</blockquote>
<h2 id="testingthedownswingusingthewrightbalancedownswingpathtest">Testing the Downswing using the Wright Balance® Downswing Path Test</h2>
<p>The alignment of the body is referred to as the Kinetic Chain. Motion sequencing in any activity is referred to as the Kinematic Sequence.  The Kinematic sequence of the golf downswing is just the opposite of the backswing with one major consideration:</p>
<h3 id="doyouneedtosetsecondarytiltataddress">Do you need to set Secondary Tilt at Address?</h3>
<p><strong>IF</strong> your your setup and backswing sequencing <strong>passes</strong> the Wright Balance® Downswing Club Path Test, your student's address position is not an issue.  HOWEVER, if your student passes the sequence of motion to the top of the swing and then, when returning to impact their hips are open or closed, the absence of secondary tilt is a strong possibility.</p>
<p>What are you testing?  One of the teaching strategies of many professionals is to start the downswing with a &quot;hip slide&quot; or &quot;bump&quot; of the lead hip from the top of the swing parallel to the stance line.  The average amateur <strong>will not</strong> have a &quot;hip bump&quot; or &quot;slide&quot; from the top of their swing.</p>
<p>The following images are of Middle Core player Rory Mcllroy.  Notice his address position followed by his hip bump at the top as he starts his downswing.</p>
<p>Rory's address position.</p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/mtOrDKM"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/mtOrDKM.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p>Top of his Swing:</p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/KeCYvyM"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/KeCYvyM.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p>In this image Rory is just beginning his downswing.  Note the comparison of the images in the gallery behind him versus his address position. Note his center of mass is over his pelvis and his lead knee is pointed at the ball.  This means he has started his swing with lower and upper core together, a sequencing characteristic of Middle Core Players.</p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/P3Xcr2k"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/P3Xcr2k.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p>Here is Rory in that same swing sequence at impact. Again, note the same gallery images in the background.</p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/EYi77Wb"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/EYi77Wb.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p>This is an image of secondary tilt at address  for a Lower Core Player, Dustin Johnson.</p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/9ZPoDu2"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/9ZPoDu2.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p>This is an image of Sam Snead at the top of his swing...</p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/blU488F"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/blU488F.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p>Sam Snead's first move in his downswing was to &quot;sit down&quot;.  This sit down move is taught by many instructors as a way to &quot;recruit more force from the ground&quot;; &quot;shallow out&quot; the downswing path, etc.</p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/zwLUPQu"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/zwLUPQu.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p>This is an image of secondary tilt at address  for me, a Lower Core Player, taken for a golf magazine circa 2010.</p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/DPe3Bxu"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/DPe3Bxu.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<p>From the illustration of me above, assume that I have arrived for a driver lesson and you see the address position in the above image.  I hit balls and my ball flight is low and boring with a slight draw.  From the above illustration of me at address, what would a Wright Balance®<br>
teacher say to me  to adjust my set up?  By the way, this was 10 plus years before the Wright Balance® Express and my trail hip was always higher than my lead hip. Consider your answer in present day with your Wright Balance® Knowledge.  You have the Wright Balance Express and the DPT to use.</p>
<blockquote>
<p><strong>NOTE: THIS IS A TRICK QUESTION.  CONSIDER YOUR ANSWER BEFORE SCROLLING DOWN</strong></p>
<p>Why is this a &quot;TRICK QUESTION?&quot; What was your first thought?  Did you return to review the image and notice my secondary tilt, my strong grip and my wide base and my center-forward ball position?  Did you think about moving my hands ahead? Moving my ball position forward. Was that your answer?  If so, you demonstrated your knowledge of Wright Balance® for a possible quick fix.  However, that is not a Wright Balance® lesson.</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<p>You tell me you need to determine my Dominant Core Zone, my Performance Stance Range, test my grip and posture to see if I have matching setup elements, teach me a grip that matches my Core Zone and teach me sequence of motion.  Then you recommend that I do the Wright Balance® Express to level my hips and shoulders. You proceed doing the Wright Balance® Downswing Club Path Test (DPT) from the Wright Balance® Performance Stance Range to lead hand grip to posture to backswing through downswing.  As you do the DPT, you teach me how to do the self DPT testing for immediate feedback.</p>
<p>There have been no guard rails for instruction to date.  I believe as teachers, we have taught what we do or what we observed, or believe we observed, great players do.</p>
<blockquote>
<p>Thirty plus years ago, in the early and mid 90s I used an ASTAR video system for teaching. It was mounted in a oblong box that stood vertically. It looked like I was standing at a video game.   I could capture and load an image of my student's swing on the left side of a split screen and an image of any tour player on the<br>
right side.  I could freeze frame each part of the swing on both sides.  The goal was to have my student emulate the pros swing.  Not a lot has changed in golf instruction in the years since.  There are so many theories on the golf swing and so little science.</p>
</blockquote>
<h2 id="secondarytiltconsiderations">Secondary Tilt Considerations</h2>
<ul>
<li>
<p>If the trail hip is higher at address (if the hips are open the trail hip is always higher, setting secondary tilt is problematic. The way around this issue is to teach your student the Wright Balance Express.</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>If your student has no secondary tilt at address and their hips remain square when doing the Wright Balance Downswing Club Path test through impact, secondary tilt is not an issue.</p>
</li>
</ul>
<h2 id="letstestthewrightbalancedownswingclubpathtoimpactwithandwithoutsecondarytilt">Let's Test the Wright Balance® Downswing Club Path to Impact With and Without Secondary Tilt</h2>
<p>The outcome of that test will determine whether your student needs Secondary Tilt.  I will show you during the training following grip instruction how to set ball position, Posture and distance from the ball while gripping a yardstick.  <strong>However</strong>, grip must be taught before using a yardstick.</p>
<h1 id="grip">GRIP</h1>
<h2 id="leadhandgripwithpaintstick">Lead Hand Grip With Paint Stick</h2>
<p>For a comprehensive review of the use of a Paint Stick when practicing grip, these eBooks will be your primary reference:</p>
<p><strong>Grip: The Genius of Harvey Penick Part 1</strong></p>
<p><a href="https://instructions.wrightbalance.com/grip-the-genius-of-harvey-penick/">https://instructions.wrightbalance.com/grip-the-genius-of-harvey-penick/</a></p>
<p><strong>Harvey Penick: Grip and Wrist Cock Part 2</strong></p>
<p><a href="https://instructions.wrightbalance.com/october-13-zoom-session/">https://instructions.wrightbalance.com/october-13-zoom-session/</a></p>
<blockquote>
<p>Note: that the grip in the lead and trail hands is <strong>ALWAYS</strong> taught and tested in the student's Performance Stance Range.</p>
</blockquote>
<p>A. Grip in your tested Performance Stance Range (PSR) with Paint Stick &amp; Power Spot of Lead Hand &amp; do the Wright Balance Downswing Club Path Test (DPT).  <strong>Practice until DPT results in a square hip line.</strong><br>
B. Step in PSR; Wider than PSR &amp; Narrower than PSR and note face changes with lead hand inside vs outside PSR<br>
C. Check wrist cock changes inside vs outside your Performance Stance Range...<strong>Lead Hand Only</strong></p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/EawXAqv"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/EawXAqv.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p>D. When adding the Trail Hand to the grip, add with power spot first and then heel pad.</p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/bu0IoNX"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/bu0IoNX.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<blockquote>
<p>Note the parallel lines of fingers on trail hand and lead hand when opened only when added by Power Spot first.</p>
</blockquote>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/cFegzDl"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/cFegzDl.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p>When placing heel pad of the trail hand first, note that the fingers do not set parallel when you open your hands.</p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/QDPIxT8"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/QDPIxT8.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/zFhZqAD"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/zFhZqAD.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<h2 id="butterflyvscomplementarygrip">Butterfly vs Complementary Grip</h2>
<p>Note <strong>TEST</strong> <strong>Butterfly</strong> vs <strong>Complementary</strong> Grip in Through swing</p>
<p>E. Check Carrying Angle <strong>L &amp; R</strong> difference before and after Wright Balance® Express</p>
<p>Before exploring the use of tape on the fingers, you and or your students will benefit from an understanding of what impact this has on the Core and in particular with stance width, the ability to rotate, set posture and grip the club.  This eBook describes the impact pressure on any finger has on what is called mechanotransduction or propagation of force.</p>
<p><a href="https://instructions.wrightbalance.com/how-power-spots-create-propagation-of-force/">https://instructions.wrightbalance.com/how-power-spots-create-propagation-of-force/</a></p>
<p>Suggesting to a student that tape on the hands is important during the Wright Balance Express or for play was often met with skepticism or some magical impact.  Even after a student, spouse or parent reads the above eBook on propagation of force, I have had a parent and spouse tell the student is &quot;hogwash&quot;.  We know have a way around that.  If Tiger did it, there must be something to it.  The &quot;push back&quot; I experienced in the past, when describing the taping process as something Tiger did, is virtually nonexistent.</p>
<h1 id="wrightbalancetigertape">Wright Balance® Tiger Tape.</h1>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/trReXWT"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/trReXWT.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p>Tiger was a Middle Core Player so his Power Spot is the first knuckle up from the palm as shown here.</p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/mSrXfRZ"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/mSrXfRZ.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p>Tiger applied tape to the **Upper Core Power Spots **of his right hand on his middle and occasionally his ring fingers as shown in the above illustration.  The Upper Core Power Spot is the first pad up from the palm on any finger of either hand as shown here on the middle finger.</p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/N73aO4w"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/N73aO4w.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/RpimL0L"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/RpimL0L.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<h2 id="whydidthiscreateanadvantagefortiger">Why did this create an advantage for Tiger</h2>
<h3 id="whytigertapeshisfingers">Why Tiger tapes his fingers?:</h3>
<p>To prevent painful blisters and calluses. The Earliest Sightings of this tape were in 1997. Golf fans began noticing and discussing the tape on his right middle finger as early as April 1997, the year he won his first Masters.</p>
<p>The Real Reason: Tiger has explained that the tape is for callus management, not a specific injury. He stated that the friction from his high volume of practice caused the callus on his middle finger that would split and bleed without the tape. He credited his father, Earl Woods, for teaching him that the middle two fingers of the right hand are crucial for controlling the club, which leads to them taking the most &quot;abuse&quot; during his swing.</p>
<p>Tiger is a Middle Core Player.  We can tell this by his sequence of motion and center of mass at the top of his swing.  His center of mass is over his pelvis and his lead knee points at the ball meaning that he started upper and lower body back together, a characteristic of all Middle Core Players.</p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/xAhhmi4"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/xAhhmi4.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p>Tiger's Wright Balance® Performance Stance Width Range (PSR), as a Middle Core Player, is 16 inches (plus or minus 1 inch) to 24 inches (plus or minus 1 inch).</p>
<p>Tiger applied tape to his Upper Core Power Spot on his right hand. By applying tape to the Upper Core Power Spot of his middle finger on his right hand he changed, among other things, his Wright Balance® Stance Width Range (PSR) from 16 to 24 inches plus or minus 1 inch to 0 to 24 inches plus or minus 1 inch at 24 inches with irons and woods, <strong>but not putter</strong>. For putting, as you learned he must stay inside his Middle Core Performance Stance Range (16 to 24 inches plus or minus 1 inch).</p>
<p><strong>These were Tiger's other advantages you will note when dong the Wright Balance Downswing Club Path Test (DPT)</strong>:</p>
<ol>
<li>Tiger's PSR no longer matters (EXCEPT WITH PUTTER AS DEMONSTRATED WITH Wright Balance® Downwing Club Path Test) where hips open or close through downswing path when tested from 0 inches to 24 inches plus or minus 1 inch (or 23 or 25 inches)</li>
<li>Tiger's hands will hang the same in all stance Widths from 0 inches to 24 inches plus or minus 1 inch (or 23 or 25 inches)  as his new defined Wright Balance Performance Stance Range with irons and woods <strong>BUT NOT PUTTER.</strong></li>
</ol>
<p>3.Tigers hip line will be square in all stance widths out to his Middle Core Stance Width range of 24 inches plus or minus 1 inch (or 23 or 25 inches).</p>
<p>4.Tiger had no restriction in shoulder rotation from 0 inches to 24 inches (plus or minus 1 inch).<br>
6.When Tiger gripped the club across the Upper Core Power Spot of his left and right hands, the clubface does not change from a neutral grip inside his &quot;NEW&quot; PSR to open or closed except wider than 24 inches (or 23 or 25 inches).<br>
7. Wrist cock does not change outside his Middle Core PSR up to 24 inches (or 23 or 25 inches)<br>
8. Posture can be set in any stance width and his hips would remain square.  Outside of 24 inches his hips would open or close.</p>
<h1 id="questiontotestduringtraining">Question to test During Training</h1>
<p>Does the &quot;AHA Test&quot; demonstrate &quot;weakness&quot; / loss of power when a Middle Core Player grips the club in an Upper Core Power Spot (Scottie Scheffler, Xander Shaufle; Tiger Woods, etc.)?  That appears to be the case with Middle and Lower Core players??  That is an unknown that can be easily tested by adding tape and doing the &quot;AHA&quot; test.</p>
<h1 id="however">HOWEVER</h1>
<p>However, without doing the Wright Balance® Express, there is no change in the sagittal or coronal planes as they still show pelvic rotation when stepping forward or back.  Shoulders and hips are still not level.  After the Wright Balance® Express (WBX) on a Middle Core Stance Width, with tape applied to the Upper Core <strong>AND</strong> Lower Core Power Spots of the trail hand, there is a square hip line in all planes of motion and there is no need for the Wright Balance® Express corrections in the second phase of the exercise.</p>
<h2 id="wrightbalancetapeandthewrightbalanceexpress">Wright Balance® Tape and the Wright Balance® Express</h2>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/ndfHAzR"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/ndfHAzR.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/BsuRzEB"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/BsuRzEB.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p>This eBook is a guided reminder of how to do the Wright Balance® Express.  Do the Wright Balance® Express with tape on the Power Spots not matching the Core Zone you are exercising.  For example, if you are doing the Wright Balance® Express on an Upper Core Stance Width, place tape on the trail hand of your Middle and Lower Core Power Spots</p>
<blockquote>
<p>Note: You should be practicing, playing, working out in a gym, chores at home, and etc with tape in these positions.  Tape remaining in these positions will limit stress on your kinetic chain and provide stability with any movement in all stance widths</p>
</blockquote>
<p><a href="https://instructions.wrightbalance.com/how-to-use-the-3-grip-sizes-to-do-the-express/">https://instructions.wrightbalance.com/how-to-use-the-3-grip-sizes-to-do-the-express/</a></p>
<h2 id="settingarmspositiononchestwall">Setting Arms Position on Chest Wall</h2>
<p>Set up to do the Wright Balance Express with the middle finger of your trail hand and the thumb of your lead hand.  Apply pressure to the Core Zone Power Spots of your chosen Core Zone to exercise. Extend your arms in front with no elbow bend, relax your shoulders and allow your arms to drop to your chest wall.  Note the position of your arms on your chest wall.  Hold that position, and note the ease of shoulder rotation.  Move your elbows closer together or wider apart and note the restriction in your rotation</p>
<h2 id="postureballpositiondistancefromtheballusingayardsticktosetup">Posture, Ball Position &amp; Distance from the Ball  Using a yardstick to set up</h2>
<h2 id="thefollowingarekineticchaincorrectionsafterthewrightbalanceexpress">The following are Kinetic Chain corrections <em>AFTER</em> the Wright Balance® Express</h2>
<p>a. Hips &amp; Shoulders are level<br>
b. Shoulder Rotation in all stance widths<br>
c. Performance range 100 yards in for Middle &amp; Lower Core Players and outside Performance Range<br>
d. Test / Teach clubface in lead hand only inside and outside PSR<br>
e. Shoulder Rotation in the backswing by Core Zone sequencing inside and outside PSR is unrestricted<br>
f. Carrying Angle on your Left and Right side are identical<br>
g. Step forward and back (sagittal plane) shows no hip rotation<br>
h. There is no longer knee pronation or supination.  The knee is over the middle of the foot on both sides when walking<br>
I. Heel to toe balance is predictable<br>
J. Bite is predictable<br>
K. Foot strike when running or walking is predicable<br>
L. The visual perception of objects in space is valid</p>
<h2 id="painstiffnessrelieffromthewrightbalanceexpress">Pain &amp; Stiffness Relief from the Wright Balance Express</h2>
<p>The WBX aligns the kinetic chain such that physical stress within the core is decreased moving from:</p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/ii1oP6s"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/ii1oP6s.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p>To:</p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/eVWyp1D"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/eVWyp1D.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p>Numerous students have commented that when the Kinetic Chain is aligned following the Wright Balance Express  over successive days that they experience  less pain and stiffness, greater range of motion through their body and their posture improves.</p>
<h1 id="gripsizing">Grip Sizing</h1>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/1D0R65O"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/1D0R65O.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/n3IaIKY"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/n3IaIKY.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<h1 id="zoomlessons">Zoom Lessons</h1>
<p>Zoom lessons are ideal for long distance lessons or followup on current lessons.  You are able to video the entire lesson and send it to your student and keep it on file for yourself.  Your student can review their lesson before your next lesson.</p>
<p>Your student would need the following for an online lesson...</p>
<ol>
<li>A yardstick</li>
<li>A 1  or 5 gallon gallon paint stick (depending on their hand size)<br>
3 A 3 foot 3/4 or 1/2 inch dowel pole</li>
<li>A 24 inch flat strap (bungee cord)</li>
<li>A fiberglass alignment stick...driveway marker used in snow or an alignment stick you might already have in your bag.</li>
<li>A yardstick (ideally a thin yardstick unless you and / or your student has large hands).</li>
</ol>
<p>The above items are available at Lowes Home Improvement...you will want to find a dowel that isn't warped ...if you sight it from 1 end you can find a pretty round dowel</p>
<ol start="6">
<li>A putter</li>
<li>A mid iron</li>
<li>An empty coffee cup</li>
</ol>
</div>]]></content:encoded></item><item><title><![CDATA[PGA Show Certification Test]]></title><description><![CDATA[<div class="kg-card-markdown"><p>Which color represents the power spot for the upper core player?<br>
A- Red<br>
B- Black<br>
C- Blue<br>
D- None of the above</p>
<p>The Performance Stance Width Zone can be different for players using the same core zone?<br>
True<br>
False</p>
<p>The kinetic chain is set the same for all core zones?</p></div>]]></description><link>https://instructions.wrightbalance.com/pga-show-certification-test/</link><guid isPermaLink="false">6972226633f75d000162ad1a</guid><dc:creator><![CDATA[Blake Isakson]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Fri, 23 Jan 2026 15:25:19 GMT</pubDate><content:encoded><![CDATA[<div class="kg-card-markdown"><p>Which color represents the power spot for the upper core player?<br>
A- Red<br>
B- Black<br>
C- Blue<br>
D- None of the above</p>
<p>The Performance Stance Width Zone can be different for players using the same core zone?<br>
True<br>
False</p>
<p>The kinetic chain is set the same for all core zones?<br>
True<br>
False</p>
<p>Having your balance on your arches is a sign of being middle core?<br>
True<br>
False</p>
<p>Upper-Middle-Lower are the 3 main core zones in Wright Balance?<br>
True<br>
False</p>
<p>What is the downswing path test?<br>
A- A way to see if you are in balance at the top of the swing<br>
B- A way to test sequence of motion<br>
C- A way to tell if your dowsnwing will be on plane<br>
D- All of the above</p>
<p>Which color represents the line of force for the lower core?<br>
A- Red<br>
B- Black<br>
C- Blue<br>
D- None of the above</p>
<p>The line of force is the direction the body's center of mass moves during the swing?<br>
True<br>
False</p>
<p>When using a hip bar the bar should be located on your waist at belt level to properly evaluate if the hips are square?<br>
True<br>
False</p>
<p>If the hips are open when using the downswing path test you will generally have an out to in downswing?<br>
True<br>
False</p>
<p>What is fascia?<br>
A- A group of muscles<br>
B- Connective tissue that protects organs and connects everything inside the body<br>
C- Muscles in the lower part of the face<br>
D- Specific tendons in the lower part of the face</p>
<p>Wright Balance can be described as?<br>
A- Study of balance<br>
B- A study of human movement tied to bio-tensegrity<br>
C- A golf methodology that emphasizes square hips and heel to toe balance<br>
D- All of the above</p>
<p>What are pressure points?<br>
A- Specific areas of the body that are tied to health and wellness<br>
B- Specific areas of the body that have too much pressure<br>
C- Positions in the golf swing that are related to improved ball striking<br>
D- Places that have built up pressure underground like volcanoes</p>
<p>What is tensegrity?<br>
A- Study of good character<br>
B- Study of bridges<br>
C- Study of headaches<br>
D- Structural principle of compression</p>
<p>The Wright Balance Express is best described as?<br>
A- A way to describe the rapid improvement people make by following the Wright Balance principles<br>
B- A series of checkpoints at set up to improve balance<br>
C- A series of exercises done from a specific stance width<br>
D- A way to quickly show the benefits of balance</p>
<p>How many seperate moves are part of the Wright Balance Express?<br>
A- 2<br>
B- 4<br>
C- 6<br>
D- 8</p>
<p>An upper core player starts their backswing sequence with their upper body?<br>
True<br>
False</p>
<p>A lower core player starts their downswing sequence with their lower body?<br>
True<br>
False</p>
<p>Identifying core region can be done by using your thumb to apply pressure to different spots on your middle finger?<br>
True<br>
False</p>
<p>What putter path would you predict if the player's line of force is directed towards the toes in the lead foot and towards the heel in the trail foot?<br>
A- Out to in<br>
B- In to out<br>
C- Straight<br>
D- Putter path cannot be determined by line of force</p>
<p>When checking the grip for an upper core player, where should the grip go through the middle finger?<br>
A- First pad<br>
B- Second pad<br>
C- Crease between palm and first pad<br>
D- Crease between first and second pad</p>
<p>All of the steps leading up to striking the golf ball can be thought of as links in a chain?<br>
True<br>
False</p>
<p>A Middle Core player will set their upper body first in their set-up, when using the proper kinetic set-up sequence?<br>
True<br>
False</p>
<p>Where is the best place to start working on visualization?<br>
A- Short game<br>
B- Full Swing<br>
C- Trouble Shots<br>
D- Driver</p>
<p>The common denominator for behavior change is most often?<br>
A- Practice<br>
B- Setting goals and keeping a diary<br>
C- Preparation<br>
D- Hoping it will happen</p>
<p>A focus on outcome when playing produces which state?<br>
A- Increased arousal<br>
B- Better scores<br>
C- Better focus<br>
D- Flow state</p>
<p>The hand you hold the club with during your preshot routine can influence your aim?<br>
True<br>
False</p>
<p>Visualization is an important golf skill and can be practiced by which of the following methods?<br>
A- Holding an image of the target in your mind for longer and longer durations<br>
B- Grading practice shots based on the clarity of the image before you swing<br>
C- Seeing yourself raising a trophy or shooting a great score<br>
D- Recalling past great shots and picturing them before you play<br>
E- All of the above</p>
</div>]]></content:encoded></item><item><title><![CDATA[Posture & the Wright Balance® Downswing Club Path Test (WEB 1)]]></title><description><![CDATA[<div class="kg-card-markdown"><p>Copyright, Wright Balance® 2026</p>
<p><em>&quot;I would rather die of passion than of boredom. What is done in love is done well.&quot;</em><br>
Vincent Van Gogh</p>
<p>&quot;Judge nothing, you will be happy. Forgive everything, you will be happier.&quot;<br>
~<br>
Sri Chinmoy</p>
<p>You will note that there are 4 videos</p></div>]]></description><link>https://instructions.wrightbalance.com/draft-posture-the-downswing-path-test/</link><guid isPermaLink="false">6960760033f75d000162ace3</guid><dc:creator><![CDATA[David F. Wright]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Fri, 09 Jan 2026 03:30:39 GMT</pubDate><content:encoded><![CDATA[<div class="kg-card-markdown"><p>Copyright, Wright Balance® 2026</p>
<p><em>&quot;I would rather die of passion than of boredom. What is done in love is done well.&quot;</em><br>
Vincent Van Gogh</p>
<p>&quot;Judge nothing, you will be happy. Forgive everything, you will be happier.&quot;<br>
~<br>
Sri Chinmoy</p>
<p>You will note that there are 4 videos below to begin this eBook and more that follow.</p>
<blockquote>
<ol>
<li><strong>Setting the Order of the Kinetic chain (Kinematic Sequence) &amp;  The Wright Balance® Downswing Club Path Test</strong></li>
<li><strong>The Posture and Sequencing of Motion (Kinematic Sequence) for the Anterior Zone / Upper Core</strong></li>
<li><strong>The Posture and Sequencing of Motion (Kinematic Sequence) for the Interior Zone / Middle Core Player</strong></li>
<li><strong>The Posture and Sequencing of Motion (Kinematic Sequence) for the Posterior Zone / Lower Core Player</strong></li>
</ol>
</blockquote>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p>I created a division of YouTube videos below so you may provide your student with the &quot;matching&quot; posture and sequencing for their Dominant Zone.  You will find your students will retain about 15 to 20 percent of your lesson content.  I would suggests you either provide a video of them doing the correct Posture and Sequencing of Motion, you make 3 videos of each Zone or use the videos provided here.  If you also provide the Wright Balance® Downswing Path Tests video, they will learn to check each setup link as they practice at home.</p>
<blockquote>
<p>NOTE:  Research shows that behavior change is best accomplished when a daily diary is kept.  I have provided a diary checklist in your training materials in Lesson 5.0.  The diary will remind your student to do the daily practice routine.  Be certain to ask the student to return with their diary at each lesson.  The Wright Balance® Downswing Club Path Test is a foundation you and your student will use for immediate reinforcement and correction.</p>
</blockquote>
<h2 id="posturesequenceofmotionandthewrightbalancedownswingclubpathtestdpt">Posture, Sequence of Motion and the Wright Balance® Downswing Club Path Test (DPT)</h2>
<h3 id="settingthelowerkineticchainstancebeforetheupperkineticchaingrip">Setting the Lower Kinetic Chain (Stance) Before the Upper Kinetic Chain (Grip)</h3>
<iframe width="560" height="315" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/zLczY589xXI?si=bzyXIOu6IYI2MfoE" title="YouTube video player" frameborder="0" allow="accelerometer; autoplay; clipboard-write; encrypted-media; gyroscope; picture-in-picture; web-share" referrerpolicy="strict-origin-when-cross-origin" allowfullscreen></iframe>
<h3 id="uppercoreposturesequenceofmotionthewrightbalancedownswingclubpathtestdpt">Upper Core Posture, Sequence of Motion &amp; the Wright Balance® Downswing Club Path Test (DPT)</h3>
<iframe width="560" height="315" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/bWhTUFk5by8?si=MpSvB909fki0_RxX" title="YouTube video player" frameborder="0" allow="accelerometer; autoplay; clipboard-write; encrypted-media; gyroscope; picture-in-picture; web-share" referrerpolicy="strict-origin-when-cross-origin" allowfullscreen></iframe>
<h3 id="middlecoreposturesequenceofmotionthewrightbalancedownswingclubpathtestdpt">Middle Core Posture, Sequence of Motion &amp; the Wright Balance® Downswing Club Path Test (DPT)</h3>
<iframe width="560" height="315" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/hCgs_8-XtTk?si=yXaunk8WHHexhLGE" title="YouTube video player" frameborder="0" allow="accelerometer; autoplay; clipboard-write; encrypted-media; gyroscope; picture-in-picture; web-share" referrerpolicy="strict-origin-when-cross-origin" allowfullscreen></iframe>
<h3 id="lowercoreposturesequenceofmotionthewrightbalancedownswingclubpathtestdpt">Lower Core Posture, Sequence of Motion &amp; the Wright Balance® Downswing Club Path Test (DPT)</h3>
<iframe width="560" height="315" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/XeK9im01ds8?si=WhITIq2Lcpivw1u5" title="YouTube video player" frameborder="0" allow="accelerometer; autoplay; clipboard-write; encrypted-media; gyroscope; picture-in-picture; web-share" referrerpolicy="strict-origin-when-cross-origin" allowfullscreen></iframe>
<h2 id="theoriginofthewrightbalancedownswingclubpathtestdpt">The Origin of the Wright Balance® Downswing Club Path Test (DPT)</h2>
<p>Research in Dr. Frank Jobe's biomechanics lab at Centinela Hospital in the early 2000s shed a precise light on the balance position at ground level and path with the putter. The following images were shot during the putting segment in the Biomechanics Lab.  Each player had 40 light sensors on their body, 1000 force sensors in their shoes and light sensors on the putter and irons.</p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/iU71hxo"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/iU71hxo.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/j7aA43x"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/j7aA43x.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/XpiuPBv"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/XpiuPBv.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p>When the putter path was observed as square to the line, the following balance image of the force / pressure sensors was present 100 percent of the time from address through the stroke to finish.</p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/uVdCYoH"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/uVdCYoH.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p>When the putter path was outside-in, this was a predictable observation at ground level <strong>before and after the stroke</strong>.  Note the position of heel to toe balance as shown by the force / pressure sensors.</p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/yXFOvOZ"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/yXFOvOZ.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p>When the putter path was inside out, this was a predictable observation of the force / pressure sensors at ground level.  Note the position of heel to toe balance. Note the center of force / pressure forward in the left foot and back in the right foot.</p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/BFjBEvI"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/BFjBEvI.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p>Each research subject had a multiple data collection points with putter where they had a bar on their hips.  The orientation of the bar matched the balance configuration observed with the force / pressure sensors at ground level.</p>
<p>Those observations were tested over several years.  It was determined that the full swing could be tested similar to the way the putter was tested. In the full swing, having the player stop at any point at address or in motion before impact, stand tall and face their target line and add knee flex, the observed line of PRESSURE was predictive of the path the club would follow in the downswing:  The Wright Balance® Downswing Club Path Test (DPT).  As long as the player didn't move their feet, the orientation of the hips correctly predicted the path the putter, irons and woods would take through impact.</p>
<p>Posture, when to Grip the club, Grip, Stance Width, Shaft Lean and Sequence of Motion tests were added to the full swing and putter path tests.  The grip and posture tests identified full swing and putter path 100 percent of the time.</p>
<p>When testing the address position with students I observed that shaft plane changed when the student was in balance...</p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/ODpjj69"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/ODpjj69.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p>...versus out of balance:</p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/dJ5cu6V"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/dJ5cu6V.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<h1 id="pressurevsforcethewrightbalancedownswingclubpathtest">Pressure Vs Force &amp; the Wright Balance® Downswing Club Path Test</h1>
<p>Pressure is the measured observation of your body as you stand on a balance mat. That pressure becomes FORCE as your kinetic chain starts in motion (kinematics) in any activity. The ground FORCE that is applied is directly related to the amount of FORCE that is recruited from the ground.</p>
<p>FORCE**** is the effort or energy you actively apply or recruit through your body's kinetic chain. Forces in the golf swing are categorized as Horizontal (Linear), Rotational (Torque), and Vertical.</p>
<h2 id="pressuretoforcetopressurethewrightbalancedownswingclubpathtest">Pressure to Force to Pressure: The Wright Balance® Downswing Club Path Test</h2>
<p>The Relationship of PRESSURE and the beginning  &quot;recruitment&quot; of FORCE starts in the address position.  Each position at address (Posture, when the club is gripped, grip, shaft lean, stance, etc) creates either a symmetrical line of PRESSURE at ground level as shown here...</p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/uVdCYoH"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/uVdCYoH.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p>or a variation on one of the two resulting lines of PRESSURE</p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/yXFOvOZ"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/yXFOvOZ.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/BFjBEvI"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/BFjBEvI.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<h2 id="lineofpressuretopressuretest">Line of PRESSURE TO PRESSURE Test</h2>
<p>The line of PRESSURE TO PRESSURE is done before swing motion begins.  In the full swing, the player starts with a line of pressure.  Wright Balance® teaching creates a symmetrical line of pressure at address by matching the player's playing Core Zone to a corresponding Performance Stance Width Range (PSR); Posture; noting when to place their hands on the club, the Grip and Shaft Lean.</p>
<p>The Line of Pressure is measured by a line connecting the center of PRESSURE of one foot to the center of PRESSURE of the other foot as shown here.</p>
<blockquote>
<p>NOTE: Each of these address positions (stance width, posture, grip, shaft lean)  is tested separately and, when properly set, creates a symmetrical line of PRESSURE (a straight line) ****.  When any one of the address positions is set incorrectly, the Line of Pressure is diagonal from the Center of Pressure in on foot the the Center of PRESSURE in the other foot.</p>
</blockquote>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/uVdCYoH"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/uVdCYoH.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p>The Wright Balance® Dowswing Club Path Test is done with each of the set up positions, one at a time.  When, for example, the Performance Stance Range (PSR) matches the Core Zone, the line of PRESSURE will be a straight line as shown here.</p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/uVdCYoH"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/uVdCYoH.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p>When the player sets up outside their matching Performance Stance Range, the line of pressure will result in one of the following lines of PRESSURE.</p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/yXFOvOZ"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/yXFOvOZ.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/BFjBEvI"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/BFjBEvI.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<h3 id="howtodothewrightbalancedownswingclubpathtest">How to Do the Wright Balance® Downswing Club Path Test</h3>
<p>From the address position, the player stands, returns to a tall position facing the target line and adds knee flex.  If the line of PRESSURE /Force is square. That feedback reinforces the players practice and your teaching.</p>
<p>If, when the player stands tall facing their target line and the line of PRESSURE / Force is one of the following, one of the address positions (Performance Stance Range --PSR--grip, shaft lean or POSTURE) does not match the players Core Zone. This immediate feedback sets the stage for correction and learning.</p>
<p>Research shows that these positions will be the resulting Downswing Club Path (DPT) through impact.</p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/yXFOvOZ"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/yXFOvOZ.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/BFjBEvI"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/BFjBEvI.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p>The simple correction is in one of the address positions tested one at a time with the Downswing Club Path Test.</p>
<p>Based upon Wright Balance® research, your ability to recruit maximum ground forces is determined by your Core Zone and setup (address position of your kinetic chain) and a sequence of motion that matches your Core Zone.</p>
<p>If your fundamentals don't match your Core Zone or your sequence of motion moves toward the toes or heels, this compromises your ability to recruit maximum ground force, regardless of how much pressure you try to apply.  These factors can be &quot;teased out&quot; using the Wright Balance® Downswing Club Path Test.</p>
<h2 id="testingateachingfallacywiththewrightbalancedownswingclubpathtestloadthetrailheelatthetopoftheswing">Testing a Teaching Fallacy with the Wright Balance® Downswing Club Path Test: Load the Trail Heel at the Top of The Swing</h2>
<p>I learned and taught for years that a player should load their weight into their trail heel at the top of the swing.  Posture and a Performance Stance Width Range (PSR) and Sequencing of Motion that matches your Core Zone learning must precede this tesing.   Then, without a club, test the backswing to the top of your swing purposely loading your weight in your trail heel.  Stop at the top without moving your feet and do the Wright Balance® Downswing Club Path Test. You will note that the line of Force created is an inside - out path or an outside - in path as a predictor of the impact path.</p>
<h3 id="testingthebalancelineofforceinthebackswing">Testing the Balance Line of Force in the Backswing</h3>
<p>Wright Balance® Downswing Club Path research confirms that balance is a straight line in the golf swing.  If is important for your student to practice this process.  Be certain to use the Wright Balance diary for daily practice.</p>
<blockquote>
<p><strong>NOTE</strong>: It is important for your student to have a ball on the floor in front of them when they practice any of the setup drills.</p>
</blockquote>
<ol>
<li>
<p>Have your student stand on an alignment stick with a bar on their hips.  Their hips will only be square <strong>when and only when</strong> their heel to toe balance matches their Core Zone as experienced by the pressure of the alignment stick under their feet and a bar on their hips is parallel to their stance line.</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>Next, in their Dominant Core Zone set the Wright Balance® Performance Stance Width Range (PSR) and posture.</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>Use the Wright Balance® Downswing Club Path Test to be certain Stance Width Range (PSR) and posture have been set correctly as confirmed by the bar on their hips being parallel to their stance line.</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>Next you are going to have your student rotate to the top of their swing and load their weight into their trail heel.</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>Return to square, and do the Wright Balance® Downswing Club Path Test. Note that their hips open or close when loading the trail heel at the top of the swing.</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>Again, have your student reset their feet on the alignment stick and find the balance line that matches their Core Zone where their hips are square to their stance line.  As they start their motion to the top have your student focus on staying in the starting balance position of their trail foot as they get to the top of their swing.</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>Have your student return to square without moving their feet. Do the Wright Balance® Downswing Club Path Test. If Posture and Sequence of Motion matched their Core Zone their hips will be square.</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>If your student's hips are open or closed when doing the Wright Balance® Downswing Club Path Test, test Posture and Sequence of Motion  separately and repeat the test on the alignment stick.</p>
</li>
</ol>
<blockquote>
<p>Note: As an aside, there is a theory that posits when the Kinetic Chain is aligned to deliver maximum force from the ground, the &quot;propagation of force&quot; throughout your body is facilitated by the fascia system.   The fascia system acts as a &quot;tension structure.&quot; When force is applied correctly through your Core, hands and feet, there is a balanced application of force across your entire core through your kinetic chain to and from the ground.  This is when maximum power is created.</p>
</blockquote>
<h2 id="fullswingwrightbalancedownswingclubpathtestsdpt">Full Swing Wright Balance  Downswing Club Path Tests (DPT)</h2>
<p>The observations with the putter ultimately prompted identical testing in the full swing.</p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/7mDvz3X"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/7mDvz3X.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p>Those observation set the stage for an identical test in each step of the full swing. The Wright Balance® Downswing Club Path Test (DPT) is used in every link of the total setup chain.  The player, for example sets their Posture, then stands tall, looks straight ahead, adds a slight bit of knee flex and checks their hip line.  If their Posture was set correctly, their hips will be square.</p>
<p>All that is necessary to test the hip line is a hip bar, the arms drop or arm swing path.  Each of these measurements requires total <strong>RELAXATION</strong> by the player.  Any tension will create false positives.  Once your student learns the Wright Balance® Downswing Path Test (DPT), they can practice each phase of their setup at home and be well prepared when they return for their next lesson.</p>
<blockquote>
<p><strong>How it is done</strong><br>
Set the Posture that matches your Core Zone.  Stand tall, look straight ahead, add knee flex and check your hip line.  If your hips are Square, you have set your Posture correctly.  If your hips are not square, you have either not set your Posture correctly or you have set a Posture that does not match your Stance Width Performance Range.   The immediate feedback of each link in the setup using the Wright Balance® Downswing Path Test (DPT) is imperative for learning.  The results of the test accelerates learning with positive feedback when the setup link is correct. When a link in the setup and motion chain results in an open or closed hip line, feedback is immediate.  The weak link can be identified and correction can be practiced and retested until the hips are square.</p>
</blockquote>
<p>The Wright Balance® Downswing Path Test is used in absolutely every set up and Motion Sequence.  When each part of the setup is practiced independently and blended with motion, it is quite simple to use the Wright Balance® Downswing Path Testsn (DPT) to determine the accuracy of your player's setup and motion with immediate feedback, a major change in instruction.</p>
<p>If, when you do the Wright Balance® Downswing Path Test (DPT) and your hips are open, you will notice your trail hip rises.  If your hips are closed when you test, your lead hip will rise.</p>
<h2 id="posture">POSTURE</h2>
<p>How important is Posture for distance? This one minute video at a Wright Balance® facility in Redmond Washington. This video shows demonstrates a 20 yard distance increase with a 9 iron simply by setting Posture correctly.</p>
<iframe width="560" height="315" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/pqBHlxY6EyM?si=iJNkoJP7jZAQDlLM" title="YouTube video player" frameborder="0" allow="accelerometer; autoplay; clipboard-write; encrypted-media; gyroscope; picture-in-picture; web-share" referrerpolicy="strict-origin-when-cross-origin" allowfullscreen></iframe>
<p>You will notice the difference in how Posture is set in this video compared to the instructions in this Chapter.  I will cover the same  Posture set that is in this video in a future Chapter.  The Posture set in the video requires the correct left and right hand grip and how and where the arms rest on the chest wall as the club is held with the shaft parallel to the ground with natural shaft lean.  The Carrying Angle plays a significant roll in this process.  I will be covering Grip and Carrying Angle in great detail in future Chapters. Notice in the above video that stance is tall and the player is holding the shaft parallel to the ground as he prepares to set up.  This is a screen shot from the above video.</p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/7IZXp2k"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/7IZXp2k.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<h2 id="thighangleandcarryingangle">Thigh Angle and Carrying Angle</h2>
<p>When you look at the Posture of any player, their thigh angle <em><strong>is</strong></em> always predictable and equal to their Carrying / Power Angle.</p>
<blockquote>
<p>This is a link to an eBook on the Carrying Angle:<br>
<a href="https://instructions.wrightbalance.com/the-power-of-angles/">https://instructions.wrightbalance.com/the-power-of-angles/</a></p>
</blockquote>
<p>The Carrying Angle is measured using the angle of the forearm 90 degrees to the ground.  This illustration shows the measurement of the Carrying Angle during our original research at Centinela Hospital.  Dr. Michael Mellman, one of the primary researchers in the Centinela Hospital biomechanics lab in early 2000s, introduced the Carrying Angle to the research setting.</p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/1XWtnl8"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/1XWtnl8.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p>The following photo shows how the Carrying Angle has been measured for the past 25 years.</p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/qZLt3fR"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/qZLt3fR.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p>All angles are  measured 90 degrees to the ground.  This is an important concept for you to understand as it is a predictable measurement.</p>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<blockquote>
<p><strong>When setting posture and then testing the Wright Balance® Downswing Club Path, which of the following balance configurations is the most desireable</strong>?</p>
</blockquote>
<p><strong>A.</strong><br>
<a href="https://imgur.com/uVdCYoH"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/uVdCYoH.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p><strong>B</strong>.<br>
<a href="https://imgur.com/yXFOvOZ"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/yXFOvOZ.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p><strong>C</strong><br>
<a href="https://imgur.com/BFjBEvI"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/BFjBEvI.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<p><strong>A</strong>.**<br>
<a href="https://imgur.com/uVdCYoH"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/uVdCYoH.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p>When doing the Wright Balance® Dowswing Club Path Test, if the hips are square as demonstrated by a bar on the pelvis, the arms drop shows the fists are equal and the arm swing is straight back and through, the posture set is accurate for the Core Zone being tested.</p>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<blockquote>
<p><strong>What is the predictable shot this Wright Balance® Downswing Club Path will produce?</strong></p>
</blockquote>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/yXFOvOZ"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/yXFOvOZ.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<p>This Wright Balance® Downswing Path will result in the player feeling &quot;stuck&quot; in the backswing as the shoulder rotation will be limited to 90 degrees to the line of force.  This position will produce an over the top swing, steep approach to the ball, heavy and a golf shot pulled left or blocked right.  This is a slicer's downswing path.</p>
<p>In this balance configuration the putter will result in an outside in &quot;cut&quot; stroke as the putter path crosses the target line placing &quot;cut spin&quot; on the ball.</p>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>**Which of these Downswing Path results creates a  trail hip rising, as shown here, in the downswing and demonstrated in the Zoom session.</p>
</blockquote>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/FI8w1ud"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/FI8w1ud.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p><strong>A.</strong><br>
<a href="https://imgur.com/uVdCYoH"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/uVdCYoH.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p><strong>B</strong>.<br>
<a href="https://imgur.com/yXFOvOZ"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/yXFOvOZ.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p><strong>C</strong><br>
<a href="https://imgur.com/BFjBEvI"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/BFjBEvI.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<p><strong>B</strong>.<br>
<a href="https://imgur.com/yXFOvOZ"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/yXFOvOZ.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p>This balance configuration will result in a steep approach to the ball and the raised trail hip will magnify this steep approach, putter through driver.</p>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<blockquote>
<p><strong>What happens to the trail hip if this balance configuration is the result of the Downswing Path Test?</strong><br>
<a href="https://imgur.com/BFjBEvI"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/BFjBEvI.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<p>The trail hip is lower than the lead hip, however the shot or putt result is as described in the answer to the next question</p>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<blockquote>
<p><strong>What shot does this balance configuration produce?</strong></p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/BFjBEvI"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/BFjBEvI.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
</blockquote>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<p>The club will arrive to the ball from the inside, the miss will be a thin push or a &quot;handsy&quot; flip resulting in a hook.  The shoulders will &quot;stall&quot; 90 degrees to the line of force and the hands will pass the shoulders giving a &quot;handsy&quot; feel at impact and a &quot;stuck&quot; feeling.  The more pronounced this line of force is, the less likely the player can turn through to finish and maintain balance.</p>
<p>In this balance configuration the putter will result in an inside- out stroke.  As the putter path crosses the target line, it places &quot;hook spin&quot; on the ball.</p>
<h2 id="settingposturenaturally">Setting Posture Naturally</h2>
<p>If your student is struggling finding their posture, determine their Carrying Angle and provide them with a heavy weight placed across their middle chest. The Carrying Angle will be naturally set in their thigh 90 degrees to the ground.  The thigh angle is always equal to the Carrying Angle as shown here.</p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/MGlONtN"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/MGlONtN.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p>Once posture is set and, with the matching backswing sequence, your student will have maximum shoulder rotation as shown here.</p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/2eZJoMa"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/2eZJoMa.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p>The following image is from a golf magazine article I wrote in 2008. I was demonstrating use of the weight across my chest as a Posterior Zone / Lower Core Player.  Note my wide stance, the level plane of my shoulders, Center of Mass over my trail side, and my lead knee points out in front of the ball, characteristics of the Lower Core player. The weight across my chest set my body angles for maximum shoulder rotation.</p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/SV3Z9Y2"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/SV3Z9Y2.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p>The following illustration is from 2012 where I am using the weight with Sandra Palmer, LPGA Hall of Fame.</p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/GfwpuBF"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/GfwpuBF.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<blockquote>
<p><strong>Note</strong><br>
Please know that the characteristics of lead knee and center of mass at the top of the swing <strong>IS NOT</strong> how to determine Dominant Core Zone.  The Sequence of Motion used, regardless of Core Zone dominance is what creates the lead knee and Center of Mass, not the Dominant Core Zone.  The Dominant Core Zone is determined using the Wright Balance® Dominant Zone test shown in this video.</p>
</blockquote>
<iframe width="560" height="315" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/oETC5Yz2KJg?si=vSNdpxA-RNwg9WCK" title="YouTube video player" frameborder="0" allow="accelerometer; autoplay; clipboard-write; encrypted-media; gyroscope; picture-in-picture; web-share" referrerpolicy="strict-origin-when-cross-origin" allowfullscreen></iframe>
<h1 id="posturebycorezone">Posture by Core Zone</h1>
<h2 id="anteriorzoneuppercore">Anterior Zone / Upper Core</h2>
<h3 id="stancewidth">Stance Width</h3>
<p>The Anterior Zone / Upper Core Player has a very narrow Stance. Kevin Stadler was one of my students for 15 years.</p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/Za3w8LQ"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/Za3w8LQ.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p>I did a Wright Balance® lesson with Colin Montgomerie a few years ago.  Both Kevin's and Colin's stance width with irons was 16 inches.</p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/M6PBKoS"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/M6PBKoS.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p>They both are Anterior Zone / Upper Core players with a large stature and a narrow stance.  Consider their size if you are an Upper Core player. If you are an Anterior Zone / Upper Core Player I would encourage you to start at 14 inches with irons.  Recall that the Anterior Zone / Upper Core Player's Wright Balance® Performance Stance Width Range is 8 to 16 inches plus or minus 1 inch on both ends of this range.</p>
<p>Players have been told and tend to naturally get a wider stance with driver. Kevin and Colin remained narrow with driver.  Kevin used a long putter and naturally had a very narrow stance.  Colin's putter stance width was the same as his irons, 16 inches.</p>
<p>Why a narrow stance? As an Upper Core player, your trail hip begins the backswing.  In order to use the trail hip to start your backswing, your stance width must be narrow.</p>
<p>Now, with that narrow Stance Width, let's look at how the Anterior Zone / Upper Core player sets their Posture.</p>
<p>The <strong>Upper Core</strong> Players Spine Angle is greater than his Thigh Angle Angle.  The <strong>Thigh Angle is always equal to the Power Angle</strong> in every Core Zone.</p>
<p><img src="http://i.imgur.com/uoGucMO.jpg" alt="enter image description here"></p>
<p><img src="http://i.imgur.com/7JqCltO.jpg" alt="enter image description here"></p>
<p>The following illustrations show Jai Edwards setting the <strong>Upper Core</strong> first in an <strong>Upper Core Stance Width</strong> and then adding knee flex after the <strong>Upper Core</strong> is <strong>Set</strong>.</p>
<p><img src="http://i.imgur.com/DQMQ2W8.jpg" alt="enter image description here"></p>
<p>Setting the <strong>Upper Core First</strong> is a strategy many of us learned and taught in setting <strong>Posture</strong>.  This Posture set <strong>only works</strong> with the <strong>Upper Core Player.</strong></p>
<p>When learning the Posture for a Upper Core player, the person must stand tall looking straight ahead, as shown in the above illustration, <em><strong>not</strong></em> with their eyes on the ball.  Once the knees are locked out and the spine angle is set, the Upper Core player adds knee flex as shown here.</p>
<p><img src="http://i.imgur.com/jtm7A22.jpg" alt="enter image description here"></p>
<p>When learning Posture, always test with each practice repetition using the Wright Balance® Downswing Path Test.</p>
<blockquote>
<p><strong>Note</strong>: Your club path will be square to the line at impact only if you set a posture that matches your Core Zone.  Any other posture set results in an open or closed hip line when tested using the Wright Balance® Downswing Path Test.</p>
</blockquote>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p>**When setting the Posture for the Upper Core, as with each Core Zone, the player stands tall, eyes straight ahead.  Then, they bend from the hips with no knee flex.  Once the spine angle is set, they add knee flex.</p>
<p>Be certain your students start their setup each time from a <strong>Standing Tall</strong> posture.  You will note that their hips remain square when you do the Wright Balance® Downswing Path Test if the Posture set matches the Core Zone and Posture was set correctly.</p>
<blockquote>
<p><strong>Note</strong>:The Upper Core Player's hips remain square only if they set their upper body (spine angle) first with <strong>NO KNEE FLEX</strong> followed by knee flex.  Any other posture set results in an open or closed hip line when tested using the Wright Balance® Downswing Path Test.</p>
</blockquote>
<p>Once Posture is set correctly, the Upper Core Player's balance is over the balls of the feet as shown here.</p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/zni2NBk"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/zni2NBk.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p>Test the Upper Core <strong>Posture</strong> in the Upper Core Zone using the Wright Balance® Downswing Path Test. Then test the Middle and Lower Core Posture set while in the Upper Core Zone.  You will find that the only time the Wright Balance® Downswing Path Test results in a square hip line is with the Upper Core Posture set.</p>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<h2 id="trueorfalse">True or False</h2>
<blockquote>
<p><strong>I can find the natural angles of my body if I set my Posture correctly for my Core Zone  while holding a heavy weight on the middle of my chest.</strong></p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<p><strong>TRUE</strong></p>
<blockquote>
<p>Please know that a circular weight on the middle of the chest is used  to set the Posture Angles.  A weighted bar does not work.</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="interiorzonemiddlecore">Interior Zone / Middle Core</h1>
<h3 id="stancewidth">Stance Width</h3>
<p>The Interior Zone / Middle Core Player's Stance Width is between 16 and 24 inches plus or minus one inch.  A shoulder width stance will fit most if not all players whose Dominant Core Zone is Interior Zone / Middle Core. A shoulder Width Stance fits the Middle and Lower Core Player's Wright Balance® Performance Stance Width Range (PSR), but not the Upper Core.</p>
<p>Motion Sequencing for the Middle Core Player.  The Middle Core player starts their your Upper and Lower Core together in the backswing.    The 16 to 24 inch (plus or minus 1 inch) stance width sets the player to turn everything back together from address.  Let's look at how the Interior Zone / Middle Core player sets their Posture.</p>
<p>The <strong>Middle Core</strong> Players Spine Angle is greater than their Thigh Angle Angle.  The <strong>Thigh Angle is always equal to the Power Angle</strong> in every Core Region.  The <strong>Middle Core</strong> Player is the Hybrid showing setup and swing motion that shares characteristics of both the Lower &amp; Upper Core Player</p>
<p><img src="http://i.imgur.com/8vzJILU.jpg" alt="enter image description here"></p>
<p><img src="http://i.imgur.com/l6Ok2bu.jpg" alt="enter image description here"></p>
<p>When learning the Posture for a Middle Core player, the person must stand tall looking straight ahead, as shown in the above illustration, <em><strong>not</strong></em> with their eyes on the ball.</p>
<blockquote>
<p><strong>Why?</strong> When the player looks down, balance moves toward the balls of the feet and the spine angle tends to be too far forward. When tested with eyes on the ball and the spine angle too faar forward, the Wright Balance® Downswing Path Test (DPT) will result in an open or closed hip line.</p>
</blockquote>
<blockquote>
<p><strong>Note</strong>: Your club path will remain square to the target line when doing the Wright Balance® Downswing Path Test at impact only if you set a posture that matches your Core Zone.  Any other posture set results in an open or closed hip line when tested.</p>
</blockquote>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p><strong>When setting the Posture for the Middle Core, the player stands tall, eyes straight ahead and they add knee fles and spine angle simultaneously.</strong></p>
<p>Be certain your students start their setup each time from a <strong>Standing Tall</strong> posture.  You will note that their hips remain square when you do the Wright Balance® Downswing Path Test (DPT) if the Posture set matches the Core Zone and Posture was set correctly.</p>
<p><img src="http://i.imgur.com/1oFaqeX.jpg" alt="enter image description here"></p>
<p><img src="http://i.imgur.com/f9G4amc.jpg" alt="enter image description here"></p>
<blockquote>
<p><strong>Note</strong>:The hips remain square for the Middle Core Player only if they set their upper (spine angle) and lower body (thigh angle) simultaneously.  Any other posture set results in an open or closed hip line when tested using the Wright Balance® Downswing Club Path Test.</p>
</blockquote>
<p>Once Posture is set, the Middle Core Player's balance is behind the balls of the feet and forward of the center of the arches as shown here.</p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/3in6Tq8"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/3in6Tq8.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<h1 id="thewrightbalanceposteriorzonelowercore">The Wright Balance® Posterior Zone / Lower Core</h1>
<h3 id="stancewidth">Stance Width</h3>
<p>The Posterior Zone / Lower Core Player has a much wider than shoulder width stance. The Lower Core player's Wright Balance® Performance Stance Range (PSR) is 20 to 28 inches plus or minus one inch.</p>
<p>The Lower Core player starts their backswing with shoulder rotation before the Lower Core (hips). The shoulder rotation, when started with a wide stance width naturally delays the hip rotation. With a wide stance width, you will  experience the natural delay of your hips when practicing the Lower Core Sequence of Motion.  Now, with that Wide Stance, let's look at how the Posterior Zone / Lower Core player sets their Posture.</p>
<p>The Lower Core Player's Spine and Thigh Angle are identical to the player's Carrying Angle when measured 90 degrees to the ground.</p>
<p><img src="http://i.imgur.com/gjrSdRY.jpg" alt="enter image description here"></p>
<p><img src="http://i.imgur.com/zzxeeR1.jpg" alt="enter image description here"></p>
<p>When learning the Posture for a Lower Core player, the person must stand tall looking straight ahead, as shown in the above illustration, <em><strong>not</strong></em> with their eyes on the ball.</p>
<blockquote>
<p><strong>Why?</strong> Again, when the player looks down, balance moves toward the balls of the feet and the spine angle tends to be forward. When tested with eyes on the ball and spine angle is slightly forward, the Wright Balance® Downswing Club Path Test (DPT) results in an errant club path through impact.</p>
</blockquote>
<p>When setting the Posture for Lower Core, the player stands tall, eyes straight ahead and they sit down keeping their back straight as shown here.</p>
<p>Be certain to start your setup each time from a Standing Tall Posture with eyes up and straight ahead.  When done correctly, you will note that your hips remain square when you do the Wright Balance® Downswing Club Path Test (DPT).</p>
<p><img src="http://i.imgur.com/ys5x9sl.jpg" alt="enter image description here"></p>
<p>After you set your <strong>Lower Core</strong>, then add your <strong>Spine Angle</strong> as shown here.</p>
<p><img src="http://i.imgur.com/1oFaqeX.jpg" alt="enter image description here"></p>
<p>If you are a Lower Core player and you set your posture as shown here, the Wright Balance® Downswing Club Path Test will show a square hip line.</p>
<blockquote>
<p><strong>Note</strong>: Your hips remain square only if you set a posture that matches your Core Zone.  Any other posture set results in an open or closed hip line when tested using the Wright Balance® Downswing Club Path Test.</p>
</blockquote>
<p>Once Posture is set, the Lower Core Player's balance is over the center of the arches as shown here.</p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/iACtBH9"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/iACtBH9.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p>This posture, when combined with Wide Stance Width, Lower Core Power Spots and a Wright Balance® Downswing Club Path Test that is square, produces maximum Power for the Lower Core Player. The Lower Core Player uses the ground rotationally and horizontally.</p>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<h1 id="trueorfalse">TRUE or FALSE</h1>
<blockquote>
<p><strong>When practicing the Upper Core Posture, lock out your knees and bend from the hips</strong></p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<p>True</p>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<h1 id="trueorfalse">TRUE or FALSE</h1>
<blockquote>
<p><strong>When practicing the Middle Core Posture, keep your back straight and sit down before adding your spine angle</strong></p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<p>False  When setting the Middle Core Posture, the upper and lower body are set simultaneously.</p>
<h1 id="sequencingofmotionbycorezone">Sequencing of Motion by Core Zone</h1>
<h2 id="thewrightbalanceanteriorzoneuppercore">The Wright Balance® Anterior Zone / Upper Core</h2>
<p>Sixty (60) percent of the male population in the US measures as an Anterior Zone / Upper Core player.  That percentage was determined from measurements of over 3000 players of all levels in 16 countries.  Some country regions have more or less by a few percentage points.</p>
<p>The Upper Core player's hip turn is the greatest of the three Core Regions.  A signature of the Upper Core Swing at the top is in the position of the lead knee and Center of Mass (COM).  When motion is paused at the top, the lead knee of the Anterior Zone / Upper Core player points behind the ball.  The COM is target side.  Note how narrow the stance width is in the Upper Core Player compared to the Middle (Interior Zone) and Lower Core (Posterior Zone) Player.</p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/sfnwTsH"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/sfnwTsH.png" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p>A characteristic of the Anterior Zone / Upper Core player is a very shallow Carrying or Power angle.  The Anterior Zone / Upper Core player's Carrying / Power angle is generally somewhere in the range of 160 to 164 degrees.  The Carrying or Power Angle of 160 to 164 sets the trail elbow so it seats behind the trail hip in the downswing producing the &quot;on top&quot; delivery.  (EA Tischler coined the term &quot;on top&quot;.)</p>
<p>The angle to be concerned about is the Carrying / Power angle. We can increase or decrease the Carrying Angle in any one of 11 subregion stance widths when doing the Wright Balance® Express exercise. Please also keep in mind that the Carrying / Power angle shows up in numerous places from address, through the swing to impact. One of those address positions is the thigh angle when measured down the line.</p>
<p>Below, Mike Austin, who hit a 515 yard drive in a Senior PGA Tour event, put on a skeleton costume to describe his swing during a television program in 1964.  Note COM and lead knee position at the top of his swing.</p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/QGQpJnW"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/QGQpJnW.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p>This is the instruction video used to capture the top of Mike Austin's swing.  Note:  Mike Austin describes his stance width, how he sets his posture and starts his backswing, all Anterior Zone / Upper Core set up and swing characteristics.</p>
<iframe width="560" height="315" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/mZS_wFxGmc4" title="YouTube video player" frameborder="0" allow="accelerometer; autoplay; clipboard-write; encrypted-media; gyroscope; picture-in-picture" allowfullscreen></iframe>
<p>If you are a Wright Balance® <strong>Anterior Zone / Upper Core</strong> player,   when you add knee flex, your weight will move over the balls of your feet from any stance width. Before the motion drill, be certain to have a very narrow stance for irons and woods.</p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/zni2NBk"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/zni2NBk.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p>Start your motion with your arms across your chest.  Begin with your trail hip moving straight back. Note that your Center of Mass (COM) is target side at the top of your backswing. This video shows how the Anterior Zone Upper Core Player starts their swing and the position of the lead knee and center of mass target side at the top of the swing.</p>
<iframe width="560" height="315" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/vuct3EF_9u0?si=zZ0H2Q9N_uweL-ca" title="YouTube video player" frameborder="0" allow="accelerometer; autoplay; clipboard-write; encrypted-media; gyroscope; picture-in-picture; web-share" referrerpolicy="strict-origin-when-cross-origin" allowfullscreen></iframe>
<h2 id="stopatthetopofyourbackswing">STOP at the Top of Your Backswing</h2>
<p>Stand tall and, without moving your feet,turn so you are facing your target line (where you began your motion drill).  Again, don't move your feet.  Using the Wright Balance® Downswing Club Path Test (DPT), check your hip line with a bar on your hips, let your fists drop and / or allow your arms to relax in your shoulder socket and note your  arm swing path.  Do Not let your shoulders rock as you let your arms swing.  Close your eyes and feel the relaxed motion of your arm swing path. Again, if your hips are open when you test, you will note that your trail hip rises. If your hips are closed, your trail hip does not rise.</p>
<p>The square, open or closed hip line you observe when doing the Wright Balance Downswing Path Test (DPT) is the path the club will track through impact, putter through driver.</p>
<p>If your hips remain square, you have set your Posture and Sequencing of Motion correctly and your club path will be square to the target line. You just tested both your Posture and Sequencing of Motion. If your hips are square you set both correctly.</p>
<p>If your hip line is open or closed, test your Posture <strong>first</strong> using the Wright Balance® Downswing Path Test.  Continue working on your Posture until the Wright Balance® Downswing Club Path Test (DPT) results in a square hip line at least 5 times in a row. When you have set your Posture correctly consistently, you are ready to return to adding Sequencing of Motion.</p>
<p>Combine your Posture and Sequencing of Motion.  Always use the Wright Balance® Downswing Club Path Test (DPT) when you get to the top of your swing.  Repeat Posture and Motion to the top of your backswing until your hips are square consistently using the Wright Balance® Downswing Path Test (DPT).</p>
<p>Why? You are learning to &quot;self repair&quot; your ball striking.  Each link in the chain of your setup and motion is easily tested with the Wright Balance® Downswing Test (DPT).  By the time we get to grip and swing, you will have built strong links in your setup and motion chain.  If you struggle with ball striking, you can easily determine which link is compromised in your set up.</p>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<blockquote>
<p><strong>When testing the Wright Balance Downswing Path, an open hip line means:</strong></p>
</blockquote>
<blockquote>
<p>a. A steep angle of attack<br>
b. A heavy or blocked shot<br>
c. A trail hip that is higher than the lead hip<br>
d. All of the above **</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<p>d. All of the above.  The open hip line and raised trail hip create a steep angle of attack and the resulting shot a heavy or blocked shot</p>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<p>What does DPT stand for?</p>
<p>a. Don't Park There<br>
b. Don't Pick That<br>
c. Downswing Path Test<br>
d. None of the above</p>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<p>c. Downswing Path Test</p>
<h2 id="testingtheanteriorzoneplayerssetupbackswing">Testing the  Anterior Zone Player's Setup &amp; Backswing</h2>
<p>Notice at the top of your motion drill *<em>IF</em>  you start your motion with your <em><strong>trail hip</strong></em> that your center of mass is target side and your lead knee points behind the ball. You will also note that your balance in your trail foot is still over the balls of your feet. Your line of Force is a straight line and the Wright Balance® Downswing Club Path Test (DPT)  results in a club path square to the target line if your posture, sequencing of motion and balance in your feet matched your Core Zone.</p>
<p>There is a good bit of instruction that says a player should feel weight loading into the trail heel.  You will find that when your Posture and Motion  match your Core Zone that the Line of Force at the top of swing in this drill is a straight line.  Test this using the Wright Balance® Downswing Club Path test and you will get immediate feedback showing an open or closed hip line when you load into the trail heel.</p>
<blockquote>
<p><strong>Note</strong>: If you do the Wright Balance® 8 way Express with in one of the 11 &quot;Red&quot; Stance Widths, your hips will remain square in all stance widths.  The Wright Balance® Express will place you over the balls of your feet.  If you do the Wright Balance® Express at 5 inches, the first of the 11 &quot;Red&quot; stance widths, you will find that your balance is well toward your toes when you stand tall and add knee flex.  If you do the Wright Balance® Express at 35 inches, you will find that when you stand tall and add knee flex your weight is toward the back of the balls of your feet.  No matter which stance width you use in the Upper Core Zone, your Performance Stance Range will <strong>always</strong> default to 8 to 16 inches plus or minus 1 inch.  <em><strong>Note</strong></em>, again you will always find your 8 inch Performance Stance Range (PSR) between 8 &amp; 16 inches plus or minus 1 inch, even if the Wright Balance Express is done in a stance width inside or outside that PSR.</p>
</blockquote>
<p>As you turn through to impact notice that your hips &quot;stall&quot; and you rise as you change direction. Your weight is on the balls of your feet.  You aren't able to &quot;clear&quot; your hips without rising as you change direction to get your hips through.  The club will pull you through to your finish position.</p>
<p>As an Anterior Zone / Upper Core player, as long as you start your motion with your trail hip before your Upper Core, you will finish on the balls of your lead foot (target side) in the downswing finish.</p>
<p>Note the target side center of mass in the following images of these Anterior Zone (Upper Core)Tour Players.  Also note at the top of their swing, their lead knee moves behind the ball, the same positions you experienced during the Anterior Zone motion drill. If you tested as an Anterior Zone player and you practice the motion drill described above, this is what you will experience.</p>
<blockquote>
<p><strong>Please Note:</strong> The positions of lead knee and Center of Mass in the Tour Players below is created by their Sequencing of Motion.  These positions do not determine the Core Zone in all players.  I say this because I have found some Wright Balance®  Professionals have attempted to determine a player's playing Zone by these positions.</p>
</blockquote>
<p><strong>Colin Montgomerie</strong></p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/91qlPec"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/91qlPec.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p><strong>Patrick Reed</strong></p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/sfnwTsH"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/sfnwTsH.png" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p><strong>Phil Mickelson</strong></p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/WEruDOH"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/WEruDOH.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p><strong>Shane Lowry</strong></p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/Fw9O3ip"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/Fw9O3ip.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p><strong>Brandt Snedeker</strong></p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/5rDgQYj"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/5rDgQYj.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p><strong>Payne Stewart</strong></p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/VwPAjVu"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/VwPAjVu.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p>Again, note at the top of the swing in the images above, the lead knee moves behind the ball and, visually, the Center of Mass appears target side.  There is still ample pressure in the trail foot.  When doing this motion drill, do not attempt to &quot;load&quot; target side.  When  Posture and Sequencing of Motion is done correctly, the lead knee and COM will be natural, not forced.  If you tested as an Anterior Zone player and you practice the motion drill described above, this is what you will experience.</p>
<p>This video is a guided practice in how the Anterior Zone player plays from the balls of their feet, sets their posture, starts their swing sequence and uses the ground rotationally and vertically for power in their swing.</p>
<iframe width="560" height="315" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/vuct3EF_9u0" title="YouTube video player" frameborder="0" allow="accelerometer; autoplay; clipboard-write; encrypted-media; gyroscope; picture-in-picture" allowfullscreen></iframe>
<p>Once again, as you turn through to impact notice that your hips &quot;stall&quot; and you rise as you change direction. Your weight is on the balls of your feet.  You aren't able to &quot;clear&quot; your hips without rising as you change direction.  The club will pull you through to your finish position.</p>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<blockquote>
<p><strong>Where is the point of heel to toe balance in the Posterior Zone / Lower Core Player?</strong></p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<p>Over the Center of the Arches</p>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<blockquote>
<p><strong>When balance is over the Center of the Arches, it promotes:</strong></p>
</blockquote>
<blockquote>
<p>a. A balance position to use vertical ground force<br>
b. Ease of hip rotation through impact<br>
c. A finish over the balls of the feet in the lead foot<br>
d. None of the above</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<p>b. Ease of hip rotation through impact.  Move your weight to the Center of your arches and note how easily your hips rotate.  Then move well forward to the balls of your feet and notice how your hips stall through impact and you have to rise on your toes to rotate through.  That is the difference balance makes in the two Core Zones.</p>
<h2 id="groundreactionforceuseintheanteriorzoneuppercoreplayer">Ground Reaction Force Use in the Anterior Zone / Upper Core Player</h2>
<p><strong>The Anterior Zone player uses the ground rotationally and vertically with very little linear motion.</strong> You will experience those forces during your motion drills. How do I know how the Anterior Zone player uses the Ground?</p>
<h3 id="research">Research</h3>
<p>In 2016, Dr. Robert Giombetti,  Neurologist and Wright Balance® Professional, began a research project to determine how players from different Core Zones use the ground.  He has conducted this research with over 200 elite players to date.  The first phase of the study reported here had 80 plus participants, all elite players. The subsequent 120 plus player results have been consistent with the original 80 subjects.</p>
<p>Dr. Giombetti used the Wright Balance® measurement System to set the Stance Widths of 80 Elite Players.  He used a Swing Catalyst &amp; a TrackMan Launch Monitor to gather performance data.</p>
<p>Of the 80 players participating, Dr. Giombetti identified 65% were UPPER CORE (Anterior Zone) Players, 25.5% MIDDLE CORE (Interior Zone) Players &amp; 9.5% LOWER CORE (Posterior Zone) Players.  The subject pool was made up of Tour Players, Club Pros, Top Ranked Juniors, Division 1 College Players &amp; and elite Amateurs. The Subject Pool consisted of 71 Males and 9 Females.</p>
<p>This video shows a &quot;real time&quot; recording during the research with an audio explanation of the use of Ground Reaction Force in a UPPER CORE Subject. Dr. Giombetti is narrating the results of an Anterior Zone (Upper Core) player in this video.</p>
<iframe width="560" height="315" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/NYkBMGoLiLk" frameborder="0" allow="autoplay; encrypted-media" allowfullscreen></iframe>  
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<blockquote>
<p><strong>When doing the Wright Balance® Downswing Club Path Test, what is the likely shot a hip line that looks like this produce?</strong></p>
</blockquote>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/h1R12p0"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/h1R12p0.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<p>A raised trail hip, a steep angle of approach and a pulled or blocked shot</p>
<h2 id="thewrightbalanceinteriorzonemiddlecoresequencingofmotion">The Wright Balance® Interior Zone / Middle Core Sequencing of Motion</h2>
<p>Approximately thirty (30) percent of the male Population in the US measures as an Interior Zone / Middle Core player.  That percentage was determined from measurements of over 3000 US players of all levels.</p>
<p>The Interior Zone / Middle Core player's hip turn is moderate.  A signature of the Interior Zone Swing at the top is in the position of the lead knee and Center of Mass (COM).  When motion is paused at the top, the lead knee of the Interior Zone player points at the front edge or middle of the ball.  The Center of Mass is centered over the pelvis.  There is little to no body movement to the trail side.</p>
<p>Note the stance width of the Interior Zone / Middle Core Player compared to the Anterior Zone / Upper Core and Posterior Zone / Lower Core Player. The Interior Zone Player has a wider Stance Width than the Anterior Zone Player.  The Posterior Zone Player has the widest Stance Width.</p>
<p>The Interior Zone swing is the swing most students wish to emulate without understanding which Core Zone swing naturally fits their body or if their trail arm delivery matches that of the Interior Zone player (154 - 158 degree Carrying / Power Angle)</p>
<p>A characteristic of the Interior Zone / Middle Core player is a carrying or power angle of 154 to 157.  That equals a Carrying  / Power angle which allows the trail elbow to seat on the trail hip in the downswing producing the &quot;side on&quot; (also coined by EA Tischler) delivery of the Interior Zone / Middle Core player.</p>
<p>One of the most famous Interior Zone / Middle Core Players is Sam Snead.  Sam has won more PGA events that any other player, even, as of this writing, Tiger Woods.  The only major he didn't win was the US Open.</p>
<p>If you go to minute 6:50 of this video, Sam describes how he starts his swing with a forward press of the body and then &quot;everything goes together&quot;.</p>
<iframe width="560" height="315" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/_8JbrLG4NZU?si=-gW7-bKZnsVXEGZj" title="YouTube video player" frameborder="0" allow="accelerometer; autoplay; clipboard-write; encrypted-media; gyroscope; picture-in-picture; web-share" referrerpolicy="strict-origin-when-cross-origin" allowfullscreen></iframe>
<p>Sam's description in this video of &quot;everything goes together&quot; is the sequencing of motion taught to all Interior Zone / Middle Core players. These images of Sam at the top of his swing show his lead knee pointed at the ball and his center of mass over his pelvis.  This sequencing of motion is what creates the lead knee and center of mass position.</p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/p1aDI29"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/p1aDI29.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/zwLUPQu"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/zwLUPQu.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p>If you look carefully in this brief video of Sam Snead you will notice the bump of his trail knee toward the target as he starts his swing.</p>
<iframe width="315" height="560" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/IA0kDzgb-K0" title="Watch This 10x BEFORE Your Next Round of Golf | Sam Snead ⛳ #golf" frameborder="0" allow="accelerometer; autoplay; clipboard-write; encrypted-media; gyroscope; picture-in-picture; web-share" referrerpolicy="strict-origin-when-cross-origin" allowfullscreen></iframe>
<p>What does that bump of the trail knee do?  It sets Sam's body in a position to start the club back with his upper and lower core or, as he describes it, &quot;everything goes together&quot;.  Also, if you set up with an open hip line, bump that trail knee and stop, stand tall and check your hip line you will notice that your hips just squared.  The subtleties of how great players squared their hips are numerous.  That information is covered in other Chapters.</p>
<p>Interestingly, Bobby Jones was also a Interior Zone / Middle Core Player.  His teacher, Stewart Maiden, taught all of his students to &quot;start everything back together.</p>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<p>When you observe the lead knee pointed at the ball as shown here, what does it tell you about the player?</p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/5yviiwX"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/5yviiwX.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<p>The only thing this position at the top of the swing tells us is that the golf swing was started with the Upper and Lower Body simultaneously.  Note: Anyone can create these positions at the top of the swing by sequencing of motion.  You cannot determine the Dominant Zone by the positions at the top of the Swing.  The only way to determine the Dominant Zone is through the screening using tape around a fingernail and the Dominant Power Spot on the other hand.  When the hips square with changes in Power Spot pressure, you have found the Dominant Zone.</p>
<p>If you are a Wright Balance® <strong>Interior Zone</strong> player,  when you add knee flex, your weight will move to a position behind the balls of your feet and forward of the center of your arches, right between the balance points of Upper and Lower Core (Anterior and Poster Zone) Players as shown here.</p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/3in6Tq8"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/3in6Tq8.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p>The following video  shows how the Interior Zone player plays with their balance just behind the balls of their feet and forward of the center of their arches; sets their posture; starts their swing sequence and uses the ground for power in their swing.</p>
<iframe width="560" height="315" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/-hXNCiedzHs" title="YouTube video player" frameborder="0" allow="accelerometer; autoplay; clipboard-write; encrypted-media; gyroscope; picture-in-picture" allowfullscreen></iframe>
<p>Notice at the top of your motion drill, <strong>IF</strong> you start your motion with <strong>Both</strong> your upper (shoulders) and your lower body (hips), that your center of mass at the top of your &quot;swing&quot; is centered over your pelvis and your lead knee points at the ball.</p>
<blockquote>
<p><strong>Note</strong>: If you do the Wright Balance®  Express with one of the 11 black stance widths, you will experience the motion and characteristics described here.  The Wright Balance® Express  in one of the 11 Interior Zone / Middle Core Stance Wdiths places your balance just behind the balls of your feet and just forward of the center of your arches in all stance widths. The wider the Stance Width the more your balance will move closer to the center of your arches.</p>
</blockquote>
<p>As long as you start your motion with both your Lower Core and your Upper Core (everything together), you will notice that your center of mass loads over the Center of your Pelvis.  Stop at the top and do the Wright Balance® Downswing Path Test (DPT).  When you stop, stand tall and check your hip line, if your hips remain square, your Posture &amp; Sequence of Motion to the top is accurate.</p>
<p>Note in the images of Interior Zone Players below that the lead knee points at the ball and your are very centered over the ball (Center of Mass). Those positions are exactly what you should have observed in yourself during the motion drill.</p>
<p><strong>Ernie Els</strong></p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/Mjgyhwq"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/Mjgyhwq.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p><strong>Jon Rahm</strong></p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/p8BlhDh"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/p8BlhDh.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p><strong>Adam Scott</strong></p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/4gp8J1y"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/4gp8J1y.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p><strong>Byron Nelson</strong></p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/RAnjCNn"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/RAnjCNn.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p><strong>Nelly Korda</strong></p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/5yviiwX"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/5yviiwX.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p><strong>Rory Mcilroy</strong></p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/XrX5RK0"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/XrX5RK0.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p><strong>Tiger Woods</strong></p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/KntWqRb"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/KntWqRb.png" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p><strong>Sam Snead</strong></p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/CVCefDN"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/CVCefDN.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p>Start your motion, hands across your chest, with both your Upper and Lower Core.  You should have the sensation that everything (hips and shoulders) rotates together in your backswing.  As long as you start your swing rotating your Lower Core and Upper Core together, you will notice that your center mass is centered over your pelvis. At the top of your swing you will notice that your lead knee points at the ball.  As you turn through to impact notice that you use the ground rotationally, vertically and linearly. Your hip clearance at impact is between the Upper and Lower Core hip clearances at about 35 to 45 degrees .</p>
<p>Again note at the top of the swing, your lead knee moves toward the ball, a characteristic of the Interior Zone player's sequencing of motion. If you tested as an Interior Zone player and you practice the motion drill described above, this is what you will experience.</p>
<p>As you turn through to impact notice that your hips rotate easier than what you experienced in the Anterior Zone. You may experience a subtle rise as you reach impact due to the point of balance in your feet and position of your backside at address.  The point of balance in the feet depends on which of the 11 Black stance widths (4 inches through 34 inches) on which you finish when doing the Wright Balance® Express.   Your balance moves back within the Interior Zone as you finish the Wright Balance® Express on wider stance widths.  If you finish on 4 inches you are more likely to use the ground vertically as opposed to finishing on 34 inches where you would have greater rotational forces and less vertical force.</p>
<p>This video shows a &quot;real time&quot; recording during the research with an audio explanation of the use of Ground Reaction Force in a Middle (Interior Zone) CORE Subject. Dr. Giombetti  is narrating &quot;real time&quot; research data gathering with an audio explanation of the use of Ground Reaction Forces in a MIDDLE CORE Subject.</p>
<iframe width="560" height="315" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/mvLHx1ib-jc" frameborder="0" allow="autoplay; encrypted-media" allowfullscreen></iframe>
<p><strong>The Interior Zone player uses the ground rotationally, linearly and vertically with very little linear motion.</strong> You will experience those forces during your motion drills when your sequencing is correct.</p>
<p>If your motion fits the Interior Zone motion sequencing, you will experience the ground reaction force you will use (without a club) in your swing. You will feel a subtle rise at impact due to the  balance in your feet and, at impact, your hips will clear at about 45 degrees.</p>
<p>Be sure to do the motion drill daily before and after you add a club using the Wright Balance® Downswing Club Path Test (DPT) with each motion drill.</p>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<h1 id="trueoffalse">True of False</h1>
<blockquote>
<p><strong>To determine the Dominant Core Zone, note the position of the lead knee and center of mass at the top of the swing.</strong></p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<p>FALSE, FALSE, FALSE.  The lead knee and the center of mass at the top of the swing only tells you how the player started their swing to the top.</p>
<h2 id="thewrightbalanceposteriorzonelowercoresequencingofmotion">The Wright Balance® Posterior Zone / Lower Core Sequencing of Motion</h2>
<p>The Posterior Zone / Lower Core player's hip turn appears minimal due to their wide stance width, always wider than the Interior or Anterior Zone players.  A signature of the Posterior Zone / Lower Core Swing at the top is the position of the lead knee and Center of Mass.  When motion is paused at the top, the lead knee of the Posterior Zone / Lower Core player points straight ahead in front of the ball.  The Center of Mass is over the player's trail side.  These positions are easily created by how the player starts their golf swing (sequencing of motion). Again, Posterior Zone / Lower Core Players have the widest Stance Widths of all of the Core Regions. Their Performance Stance Range is 20 to 28 inches plus or minus 1 inch.</p>
<p>I am a Posterior Zone Player.  The following photo was taken in 2008 for a golf magazine for an article on setup and posture.</p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/DPe3Bxu"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/DPe3Bxu.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p>Notice the width  of my stance.  I have a good bit of secondary tilt and my center of Mass is already behind the ball. You find a good number of Lower Core players also play American baseball.  Our balance is over the center of our arches.  This balance position amplifies our acceleration through the ball.  Set up over the center of your arches in both feet and notice how easy it is to rotate your hips.  Move to the balls of your feet and notice the stall of your hips as you start your rotation through impact.</p>
<p>Posterior Zone / Lower Core Players are mostly found in women.  Approximately 10 to 15 percent of men show their strength in the Lower Core.  This statement is supported by the research done by Wright Balance® Professional, Dr. Robert Giombetti.  Dr. Giombetti's reseach on ground reaction force by Core Zone showed that 60 plus percent of over 200 players were Upper Core, 10 to 12 percent were lower core and the remaining 20 to 25 percent were Middle Core.</p>
<p><strong>However</strong>, it should be emphasized that this sampling was mostly males in the United States.  I have trained Wright Balance® professionals in countries in Asia and Europe where the sampling of Core Zone dominance was much different.  Please keep that in mind and don't conclude that most males are Upper Core or females Middle and Lower Core.  Our Wright Balance Professional in Stuttgart, Germany describes the majority of male players he evaluates are Middle and Lower Core.  He suggests that this observation is due to the skiing and soccer in Germany.  Perhaps this is a result of epigenetics where training impacts gene expression without modifying DNA.</p>
<p>A characteristic of the Posterior Zone / Lower Core player is a very wide Carrying or Power Angle.  The Posterior Zone / Lower Core player's Carrying / Power Angle is the greatest.  The Wright Balance Express with &quot;corrections&quot; creates a bilateral Carrying / Power Angle of  144 to 148 degrees).  That Carrying Power Angle allows the trail elbow to seat inside the trail hip in the downswing producing the under delivery (also a term coined by EA Tischler) of the Posterior Zone / Lower Core player.</p>
<p>What is an &quot;under delivery&quot;.  This image of Ben Hogan describing delivery to the ball shows an under delivery.  Note the &quot;under&quot; position of his trail hand.</p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/VXPpmZ5"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/VXPpmZ5.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p>If you are a Posterior Zone player, when you add knee flex following the Wright Balance® Express in one of the 11 Blue Stance Widths, your weight will move over the Center of your Arches only if you tested as a Posterior Zone player and <strong>ended</strong> the Wright Balance® Express on a <strong>BLUE</strong> numbered Stance Width.  The Wright Balance® Downswing Club Path Test (DPT) is used at any phase of set up and motion.  If your hips are square when doing this test, your setup and motion are accurate.  If your hips are not square when tested, you can test each link in the swing and determine the link in the setup and motion that is incorrect and immediately correct it.</p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/iACtBH9"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/iACtBH9.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p>If your motion is correct you will experience the ground reaction force you will use (without a club).</p>
<p>Place your arms across your chest.  Start your swing with your upper body (shoulders).  If you have a wide Stance (20 to 28 inches plus or minus 1 inch), you will notice your hips are naturally restricted. Do not purposely try to restrict your lower body.  If your Stance is wide enough, your hips will be naturally delayed in your backswing. You will notice that your center of mass loads on the trail side at the top of your swing and your lead knee points straight ahead in front of the ball.</p>
<p>This video is a guided practice in how the Posterior Zone Player uses the ground.  If you are a Posterior Zone player and you have done the Wright Balance® Express ending on a BLUE Stance Width, just follow the instructions on the video below.  If you have not done the Wright Balance® Express, you will need tape on the second pad (Lower Core Power Spot) of any finger and tape around one fingernail of the opposite hand. The tape will naturally place you over the center of your arches if your Dominant Zone is Lower Core.  Otherwise your balance will not match the Posterior Zone.</p>
<iframe width="560" height="315" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/XT5_BSEP65g" title="YouTube video player" frameborder="0" allow="accelerometer; autoplay; clipboard-write; encrypted-media; gyroscope; picture-in-picture" allowfullscreen></iframe>
<p>Notice at the top of your motion drill, <strong>IF</strong> you start your motion with your upper body (shoulders), that your center of mass at the top of your &quot;swing&quot; is on your trail side and your lead knee points in front of the ball. The Lower Core Player's hips clear at impact at 45 degrees or greater and the butt of the club points toward their Lower Core.  Their hip clearance is greater at impact than the Middle or Upper Core Players.</p>
<p>Pause at the top of your backswing motion and notice that your lead knee is in front of the ball, straight out and perpendicular to the target line and your center of mass is over your trail side. Those positions at the top are a result of the Posterior Zone Sequencing of Motion. Hold that position at the top and do the Wright Balance® Downswing Club Path Test (DPT) Note a square, open or closed hip line.  If your hip line remained square, your posture and sequence of motion to the top of the swing resulted in a club path square to your target line.  Your posture and sequence of motion were accurate.</p>
<p>As you turn through to impact notice that your hips &quot;easily&quot; rotate through to your finish position. The ease of your hip rotation comes out of the balance over the center of your arches.  Now, purposely move your weight over the balls of your feet and rotate through to finish.  Notice how your hips &quot;stall&quot; at impact and you rise. That is  one of many differences between being a Wright Balance® Anterior Zone and Posterior Zone player.</p>
<p>The following are Tour Player's who play in the Posterior Zone.  Notice the position of their lead knee and center of mass at the top of the swing.  The lead knee is flexed and points in front of the ball, their center of mass is on the trail side.  Also, if you notice the &quot;depth&quot; of their hip turn, it is the most shallow of the 3 Zones.</p>
<p><strong>Dustin Johnson</strong></p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/HttLgn3"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/HttLgn3.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p><strong>Brooke Henderson</strong></p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/26zamrO"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/26zamrO.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p><strong>Paula Creamer</strong></p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/DmGt2V3"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/DmGt2V3.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p><strong>Hideki Matsumoto</strong></p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/1R12azo"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/1R12azo.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p><strong>Billy Horschel</strong></p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/ecreB46"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/ecreB46.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p><strong>Tommy Fleetwood</strong></p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/viAWGYS"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/viAWGYS.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p><strong>Jordan Spieth</strong></p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/UVUAOLB"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/UVUAOLB.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p>This video shows &quot;real time&quot; research data gathering with an audio explanation of the use of Ground Reaction Force in a LOWER (Posterior) CORE Subject, a club professional measured as Lower Core.  You can see in this video why the LOWER CORE Players attempt to &quot;Launch&quot; is futile &amp; working against their &quot;Natural Power&quot;.</p>
<iframe width="560" height="315" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/IPFJLtbouls" frameborder="0" allow="autoplay; encrypted-media" allowfullscreen></iframe>
<p>The Wright Balance® Posterior Zone player uses the ground rotationally and linearly with very little vertical motion.<br>
Ground reaction force is natural and a function of balance.  I have heard instructors tell students to &quot;jump&quot; at impact in an effort to use more vertical ground force.  You will never retrieve ground force <em><strong>that you don't apply at address and during your motion</strong></em>. All ground force is natural. It is the application of force / pressure to the ground that results in the subsequent measured ground reaction force.  Again, measured FORCE is a reaction of force being applied to the ground.</p>
<p>This image shows Ben Hogan practicing his delivery from a Posterior Zone.  Note the clearance of his hips, his under delivery as shown in his trail hand and his trail elbow position, all characteristics of the Lower Core (Posterior Zone) player.</p>
<h2 id="groundreactionforceintheposteriorzone">Ground Reaction Force in the Posterior Zone</h2>
<p>This matrix summarizes the ground reaction force by Core Zone.</p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/8q6yojy"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/8q6yojy.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p>The concepts of &quot;Glide&quot; (Linear/ Horizontal Forces) &quot;Spin&quot; (Rotational / Torque Forces) and &quot;Launch&quot; (Vertical Forces) were developed by Dr. Scott Lynn to make it easier to understand and to recall the terms depicting the 3 ground reaction forces.</p>
<p>For a more comprehensive overview of Tour Players Center of Mass and Lead Knee at the top, this is a link to an EBook with many more examples for each Core Zone:</p>
<p><a href="https://instructions.wrightbalance.com/stance-width-ranges-by-core-region/">https://instructions.wrightbalance.com/stance-width-ranges-by-core-region/</a></p>
<blockquote>
<p>Note: If the eBook link above doesn't load when you click on it, copy and paste the link in your browser.</p>
</blockquote>
<blockquote>
<p>You are looking for the eBook titled: <strong>Wright Balance® Matching Characteristics of Center of Mass, Hip Turn and Lead Knee at the Top of the Swing by Core Zone</strong></p>
</blockquote>
<h2 id="whatifyourmotiondoesntmatchyourcorezone">What if Your Motion Doesn't Match Your Core Zone?</h2>
<blockquote>
<p><strong>If</strong> the player sets up and putts or swings with posture or motion that does not match their Wright Balance®  Core Zone, their hips will open or close and the club will get behind them. Their Downswing Path Test with their putter will be outside in or inside out and their ability to use the ground for power in the full swing will be compromised. How can you tell? Do the Wright Balance® Downswing Club Path Test (DPT) and note the orientation of your hips.  That is the club path your putter, iron or driver will follow in the downswing.</p>
</blockquote>
<p><strong>AND</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>
<p>Sequencing of Motion is Compromised</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>Center of Mass no longer will match Core Zone Swing at the top.</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>Impact, distance and ball flight will also be compromised.</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>The club will move &quot;behind&quot; the player as the swing progresses to the top.</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>The club face will open or close as demonstrated by the Wright Balance® Downswing Test.</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>In many players we see that the trail hip is higher at address when observed from behind.  When the trail hip is higher than the lead hip at address the hips are open.  When the trail hip is higher than the target side hip at address as shown here in LPGA Tour Player, Laurie Rinker, this hip position impacts rotation and the downswing path is steep and the miss is heavy pulled or blocked.  The higher trail hip increases the chance of muscle strain and injury. Once the trail hip is higher at address, the Wright Balance® Downswing Path Test will always show an open hip line in the Downswing Path.</p>
</li>
</ol>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/LD8PzFo"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/LD8PzFo.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p>This higher trail hip will be present in about 80 percent of your students if they choose not  to do the Wright Balance® Express. The Wright Balance® Express creates body symmetry and a lower trail hip at address.  Note how Laurie's trail hip is lower <strong>following the Wright Balance® Express</strong> Exercise, .</p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/5tooheB"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/5tooheB.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p>Please recall that if, when testing the Wright Balance® Downswing Path, the hips open in the Downswing Path, the trail hip rises, increasing the angle of attack and the miss is heavy and left or blocked right for a right-handed player.  If the hips close when testing the Wright Balance® Downswing Path, the angle of attack is shallow with a thin miss, a push or &quot;handsy&quot; hook.</p>
<h2 id="kinematicsequence">Kinematic Sequence</h2>
<p>I will cover the Kinematic Sequence and how to test the <strong>IMPACT</strong> Position using the Wright Balance® Downswing Path Test in a future Chapter.  There are many instructors who advocate starting the downswing with the hips without consideration of how the sequencing of motion began from the address position.  For now, please know that the downswing sequencing is <em><strong>just the opposite</strong></em> of the backswing sequencing.</p>
<p>This eBook link is on the Kinematic Sequence:</p>
<p><a href="https://instructions.wrightbalance.com/the-wright-balance-express-the-kinetic-chain/">https://instructions.wrightbalance.com/the-wright-balance-express-the-kinetic-chain/</a></p>
</div>]]></content:encoded></item><item><title><![CDATA[How to Do Wright Balance® Express Using  Only Power Spots on Both Hands (WEB 1)]]></title><description><![CDATA[<div class="kg-card-markdown"><p><em><strong>Copyright, Wright Balance® 2026</strong></em></p>
<p><em>&quot;Truth is ever to be found in the simplicity, and not in the multiplicity and confusion of things&quot;</em><br>
Sir Isaac Newton</p>
<h2 id="howtodeterminethedominantcoreperformancezone">How to Determine the Dominant Core Performance Zone</h2>
<p>The first step is to determine the Dominant Core Performance Zone. It is a simple</p></div>]]></description><link>https://instructions.wrightbalance.com/how-to-use-the-3-grip-sizes-to-do-the-express/</link><guid isPermaLink="false">607cf421cfe0e3000121db7b</guid><dc:creator><![CDATA[David F. Wright]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Sun, 04 Jan 2026 22:04:17 GMT</pubDate><content:encoded><![CDATA[<div class="kg-card-markdown"><p><em><strong>Copyright, Wright Balance® 2026</strong></em></p>
<p><em>&quot;Truth is ever to be found in the simplicity, and not in the multiplicity and confusion of things&quot;</em><br>
Sir Isaac Newton</p>
<h2 id="howtodeterminethedominantcoreperformancezone">How to Determine the Dominant Core Performance Zone</h2>
<p>The first step is to determine the Dominant Core Performance Zone. It is a simple process.  Each person has an 8 inch Performance Zone.  Once you determine their Performance Zone you can do the Wright Balance® Express on one of the 11 Stance Widths within their Zone. The Performance Zones are predictable 8 inch Stance Widths.</p>
<p>This video shows how to determine the Performance Zone (PSR). Then it shows the importance of setting the order of the Kinetic Chain in all activities.</p>
 <iframe width="560" height="315" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/oETC5Yz2KJg?si=pLOgqY9O8IWIl5Nd" title="YouTube video player" frameborder="0" allow="accelerometer; autoplay; clipboard-write; encrypted-media; gyroscope; picture-in-picture; web-share" referrerpolicy="strict-origin-when-cross-origin" allowfullscreen></iframe>
<p>This video shows an Upper Core Player, Colby determining his Performance Stance Width Range (PSR) after his Core Zone is determined.</p>
<iframe width="560" height="315" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/eipFvOy76BQ?si=bKsOzhNqsYcom4df" title="YouTube video player" frameborder="0" allow="accelerometer; autoplay; clipboard-write; encrypted-media; gyroscope; picture-in-picture; web-share" referrerpolicy="strict-origin-when-cross-origin" allowfullscreen></iframe>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<p><strong>In this video I demonstrate  how to find the Dominant Core Zone using:</strong></p>
<blockquote>
<p>a. A coffee cup<br>
b. A dumbbell<br>
c. A Wright Balance bat<br>
d. The thumb of the lead hand &amp; the middle finger of the trail hand.</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<p>a. A coffee cup</p>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<p><strong>How does a coffee cup help determine the Dominant Core Performance Zone?</strong><br>
a. The coffee cup magnifies the impact of grip size and core rotation is greater when not in the Dominant Performance Zone<br>
b. The coffee cup is a distraction so your student will relax and allow the Core to rotate when out of balance<br>
c. Your student will be able to maintain hydration during a lesson<br>
d. The coffee cup or any large cylindrical object is a &quot;tool&quot; to use when you are not sure if the player's hips are rotating</p>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<p>a &amp; d</p>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<p><strong>True /False</strong><br>
To use the Coffee Cup to observe hip rotation, your student should take the cup in one hand, grip the cup holding it so all the fingers of one hand are around the cup and <strong>THEN</strong> step into one of the Stance Widths of each Performance Zone</p>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<p>False (read the last sentence again)</p>
<blockquote>
<p>...grip the cup holding it so all the fingers of one hand are around the cup <strong>and THEN</strong> step into one of the Stance Widths of each Performance Zone</p>
</blockquote>
<p>Note:  The Lower Kinetic Chain (Stance Width) <strong>MUST</strong> be set before the Upper Kinetic Chain.  Only hand the player a cup <strong>AFTER</strong> they assume their stance.</p>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<p><strong>In the video, Colby  picks up the dumbbells before he sets his stance in his known Performance Zone (PSR).  How does this impact his Core</strong><br>
a. There is no impact<br>
b. His weight moves toward his toes<br>
c. His pelvis rotates<br>
d. He describes his weight moving to his right heel</p>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<p>c &amp; d</p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/s7Ajrmt"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/s7Ajrmt.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a><br>
Again, this video shows an Upper Core Player, Colby determining his Performance Stance Width Range (PSR) after his Core Zone is determined. This questions that follow are based upon this video.  If you miss the questions that follow, please review this short video.</p>
<iframe width="560" height="315" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/eipFvOy76BQ?si=bKsOzhNqsYcom4df" title="YouTube video player" frameborder="0" allow="accelerometer; autoplay; clipboard-write; encrypted-media; gyroscope; picture-in-picture; web-share" referrerpolicy="strict-origin-when-cross-origin" allowfullscreen></iframe>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<p><strong>Which of the following Stance Widths should you use in testing the Dominant Performance Zone (PSR)?</strong></p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/ukxpGQ8"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/ukxpGQ8.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a><br>
a. 10 inches; 14 inches; 19 inches<br>
b. 10 inches; 18 inches; 26 inches<br>
c. 8 inches; 14 inches; 25 inches<br>
d. None of the above</p>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<p>b. 10 inches; 18 inches; 26 inches</p>
<blockquote>
<p>Note: The video shows Colby testing the Lower Core at 25 inches.  The Range for Lower Core is 20 inches (plus or minus 1 inch) to 28 inches (plus or minus 1 inch).  Colby's height permits a wider base for testing.  For players with shorter legs use 22 or 23 inches when testing the Lower Core Performance Stance Range (PSR)</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<p><strong>If my student sets their feet at 18 inches and THEN takes a large cylindrical object (cup) in one hand, what Performance Zone am I testing?</strong></p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/Tc8lkFc"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/Tc8lkFc.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a><br>
a. Upper<br>
b. Middle<br>
c. Lower<br>
d. None of the above</p>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<p>b. Middle</p>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<p><strong>What is the Performance Stance Width Range (PSR) for the UPPER Core?</strong></p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/ukxpGQ8"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/ukxpGQ8.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a><br>
a. 6 inches (plus or minus 1 inch) to 14 inches (plus or minus 1 inch)<br>
b. 10 inches (plus or minus 1 inch) to 18 inches (plus or minus 1 inch)<br>
c. 8 inches (plus or minus 1 inch) to 16 inches (plus or minus 1 inch)<br>
d.  None of the above</p>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<p>c. 8 inches (plus or minus 1 inch) to 16 inches (plus or minus 1 inch)</p>
<h2 id="thewrightbalanceexpressusingonlypowerspots">The Wright Balance® Express Using Only Power Spots</h2>
<p>This video shows how to set the Power Spots on the lead thumb and middle finger of the trail hand.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<iframe width="560" height="315" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/zW8jMINSWzE?si=2jhdZ5XP6GwAEKG3" title="YouTube video player" frameborder="0" allow="accelerometer; autoplay; clipboard-write; encrypted-media; gyroscope; picture-in-picture; web-share" referrerpolicy="strict-origin-when-cross-origin" allowfullscreen></iframe>
</li>
</ul>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<p>What did the various grip sizes on the bat do when gripped during the original Wright Balance Express?</p>
<p>a.The size of the bat is all that was needed to recruit each of the Core Zone grip sizes<br>
b.The bat handle recruited the various Core Zones regardless how it was held<br>
c. Pressure was applied to the middle fingers of both hands of the corresponding Core Zone Stance Widths<br>
d.None of the above</p>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<p>c. Pressure was applied to the middle fingers of both hands of the corresponding Core Zone Stance Widths&gt;</p>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<p>What finger of the lead hand and what finger of the trail hand are pressed together applying pressure as the Wright Balance Express is done?</p>
<p>a. The thumb of the lead hand and index finger of the trail hand<br>
b. The middle finger of both hands<br>
c. The thumb of the lead hand and middle finger of the trail hand<br>
d. None of the above</p>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<p>c. The thumb of the lead hand and middle finger of the trail hand</p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/ndfHAzR"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/ndfHAzR.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/BsuRzEB"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/BsuRzEB.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p>The following video shows how to do the Wright Balance® Express using Power Spots on the thumb of the lead hand and the middle finger of the trail hand.</p>
<blockquote>
<p><strong>NOTE</strong>:  This video was shot in early January, 2026 before testing  the Wright Balance® Express while covering the <strong>NON-DOMINANT</strong> Power Spots on the trail hand.  Covering the <strong>NON-DOMINANT</strong> Power Spots on the trail hand during and following the Wright Balance® Express has been tested and concluded with 100% accuracy on 47 subjects with completion January 28, 2026.  When the non-dominant Power Spots on the trail hand are covered with tape during and following the 2 minute Wright Balance Express, the persons hips are square from 0 inches to 40 plus inches or as wide as they can get their feet.  The player is also square in all other planes of motion.</p>
</blockquote>
<iframe width="560" height="315" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/dLh7fenZ6uI?si=_62leu6xRBs8K08P" title="YouTube video player" frameborder="0" allow="accelerometer; autoplay; clipboard-write; encrypted-media; gyroscope; picture-in-picture; web-share" referrerpolicy="strict-origin-when-cross-origin" allowfullscreen></iframe>
<blockquote></blockquote>
</div>]]></content:encoded></item><item><title><![CDATA[Harvey Penick Grip & Wrist Cock Parts 1-3 (WEB 2)]]></title><description><![CDATA[<div class="kg-card-markdown"><h3 id="october132025zoomsession">October 13, 2025 Zoom Session</h3>
<p>Copyright Wright Balance® 2025</p>
<p><em><strong>&quot;Experience is the measurement of TRUTH&quot;</strong></em><br>
David F. Wright, 2018</p>
<p>This Zoom session was edited into 3 short videos.  There is a brief quiz that follows each video.  If your time is limited, please take the quizzes to test</p></div>]]></description><link>https://instructions.wrightbalance.com/october-13-zoom-session/</link><guid isPermaLink="false">68f9634a33f75d000162ac0f</guid><dc:creator><![CDATA[David F. Wright]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Thu, 23 Oct 2025 23:56:43 GMT</pubDate><content:encoded><![CDATA[<div class="kg-card-markdown"><h3 id="october132025zoomsession">October 13, 2025 Zoom Session</h3>
<p>Copyright Wright Balance® 2025</p>
<p><em><strong>&quot;Experience is the measurement of TRUTH&quot;</strong></em><br>
David F. Wright, 2018</p>
<p>This Zoom session was edited into 3 short videos.  There is a brief quiz that follows each video.  If your time is limited, please take the quizzes to test your knowledge of the content presented in the video.</p>
<p>In the first video, I start with a discussion of the cover story of Golf Digest: <strong>&quot;Swing Shorter, Hit It Farther&quot;</strong>, an article on Jon Rahm.  Then, I introduces a recent theory by our resident physicist,  Dr. Jim Smith, on distance related to clubhead speed and shoulder rotation.  I follow with a  discussions of wrist cock as another variable related to leverage producing power and distance.  I then prepare to demonstrate the variables impacting wrist cock in subsequent videos.</p>
<iframe width="560" height="315" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/FCjXtulxQsM?si=5KyrTJ6CNQBPPmyZ" title="YouTube video player" frameborder="0" allow="accelerometer; autoplay; clipboard-write; encrypted-media; gyroscope; picture-in-picture; web-share" referrerpolicy="strict-origin-when-cross-origin" allowfullscreen></iframe>
<h2 id="video1quiz">Video 1 Quiz</h2>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>The October-November, 2025 issue of Golf Digest shows Jon Rahm on the cover with the caption: <strong>&quot;Swing Shorter, Hit It Farther&quot;</strong>.  Why do you think Jon Rahms backswing is short? But remember, he still hits it &quot;LONG&quot;. As you view this image, note that he has a full shoulder turn.</p>
</blockquote>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/usmU7mg"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/usmU7mg.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<blockquote>
<ol>
<li>His hip rotation is minimal creating a greater &quot;X&quot; factor.</li>
<li>His wide stance width provides him greater power and creates a shorter swing</li>
<li>He has no wrist cock.</li>
<li>He has a full shoulder turn and doesn't need to have a longer swing.</li>
<li>None of the above.</li>
</ol>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<ol start="3">
<li>He has no wrist cock</li>
</ol>
<p>The fact is that Jon Rahm is 6' 3&quot; tall and weighs 250 pounds.  My experience with long drivers is that there is some anatomical reason they hit it longer than most.  Yes Jon Rahm is large but I would &quot;guess&quot; that his wing span is a few inches greater than his height and his torso to leg length creates a lower center of gravity and greater swing arc creating speed the average player is not able to create.  I have worked with several long drive champions whose leg to torso length and wing span are quite different from the average player.</p>
<p>I played a good bit of golf in the 90s with PGA Tour winner, Dennis Paulson.  Each time we played, on the first tee, he would bend over and stretch with no knee flex and place both palms on the ground.  At the time, I was amazed.  Then he  gave me a few pair of pants from his clothing sponsor as his waist and height were the same as mine.  I tried on the pants and they were 2 inches shorter than mine. I had a 32 inch inseam and Dennis had a 30 inch inseam.  That was an &quot;Ah Ha&quot; moment for me.  I began to measure the height, wing span and inseam of every player I worked with over the next few years.  I found that the longest on tour had one or more anatomical features others did not, a greater wing span than height was the most common and torso to leg length was another.  Combine the two and you have the longest hitters.  Dennis competed in the 80s in long drive competition and he was always in the top 3 in distance in the 90s on the PGA Tour with John Daly and Davis Love III.</p>
<p>By the way, the &quot;X&quot; factor is from the 90s before ground reaction force research was published.  This model was formerly presented in a book by Jim McLean in 1997.  The belief was that power was created in the body by rotating the &quot;top&quot; while restricting the &quot;bottom&quot; effecting a torque through the body.  I practiced this in a gym for years while holding a 25 pound disc.  This model works as training for the Lower Core Player as it sets posture and the proper sequencing. However, for the Middle Core (sequencing where upper and Lower body turn back together) or Upper Core Players (where the sequencing is initiated by the lower body), the X Factor does not fit.   This training worked for me as I am a Lower Core player.  However, as you have learned, the Lower Core Player makes up 10 to 15 percent of the population in the US but more in Europe and Asia.</p>
<p>Read on and view the videos as I explain what creates and limits wrist cock.</p>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<h3 id="truefalse">True False</h3>
<blockquote>
<p>Wrist cock has nothing to do with power.</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<p>False</p>
<p>Wrist cock adds power through additional leverage</p>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<p>What does wrist cock look like at the top of the swing?</p>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<p>In the elite player, wrist cock produces a swing that is parallel to the target line at the top of the backswing and you can see the cocking of the lead wrist if you look carefully at these images.</p>
<p><strong>Shane Lowry</strong></p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/Fw9O3ip"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/Fw9O3ip.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p><strong>Hideki Matsumoto</strong></p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/1R12azo"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/1R12azo.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p><strong>Wyndham Clark</strong></p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/1bJMimL"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/1bJMimL.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p><strong>Jordan Spieth</strong></p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/UVUAOLB"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/UVUAOLB.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p><strong>Colin Montgomerie</strong></p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/91qlPec"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/91qlPec.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p>As you read on, you will note that Stance Width is one setup position that can restrict wrist cock depending on their playing Core Zone.</p>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>What is the average outcome of an initial Wright Balance® lesson?</p>
</blockquote>
<blockquote>
<ol>
<li>Increased swing speed of 4 to 6 miles per hour</li>
<li>A 1/2 to a full club increase in distance</li>
<li>A greater shoulder turn</li>
<li>All of the above</li>
<li>None of the above</li>
</ol>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<p><strong>4</strong></p>
<p>Telling a student that they will experience a 1/2 to 1 club increased distance is something I have said and experienced when teaching for the past 7 plus years.  I have heard this from multiple Wright Balance® Professionals as well.  It is speculated that the increased swing speed and greater shoulder turn are the reasons for the distance increase due to the change in balance at setup and the proper sequence of motion.</p>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<h3 id="trueorfalse">TRUE OR FALSE</h3>
<blockquote>
<p>Our resident Physicist, Dr. Jim Smith, did the math on shoulder rotation.  He theorizes that 10 degrees of shoulder turn is equal to 4 plus miles per hour clubhead speed and 11 yards increase in distance distance.</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<p>True</p>
<p>This is a graphic image of Dr. Smith's model when comparing all levels (High index; mid index &amp; scratch) of players.</p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/8m9YoRK"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/8m9YoRK.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p>Keep in mind that this is theory but consistent with the observations  of Wright Balance® professionals over years of teaching.</p>
<h2 id="video2">Video 2</h2>
<iframe width="560" height="315" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/5NeIQTvPAek?si=S7j8pHHWGxxlVA8k" title="YouTube video player" frameborder="0" allow="accelerometer; autoplay; clipboard-write; encrypted-media; gyroscope; picture-in-picture; web-share" referrerpolicy="strict-origin-when-cross-origin" allowfullscreen></iframe>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>What happens to wrist cock outside the Wright Balance® Stance Width Performance Range (PSR)</p>
<ol>
<li>Wrist cock increases</li>
<li>Wrist cock is completely eliminated</li>
<li>There is no impact on wrist cock</li>
<li>None of the above</li>
</ol>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<p><strong>2</strong>  Wrist cock is completely eliminated</p>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>What impact does the amount of heel pad on top in the lead hand have on wrist cock?</p>
</blockquote>
<blockquote>
<ol>
<li>Has no impact on the amount of wrist cock</li>
<li>Too little heel pad on top in the lead hand reduces the amount of wrist cock</li>
<li>Too much heel pad on top in the lead hand increases wrist cock</li>
<li>There is an exact amount of heel pad that produces wrist cock</li>
</ol>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<ol start="4">
<li>There is an exact amount of heel pad that produces wrist cock</li>
</ol>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<h3 id="trueorfalse">TRUE OR FALSE</h3>
<blockquote>
<p>The amount of wrist cock is equal to the Carrying Angle</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<p>True</p>
<p>These images show the relationship between carrying angle and wrist cock for me as a Lower Core Player with 147 degree carrying angle.</p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/x5reFqC"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/x5reFqC.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/3f3LTYO"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/3f3LTYO.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/E1E3lDI"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/E1E3lDI.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<h3 id="trueorfalse">TRUE OR FALSE</h3>
<blockquote>
<p>Leverage and Power are created with wrist cock</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<p>True</p>
<h2 id="video3">Video 3</h2>
<iframe width="560" height="315" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/rXqni1CJHOg?si=oM1PeCY4Jo4hqGJm" title="YouTube video player" frameborder="0" allow="accelerometer; autoplay; clipboard-write; encrypted-media; gyroscope; picture-in-picture; web-share" referrerpolicy="strict-origin-when-cross-origin" allowfullscreen></iframe>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>Which of the following has the greatest impact on wrist cock?</p>
</blockquote>
<blockquote>
<ol>
<li>The Wright Balance® Performance Stance Range</li>
<li>The amount of heel pad on top</li>
<li>Adding the trail hand so that the hands work together</li>
<li>Setting the correct Power Spots in both hands</li>
<li>All of the above</li>
</ol>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<p><strong>5</strong>    &gt;All of those impact wrist cock.  If one of those factors is absent, wrist cock will also be absent</p>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>What happens when the lifeline of the trail hand is placed on the lead hand covering the lead thumb before setting the fingers of the trail hand?</p>
</blockquote>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/QDPIxT8"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/QDPIxT8.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<p>The hands do not work together and wrist cock is eliminated.</p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/zFhZqAD"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/zFhZqAD.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>Assume that the lead hand has a neutral grip and the hips are square.  What happens when the Power Spot of the trail hand is placed on the club before covering the lead thumb?</p>
</blockquote>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/bu0IoNX"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/bu0IoNX.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<blockquote>
<ol>
<li>When the fingers of both hands are extended, they appear parallel.</li>
<li>Wrist cock is equal to the player's carrying angle when the player is in their Wright Balance® Performance Stance Width Range (PSR) and only when the fingers are parallel.<br>
?3. the ability to cock the wrist is diminished.</li>
<li>1 and 2 above</li>
<li>None of the above</li>
</ol>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<p><strong>4</strong></p>
<p>When all else is neutral and the trail hand is added with the power spot first, the hands work together as shown in this illustration.</p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/cFegzDl"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/cFegzDl.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>Why is a hammer a simple way to demonstrate wrist cock</p>
</blockquote>
<blockquote>
<ol>
<li>Your student has likely used a hammer and can relate to the power produced by a hammer with and without wrist cock</li>
<li>You can demonstrate the loss of wrist cock when your student steps outside their <em><strong>PSR</strong></em> (Wright Balance® Performance Stance Range)</li>
<li>A hammer promotes an understanding of gaining leverage and power in the golf swing</li>
<li>All of the above</li>
<li>None of the above</li>
</ol>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<p><strong>4</strong></p>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<h3 id="trueorfalse">TRUE OR FALSE</h3>
<blockquote>
<p>A hammer is an efficient way of teaching wrist cock, leverage and power because the PSR and Power Spots don't impact wrist cock.</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">ANSWER</h1>
<p><strong>False</strong></p>
<p>On the contrary, using a hammer during a lesson, is a simple way to teach wrist cock creating leverage and power.</p>
<blockquote></blockquote>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/EawXAqv"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/EawXAqv.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<blockquote>
<p>However, to have any wrist cock at all, the Power Spot and PSR and posture paired with the matching sequence of motion must also be set correctly.  It not, power is reduced due to no wrist cock.</p>
</blockquote>
<h2 id="usingthepowerspotstodetermineperformancestancewidthrangepsrbycorezone">Using the Power Spots to Determine Performance Stance Width Range (PSR) by Core Zone</h2>
<p>This video demonstrates how to determine your student's Performance Stance Width Ranges (PSR).</p>
<iframe width="560" height="315" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/2Ygd1Wl4SaQ?si=MK2cuRmAoqp9L7k8" title="YouTube video player" frameborder="0" allow="accelerometer; autoplay; clipboard-write; encrypted-media; gyroscope; picture-in-picture; web-share" referrerpolicy="strict-origin-when-cross-origin" allowfullscreen></iframe>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<p>If I want to determine my Middle Core Stance Width Range (PSR), what do I do?</p>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<p>Set a yardstick on the floor; Place your left foot on the &quot;0&quot;inch mark on the yardstick; With the thumbs of your left and right hands, apply pressure to your Middle Core Power Spots on your left and right middle fingers as shown in the above video; Step to the 14 inch mark, add knee flex and check your hip rotation using a bar on your hips or let your arms drop from your chest wall; If your hips are open or closed, step one inch at a time wider until your hips square.</p>
<p>When your hips square at the 15, 16 or 17 inch mark, that is the beginning of your PSR for your Middle Core Stance Width Range.  Next, you will have 6 to 9 inches from your beginning PSR.  Step out 6 inches; if your hips square, step out an inch at a time until your hips no longer square as shown in the above video.  You have found your full PSR for your Middle Core.</p>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<p>Your PSR for each of the Core Zones is used for training from cycling to doing squats.  Any activity that is outside your PSR creates pelvic rotation and predisposes you to injury.</p>
<p>However, golf is different.  If you want to play wider or narrower than your PSR, what grip change do you make.</p>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<p>If the thumb of your trail hand is not on the left center of the grip and is off the grip toward the index finger of your trail hand, you will override the impact of the PSR and your hips will be square in any stance width as long as your posture and grip fit your Core Zone.</p>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<p>If you are <em><strong>inside</strong></em> your PSR with a trail thumb over the grip as described in the above answer with a neutral grip and posture, what impact does this have on wrist cock?</p>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<p>There is no adverse impact on wrist cock.  Wrist cock will be equal to your carrying angle.</p>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<p>If you are <em><strong>outside</strong></em> your PSR with a trail thumb over the grip as described in the above answer with a neutral grip and posture, what impact does this have on wrist cock?</p>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<p>Any time you are outside your PSR, wrist cock is eliminated.</p>
</div>]]></content:encoded></item><item><title><![CDATA[Grip:  The Genius of Harvey Penick (Part 1 Web 1)]]></title><description><![CDATA[<div class="kg-card-markdown"><h3 id="september152025zoomsession">September 15, 2025 Zoom Session</h3>
<p>Copyright Wright Balance® 2025</p>
<p><em><strong>&quot;Experience is the measurement of TRUTH&quot;</strong></em><br>
David F. Wright, 2018</p>
<p>This Zoom session was edited into 3 short videos.  The first video is an overview of the results of the teaching brilliance of Harvey Penick and his students.  Harvey</p></div>]]></description><link>https://instructions.wrightbalance.com/grip-the-genius-of-harvey-penick/</link><guid isPermaLink="false">68ce22ca33f75d000162abd3</guid><dc:creator><![CDATA[David F. Wright]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Wed, 24 Sep 2025 20:43:46 GMT</pubDate><content:encoded><![CDATA[<div class="kg-card-markdown"><h3 id="september152025zoomsession">September 15, 2025 Zoom Session</h3>
<p>Copyright Wright Balance® 2025</p>
<p><em><strong>&quot;Experience is the measurement of TRUTH&quot;</strong></em><br>
David F. Wright, 2018</p>
<p>This Zoom session was edited into 3 short videos.  The first video is an overview of the results of the teaching brilliance of Harvey Penick and his students.  Harvey Penicks' students included:</p>
<ul>
<li>
<blockquote>
<p>Betsy Rawls  55 LPGA Tour Wins</p>
</blockquote>
</li>
<li>
<blockquote>
<p>Kathy Whitworth  88 LPGA Tour Wins</p>
</blockquote>
</li>
<li>
<blockquote>
<p>Sandra Palmer 19 LPGA Wins</p>
</blockquote>
</li>
<li>
<blockquote>
<p>Tom Kite  19 PGA Tour Wins</p>
</blockquote>
</li>
<li>
<blockquote>
<p>Ben Crenshaw 19 PGA Tour Wins**</p>
</blockquote>
</li>
</ul>
<blockquote>
<p>...mention a few of Harvey Penick's numerous students**</p>
</blockquote>
<p>I also discussed the current use of the latest technology for balance, ground reaction force, etc. compared to traditional instruction and how pros and amateurs have progressed in each.</p>
<p>There is a brief quiz that follows each of these videos.  If your time is limited, please take the quiz to test your knowledge of the content presented in the video.</p>
<h2 id="harveypenickanintroductiontogrip">Harvey Penick: An Introduction to Grip</h2>
<iframe width="560" height="315" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/bHxXMj40pfw?si=u_R37atsOY_uUNnt" title="YouTube video player" frameborder="0" allow="accelerometer; autoplay; clipboard-write; encrypted-media; gyroscope; picture-in-picture; web-share" referrerpolicy="strict-origin-when-cross-origin" allowfullscreen></iframe>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<p><strong>Which of the following is a Harvey Penick quote?</strong></p>
<blockquote>
<p>a. &quot;Learn to grip a putter before irons or woods&quot;<br>
b. &quot;Learn to grip a short iron first&quot;<br>
c. &quot;Use a yardstick to learn to grip a club&quot;<br>
d. &quot;Grip the club like a live bird&quot;</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<p>c. &quot;Use a yardstick to learn to grip a club&quot;</p>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<blockquote>
<p><strong>The average 18 hole score for the male amateur golfer in the US is:</strong><br>
**<br>
a. 105<br>
b. 99<br>
c. 94<br>
d. 90</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<p>c. 94</p>
<p>The average 18 hole score for female amateur golfers is 99</p>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<h2 id="trueorfalse">True or False</h2>
<blockquote>
<p><strong>The average score for the male golfer (94) continues to decrease annually with the expanded use of modern technology (Balance Systems, Ground Reaction Force Measurements; 3D models and avatars of the players golf swing)</strong></p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<p>False</p>
<p>The average 18 hole score for male and female golfers (94 &amp; 99 respectively) hasn't changed in decades.  The only beneficiaries of modern technology are the elite players who use these systems to fine tune their already advanced skills.</p>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<p><strong>Harvey Penick's teaching included which of the following comments:</strong></p>
<blockquote>
<p>a. &quot;Take Dead Aim&quot;<br>
b. &quot;The woods are full of long hitters&quot;<br>
c. &quot;During your swing you should have 100% focus on nothing but target&quot;<br>
d. a and b<br>
e. none of the above<br>
f. a, b and c</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<p>f. a, b and c</p>
<h2 id="griphowmuchheelpadshouldbeontop">Grip: How Much Heel Pad Should be On Top?</h2>
<iframe width="560" height="315" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/WDgg5rWmaBk?si=UN56HmNE99P0dFS5" title="YouTube video player" frameborder="0" allow="accelerometer; autoplay; clipboard-write; encrypted-media; gyroscope; picture-in-picture; web-share" referrerpolicy="strict-origin-when-cross-origin" allowfullscreen></iframe>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<h2 id="trueorfalse">True or False</h2>
<p><strong>Setting the heel pad on top is simple to demonstrate with a yardstick or paint stick.  As long as the player sets the heel pad on top, their hips will be square.</strong></p>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<p>False</p>
<p>When too much or too little heel pad is set on top, the hips rotate open or closed as does the clubface.  There is a correct amount of heel pad that is simple to demonstrate.  Be certain to mark your students heel pad position on their palm and golf glove at the point where the yardstick or paint stick crosses the heel pad as shown in the video.</p>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<p><strong>The video demonstrates how important it is to practice within the Wright Balance® 8 inch Performance Stance Width Range (PSR) for the matching Core Zone when practicing the grip.</strong></p>
<p><strong>Assume the player is set in their correct stance width range (PSR) and when they cock their lead wrist, their wrist is flat and they see the edge of the colored paint stick or the edge of the clubface indicator card.  What happens when the player steps wider or narrower than their 8 inch stance width range?</strong></p>
<blockquote>
<p>a. The hips rotate open or closed<br>
b. The paint stick rotates to an open or closed clubface position<br>
c. Neither a or b<br>
d. Both a and b**</p>
</blockquote>
<h2 id="answer">Answer</h2>
<p>d. Both a and b</p>
<h1 id="reviewquestion">Review Question</h1>
<p>During the September August 2025 Zoom sessions I covered the Wright Balance® Performance Stance Width Ranges (PSR) for the Upper, Middle &amp; Lower Core Zones.  What is the Wright Balance® Performance Stance Width Range (PSR) for the Middle Core Zone?</p>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<p>The Wright Balance® Performance Stance Width Ranges (PSR) are as follows for each Core Zone:</p>
<p><strong>Middle Core Zone</strong></p>
<p>16 inches + or - 1 inch to 24 inches + or - 1 inch.</p>
<p><strong>Upper Core Zone</strong></p>
<p>8 inches + or - 1 inch to 16 inches + or - 1 inch.</p>
<p><strong>Middle Core Zone</strong></p>
<p>16 inches + or - 1 inch to 24 inches + or - 1 inch.</p>
<p>Lower Core Zone</p>
<p>20 inches + or - 1 inch to 28 inches + or - 1 inch.</p>
<h1 id="whythereviewquestion">Why the Review Question?</h1>
<p><em>When using the yardstick or paint stick to practice grip, if the stance width range (PSR) used for practice does not match the Upper, Middle or Lower Core Power Spot the learning will be an <strong>incorrect grip</strong>.</em></p>
<h2 id="gripaddingthetrailhand">Grip: Adding the Trail Hand</h2>
<iframe width="560" height="315" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/TmvS5hkP74M?si=UUA7gYLbSNbOXLmJ" title="YouTube video player" frameborder="0" allow="accelerometer; autoplay; clipboard-write; encrypted-media; gyroscope; picture-in-picture; web-share" referrerpolicy="strict-origin-when-cross-origin" allowfullscreen></iframe>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<p><strong>If your student has not done the Wright Balance® Express, they can only play with ONE of 2 grips styles.</strong></p>
<p><strong>What are the two grip styles?</strong></p>
<p>a. Butterfly &amp; Tennis Grip<br>
b. Complementary &amp; Baseball Grip<br>
c. Butterfly &amp; Eagle Grip<br>
d. Butterfly &amp; Complementary</p>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<p>d. Butterfly &amp; Complementary</p>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<p><strong>If the Grip Style (Complementary or Butterfly) used by your student does not fit their biomechanics, what happens to their shoulder rotation?</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>As long as the trail thumb is on the side of the grip, rotation is not impacted</li>
<li>The ability to rotate in the backswing and through swing is restricted</li>
<li>A steep angle of attack through impact will result taking a large divot</li>
<li>A shallow angle of attack through impact will result in a thin shot</li>
</ol>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<ol start="3">
<li>The ability to rotate in the backswing and through swing is restricted</li>
</ol>
<p>The restriction of rotation in the backswing often creates a &quot;lifting&quot; of the handle in the backswing and a feeling of being stuck and unable to make a full shoulder turn</p>
<p>The restriction of rotation in the through swing will create a feeling of a &quot;flip&quot; of the hands.  When shoulder rotation stops, the arms and hands continue in the through swing</p>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<p>An important use of the paint stick is to determine the correct placement of the grip in the heel pad.  What happens if the heel pad is too much or too little on top?</p>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<p>The hips and the clubface rotate open or closed creating a downswing club path (DCP) that is open or closed to the target line and an errant shot</p>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<p>What happens if the lead hand is neutral and the trail hand is too weak (too much on top) or too strong (too much under)?</p>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<p>The hips and the clubface rotate open or closed creating a downswing club path (DCP) that is open or closed to the target line and an errant shot</p>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<p>Assume your student is using a yardstick or paint stick to practice their grip.  When they practice they are in their matching Performance Stance Width Range (PSR)and they observe only the top edge of the stick.  This observation of the top edge of the stick confirms for them a good grip and a square face.  If, after assuming their grip in their PSR, what happens if they step outside their performance stance range?</p>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<p>They will observe the paint stick or yardstick rotate subtly exposing one side of the stick.  This means the clubface is open or closed.  They will also note that their hip opened or closed changing the Downswing Club Path (DCP).</p>
<p>There is one exception to this observation: If the trail thumb is over the target side of the grip the correct amount, they can play from any stance width.  However, the clubface will move to  an open or closed position when outside the PSR and the hip line will remain square.  That is an important consideration for the advanced player who wants to narrow their stance in the short game.  However, I  encourage higher index players to stay within their matching Performance Stance Width Range (PSR) <em><strong>when practicing their matching sequencing of motion</strong></em>.  Too wide or too narrow a stance width, outside their their PSR will impacts their sequencing and result in an open or closed Downswing Club Path (DCP).</p>
</div>]]></content:encoded></item><item><title><![CDATA[August 18, 2025 Zoom Education Session (WEB 1 & Fitnees WEB 1)]]></title><description><![CDATA[<div class="kg-card-markdown"><p>©copyright Wright Balance® 2025</p>
<h3 id="performancestancewidthrangespsrsquaringthehipswithtrailhandgrip">Performance Stance Width Ranges (PSR) &amp; Squaring the Hips with Trail Hand Grip</h3>
<blockquote>
<h2 id="webgrippsrfitness">(WEB: Grip; PSR &amp; Fitness)</h2>
</blockquote>
<blockquote>
<p>This EBook is comprised of videos of 5 segments of the August 18, 2025 Zoom Education session.  Each video is followed by a quiz on the content.</p>
</blockquote>
<h2 id="videosquizzes">Videos</h2></div>]]></description><link>https://instructions.wrightbalance.com/august-18-2025-zoom-education-session/</link><guid isPermaLink="false">68b3433433f75d000162abbc</guid><dc:creator><![CDATA[David F. Wright]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Sat, 30 Aug 2025 18:31:09 GMT</pubDate><content:encoded><![CDATA[<div class="kg-card-markdown"><p>©copyright Wright Balance® 2025</p>
<h3 id="performancestancewidthrangespsrsquaringthehipswithtrailhandgrip">Performance Stance Width Ranges (PSR) &amp; Squaring the Hips with Trail Hand Grip</h3>
<blockquote>
<h2 id="webgrippsrfitness">(WEB: Grip; PSR &amp; Fitness)</h2>
</blockquote>
<blockquote>
<p>This EBook is comprised of videos of 5 segments of the August 18, 2025 Zoom Education session.  Each video is followed by a quiz on the content.</p>
</blockquote>
<h2 id="videosquizzes">Videos &amp; Quizzes</h2>
<blockquote>
<p><strong>1</strong> <em>Using the Power Spots to Determine your Performance Stance Width Range (<strong>PSR</strong>) by Core Zone</em></p>
<p><strong>2</strong> <em>Keeping the Hips Square with a Trail Hand Grip Change</em></p>
<p><strong>3</strong> <em>Rotational &amp; Oblique Slings Corrections Must be in the 8 Inch Performance Stance Width Range<strong>PSR</strong> for the Core Zone</em></p>
<p><strong>4</strong> <em>There are Ideal Performance Stance Width Ranges (<strong>PSR</strong>) Zones for All Activities from Exercise to Cycling to Running to <strong>All</strong> Sports</em></p>
<p><strong>5</strong>   <em>The Impact of Exercise Inside &amp; Outside the Core Performance Stance Width Range (<strong>PSR</strong>)</em></p>
</blockquote>
<h2 id="1usingthepowerspotstodetermineperformancestancewidthrangepsrbycorezone">1. Using the Power Spots to Determine Performance Stance Width Range (PSR) by Core Zone</h2>
<iframe width="560" height="315" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/2Ygd1Wl4SaQ?si=MK2cuRmAoqp9L7k8" title="YouTube video player" frameborder="0" allow="accelerometer; autoplay; clipboard-write; encrypted-media; gyroscope; picture-in-picture; web-share" referrerpolicy="strict-origin-when-cross-origin" allowfullscreen></iframe>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<blockquote>
<p>**When I applied pressure to my Middle Core Power Spots on the middle finger of each hand in this video, what stance width range did I  find? **</p>
</blockquote>
<ol>
<li>My hips were square between 8 and 24 inches</li>
<li>My hips were square between 12 and 20 inches</li>
<li>My hips were square between 16 and 24 inches</li>
<li>None of the above</li>
</ol>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<ol start="3">
<li>My hips were square between 16 and 24 inches</li>
</ol>
<blockquote>
<p>Note:</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<blockquote>
<p><strong>True or False</strong></p>
</blockquote>
<p>Your student's hips will <strong>always</strong> square between 8 and 16 inches when applying pressure to an <strong>Upper Core</strong> Power Spot.</p>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<p><em><strong>False</strong></em></p>
<blockquote>
<p>That performance stance width range was specific to me, <em><strong>not all players</strong></em>.  I have found only 4 other players who share the same ranges as I. However, you will likely find the majority of your student <strong>plus or minus one inch</strong> in the Upper, Middle and Lower Core performance stance Width ranges.</p>
</blockquote>
<blockquote>
<p>You will also find players who fall within 1 inch of the 8 inch ranges but only have a 7 inch range, not 8 inches.  I have found one player who has 7 inch ranges in their Upper and Middle Core Zones and a 6 inch range in their Lower Core Zone.  Use the following guideline when testing the Performance Stance Width Ranges (<strong>PSR</strong>).</p>
</blockquote>
<p><strong>1. Upper Core 8 to 16 inches plus or minus 1 inch<br>
2. Middle Core 16 to 24 inches plus or minus 1 inch<br>
3. Lower Core 20 to 28 inches plus or minus 1 inch</strong></p>
<blockquote>
<p>Note:  Again, the 8 to 16 inch Stance Width Range is a starting point but it <strong>will not</strong> apply to all players.  No 8 inch range is absolute for all.  However, use the 7 inch mark as a starting point for Upper Core Players; start at 14 or 15 inches for your Middle Core Player; and begin at 19 inches as a starting point for the Lower Core Player. Also note that not all players will have an 8 inch range; Some stance width ranges will have 7 inch ranges.</p>
</blockquote>
<blockquote>
<p>For example,a Southern CA Wright Balance® Professional's Performance Stance Width Ranges (PSR) are as follows:  Upper Core 7 to 14 inches; Middle Core 15 to 22 inches; Lower Core 21 to 27 inches.  Playing Professional, Ezra Evans, a Middle Core player, has a Performance Stance Width Range (PSR) of 16 to 23 inches.  Wright Balance® Professionals Kevin Mooney's and George Puchinsky's Performance Stance Width Ranges (PSR) are the same as mine: Upper Core 8 to 16 inches; Middle Core 16 to 24 inches and Lower Core 20 to 29 inches.</p>
</blockquote>
<p>Note that in the above summary of different performance stance width ranges that some of these ranges are 7 inches and one of them is 6 inches.  However, the Performance Stance Width Ranges (PSR) are close to and / or within the 8 inch ranges observed by Core Zone.</p>
<p>Once you know the Dominant Core Zone when giving a lesson, place a bar on your student's hips and have them apply pressure to the corresponding Core Zone Power Spot on the middle finger of <strong>both hands</strong>. Put a yardstick on the ground and have them place their left foot on &quot;0&quot; Then have them place their right foot in the following matching PSR and note where their hips are square.</p>
<blockquote>
<p>Again, test as follows:</p>
<ol>
<li>Upper Core 8 to 16 inches plus or minus 1 inch</li>
<li>Middle Core 16 to 24 inches plus or minus 1 inch</li>
<li>Lower Core 20 to 28 inches plus or minus 1 inch</li>
</ol>
</blockquote>
<p>Find the width in inches of their lowest stance width in their Core Zone where their hips are square and have them step wider until their hips open or close.  Repeat the &quot;test&quot; to be certain you get the same results and until you know what their best Performance Stance Width Range (PSR) is.  Note the PSR you determined and provide your student with that information, ideally on a yardstick or alignment stick.  They will be using this stance width range in everything from driver to putter to exercise at home or in the gym.</p>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<p><strong>True or False</strong></p>
<blockquote>
<p>Once you determine their absolute stance width ranges (PSR), those ranges become their range for golf, exercise, walking, etc.  If they have an Upper Core Dominance but wish to train in a gym doing squats or wall slides with a ball or wall sits, they should do  the Wright Balance® Express (with tape) in a Lower Core Stance Width.  Then, use the Lower Core Stance Width range (PSR) for placement of the width of their feet when exercising for maximum recruitment of the Zone they are training.</p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<p><strong>True</strong></p>
<blockquote>
<p>**&gt;<strong>NOTE</strong>:  If you missed any of these questions, view the 5 minute YouTube video above, <strong># 1</strong></p>
</blockquote>
<h2 id="2keepingthehipssquarewithatrailhandgripchange">2. Keeping the Hips Square with a Trail Hand Grip Change</h2>
<iframe width="560" height="315" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/5HTVU4PrCEE?si=S6VCd9NjxF3_jGj0" title="YouTube video player" frameborder="0" allow="accelerometer; autoplay; clipboard-write; encrypted-media; gyroscope; picture-in-picture; web-share" referrerpolicy="strict-origin-when-cross-origin" allowfullscreen></iframe>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<blockquote>
<p><strong>Middle Core Player, Xander Schauffele has a long thumb.  This means he is gripping the club on a</strong>:</p>
</blockquote>
<ol>
<li>Lower Core Power Spot</li>
<li>Middle Core Power Spot</li>
<li>Upper Core Power Spot</li>
</ol>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<p><strong>3. Upper Core Power Spot</strong></p>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<p>What is it about the grip of Middle Core Players Xander Schauffele and Scottie Scheffler,  that allows them to play using an Upper Core Power Spot, a long thumb and a square hip line?</p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/1ltPAE8"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/1ltPAE8.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p>or <strong>Scottie Scheffler</strong></p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/i9DUG0i"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/i9DUG0i.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<p>**Notice the Trail Thumb.  It is off the grip toward the index finger.<br>
**</p>
<blockquote>
<p>To experience this phenomena, place a bar on your hips and set both power spots in the same position on both hands. Then go to a Stance Width that is out of your Wright Balance® Performance Stance Width Range (PSR). Set your trail thumb down the center to center left or center right depending on you handedness.  Note that your hips are open or closed when you are out of your performance Stance Width Range.</p>
</blockquote>
<blockquote>
<p><strong>NEXT</strong>, move that trail thumb off the grip so that it is almost touching your lead hand index finger as does <strong>John Daly</strong> in this image...</p>
</blockquote>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/qS2QT7G"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/qS2QT7G.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p>...and <strong>Ben Hogan</strong> in these images.</p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/kGnp6OC"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/kGnp6OC.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/xxSP1FX"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/xxSP1FX.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p>Look at your hips.  They will be <strong>SQUARE</strong>.</p>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<blockquote>
<p><strong>Why not have all of your students move their trail index finger on the top of the grip to the side?</strong> <strong>It is easier than a total Grip Change.</strong></p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<p><strong>Any of the following are correct:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>The grip power spots pre-set the strength and weakness of the grip</li>
<li>New Students will tend to get too wide and compromise their sequencing of motion</li>
<li>Your better players can make that subtle change in their grip as it permits a narrower stance for chipping and putting (the trail index finger must be off the grip to the underside with the putter as well.)</li>
<li>As they get wider or narrower than their ideal Performance Stance Width there is reduced shoulder rotation.</li>
<li>Even if the player moves the trail index finger off the grip to the side, they should practice in their determined ideal performance stance width range (PSR) through the bag.</li>
</ol>
<blockquote>
<p><strong>NOTE</strong>:  If you missed this answer, view the 5 minute YouTube video above (<strong>#2</strong>).</p>
</blockquote>
<p>The following video shows what happens when you test your performance stance width range and then step out of that range when doing the rotational and oblique corrections following the Wright Balance® Express.</p>
<h2 id="3therotationalobliqueslingscorrectionsmustbeintheperformancestancewidthrangepsrforthematchingcorezone">3. The Rotational &amp; Oblique Slings Corrections Must be in the Performance Stance Width Range (PSR) for the Matching Core Zone</h2>
<iframe width="560" height="315" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/BLb1FZOBsQI?si=f1-WrtgioxFfIpPa" title="YouTube video player" frameborder="0" allow="accelerometer; autoplay; clipboard-write; encrypted-media; gyroscope; picture-in-picture; web-share" referrerpolicy="strict-origin-when-cross-origin" allowfullscreen></iframe>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<blockquote>
<p><strong>What happens when you step out of your performance stance width range (PSR) when doing the correction of rotational and oblique slings following the Wright Balance Express?</strong></p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<p>The majority of the time you will see little to no rotation of the hips for correction and / or the correction will only be on one side.  To balance the kinetic chain, do the rotational and oblique corrections within the performance stance width range for the Core Zone where the Wright Balance® Express was done.</p>
<p>This video shows the Wright Balance® Express at a Lower Core Stance Width (12 inches).  Twelve (12) is a Lower Core Wright Balance Express stance width that is inside the Upper Core performance stance widths (8 to 16 inch range).  When I do the Correction of the Rotational and Oblique Slings, note that the Stance Width of correction must be in <strong>MY</strong> lower core performance range (20 to 28 inches) <strong>even though I used 12 inches to do the Wright Balance® Express.</strong></p>
<blockquote>
<p><strong>NOTE</strong>:  If you missed these questions, view the 2 minute YouTube video above (<strong>#3</strong>).</p>
</blockquote>
<h2 id="4idealperformancestancewidthrangespsrforallactivitiesfromexercisetocyclingtorunningtoallsports">4. Ideal Performance Stance Width Ranges (PSR) for All Activities from Exercise to Cycling to Running to All Sports</h2>
<iframe width="560" height="315" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/_FpAse-AGvM?si=aHekSg2Iw0x2G1oJ" title="YouTube video player" frameborder="0" allow="accelerometer; autoplay; clipboard-write; encrypted-media; gyroscope; picture-in-picture; web-share" referrerpolicy="strict-origin-when-cross-origin" allowfullscreen></iframe>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<blockquote>
<p><strong>If I am doing Squats, what core Zone should I use to do the Wright Balance Express?</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Upper</li>
<li>Middle</li>
<li>Lower</li>
<li>None of the above</li>
</ol>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<p><strong>3. Lower Core</strong></p>
<p>When you do the Wright Balance® Express in one of the 5 Lower Core Zones, you activate the region from your navel to your pelvic floor.  When you finish the Wright Balance® Express, you will note that, when you add knee flex, your weight is in the vicinity of the center of your arches back.</p>
<blockquote>
<p><strong>Note:</strong> When doing the Wright Balance® Express in a Lower Core stance width, your lower extremities are recruited / activated. If you do the Wright Balance® Express in the <strong>first of the five</strong> Lower Core Stance Width (12 inches); you will activate your core region just below your navel; when you add knee flex you will note your weight is over the center of your arches.<br>
If you do the Wright Balance® Express in the widest Lower Core Stance Width (36 inches); you will recruit the region of your pelvic floor; when you add knee flex you will note your weight is toward your heels. (If 36 inches is too wide for you, use 6 inches to do the Wright Balance® Express).  However, you must use the Performance Stance Widths (PSR) that match your Lower Core when you do the wall sits, wall slides or squats.  For example, tests 20 to 28 inches to determine your Lower Core Performance Stance Width Range (PSR). That range, will recruit your Lower Core during exercise and other activities.</p>
<p>Following your exercise, test your Rotational Slings with one hand on the wall and Oblique Slings, left and right with both the inside and outside legs with and without knee flex.  Do these tests in your Lower Core Performance Stance Widths, e.g., 20 to 28 inches.<br>
Note:  Remember, the Core Zone Performance Stance Widths (PSR) vary for each of us.  Use the &quot;standard&quot; Upper, Middle and Lower Core ranges to test.</p>
<ol>
<li>Upper Core 8 to 16 inches plus or minus 1 inch</li>
<li>Middle Core 16 to 24 inches plus or minus 1 inch</li>
<li>Lower Core 20 to 28 inches plus or minus 1 inch<br>
As noted, you and or your students will fall within one inch of these ranges.</li>
</ol>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<blockquote>
<p><strong>If I am running, walking or cycling, what Core Zone should I use to do the Wright Balance® Express?</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Upper</li>
<li>Middle</li>
<li>Lower</li>
<li>None of the above</li>
</ol>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<p><strong>1. Upper</strong></p>
<p>When you do the Wright Balance® Express in an Upper Core Stance Width, you have activated / recruited the region from your jaw to your lower sternum.  Your balance at ground level will be from the balls of your feet to your toes.  If you do the Wright Balance® Express at 8 inches and add knee flex, you will note that your weight is toward your toes.  If you do the Wright Balance® Express at 32 inches your balance will be on the balls of your feet.</p>
<p>Use the Upper Core Stance Width when doing the Wright Balance® Express that fits your activity / exercise.</p>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<blockquote>
<p><strong>I have done the Wright Balance® Express in one of the 5 Upper Core Stance Widths.  Then, I rode my stationary bike for 6 miles or I have gone for a brisk walk for 30 minutes. Upon returning from my walk or cycling, how would I determine the impact on my Core?</strong></p>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<p>I would use my Upper Core Performance Stance Width to Test my Rotational and Oblique Slings.  After walking or cycling I would expect the impact on my Core would be my Internal Obliques.  Testing my Internal Obliques would be my outside leg with and without knee flex within my known Performance Stance Widths (PSR).  <strong>However,</strong> I continue to test my Rotational and External Obliques at my known Performance Stance Widths as well.</p>
<blockquote>
<p>Note: If you missed the answers to any of these questions, watch the 10 minute YouTube video in <strong>#4</strong> above.</p>
</blockquote>
<h2 id="5theimpactofexerciseinsideoutsidetheperformancestancewidthrangepsrforthematchingcorezone">5. The Impact of Exercise Inside &amp; Outside the Performance Stance Width Range (PSR) for the Matching Core Zone</h2>
<p>In the following video I demonstrate the impact of the &quot;Performance Stance Width Range&quot; of the Lower Core Zone (or where you have done the Wright Balance® Express).  I then demonstrate what happens if your exercise is outside the &quot;Performance Stance Width Range&quot; (PSR) of your Core Zone.  In summary, the exercise only impacts the Core if it is done in your &quot;Performance Stance Width Range&quot; (PSR) of your recruited Core Zone.</p>
<iframe width="560" height="315" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/ifIQaEnQdk0?si=OXfMTnzr2ajUPr-O" title="YouTube video player" frameborder="0" allow="accelerometer; autoplay; clipboard-write; encrypted-media; gyroscope; picture-in-picture; web-share" referrerpolicy="strict-origin-when-cross-origin" allowfullscreen></iframe>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<blockquote>
<p><strong>When I did wall push-ups outside my Performance Stance Width for a Lower Core player, what impact did it have?</strong></p>
</blockquote>
<blockquote>
<ol>
<li>No observable impact inside or outside my Performance Stance Width Range (20 to 28 inches)</li>
<li>My hips rotated open inside my Performance Stance Width Range but not outside my Performance Stance Width Range</li>
<li>My hips rotated open outside my Performance Stance Width Range but there was no observable change inside my Performance Stance Width Range</li>
<li>None of the above</li>
</ol>
</blockquote>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<ol>
<li>No observable impact inside or outside <strong>MY</strong> Performance Stance Width Range (PSR) of 20 to 28 inches.</li>
</ol>
<p>These observations show that the Wright Balance® Express should be done in the Zone to recruit the muscle groups used in the sport, recreational activities and exercise.  For example, cycling, walking or running should be preceded by the Wright Balance® Express in the Upper Core Zone. Exercise focused on the lower extremities should be preceded by the Wright Balance® Express in the Lower Core Zone and followed by the Performance Stance Widths for that individuals the Lower Core Zone.</p>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<p>What Wright Balance® Express Core Zone should I use before doing calf raises?</p>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<p>Each of the 5 Lower Core Stance Widths should ideally be used when doing the Wright Balance® Express followed by calf raises or any lower body exercise.  Rotate the Lower Core Stance Widths for the Wright Balance® Express when exercising over several days.  In other words, each day of Lower Body workouts you should rotate to a different Lower Core Stance Width when doing the Wright Balance® Express.  You want balanced training within each of the 5 Core Zone Stance Widths.  This would be true of Upper &amp; Middle Core exercises as well.  Rotate the 5 Stance Widths before each exercise day.</p>
<h1 id="question">Question</h1>
<p>What performance stance width range (PSR) should I use for my lower body exercise program?</p>
<h1 id="answer">Answer</h1>
<p>Any lower body exercise I do should follow a Lower Core Stance Width when doing the Wright Balance® Express.  Then, <strong>My</strong> <strong>personal</strong> performance stance width range (PSR) is 20 to 28 inches.   All my lower body exercise will be in that range.</p>
<blockquote>
<p><strong>NOTE</strong>:  If you missed the answers to any of these questions, view the 5 minute YouTube video above (<strong>#5</strong>).</p>
</blockquote>
</div>]]></content:encoded></item><item><title><![CDATA[Elimination of Knee Pronation via the Wright Balance® Express & Oblique Slings Exercises (WEB Fitness 3)]]></title><description><![CDATA[<div class="kg-card-markdown"><p>Copyright Wright Balance® 2025</p>
<p>When standing, walking, running or stumbling, to stay in balance, it is ideal for the left and right knees to be centered over each foot.  That is not the case with 98 plus percent of the population. When the knees are not set directly over the</p></div>]]></description><link>https://instructions.wrightbalance.com/elimination-of-knee-pronation-via-the-wright-balance-r-express-oblique-slings-exercises-web-fitness-3/</link><guid isPermaLink="false">68b27eaf33f75d000162abb7</guid><dc:creator><![CDATA[David F. Wright]]></dc:creator><pubDate>Sat, 30 Aug 2025 04:32:25 GMT</pubDate><content:encoded><![CDATA[<div class="kg-card-markdown"><p>Copyright Wright Balance® 2025</p>
<p>When standing, walking, running or stumbling, to stay in balance, it is ideal for the left and right knees to be centered over each foot.  That is not the case with 98 plus percent of the population. When the knees are not set directly over the center of each foot while standing, walking or running the knee on one side, and on occasion both sides, moves laterally in or out.  When the knee moves in toward the midline it is referred to as &quot;pronation&quot;.  When the knee moves out away from the midline it is referred to as supination. The pronation / supination of the knee, may result in any number of symptoms including the following:</p>
<ul>
<li>Foot, ankle and knee instability</li>
<li>Pain in the ankle or knee</li>
<li>Pain in the arch or other areas of the foot</li>
<li>Swelling of the knee joint (inflammation)</li>
<li>Stress fractures</li>
</ul>
<p>In athletes, knee instability can result in injuries necessitating surgery.  Creating knee stability is not difficult when doing the Wright Balance® Express and the Oblique Slings Exercises.  However, keep in mind that your student has had a lifetime of this knee configuration and you will ideally follow with exercises that strengthen the muscles around their knee joints after the knees are set over the center of each foot.</p>
<p>Knee Pronation or Supination is easily corrected via the Wright Balance® Express exercise in 8 isometric positions while holding a circular object with the hands touching.  This exercise takes 120 seconds.  That 120 seconds includes a brief Rotational Plane and External and Internal Oblique muscle slings corrections following and the Wright Balance Express.  When done correctly, the knee pronation / supination is corrected in all static positions and dynamic movements.  This 120 second correction will last for 12 to 24 hours.</p>
<blockquote>
<p>Note: Preliminary results show that when the Wright Balance® Express and the Internal &amp; External Oblique exercises are accompanied by a Longitudinal Sling exercise (including a Multifidus release program) that the exercises last beyond the 24 hour period.</p>
<p>The Multifidus is part of the Longitudinal Sling. The Multifidus muscle group is shown in this illustration.</p>
</blockquote>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/9Ho2Jx3"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/9Ho2Jx3.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<blockquote>
<p>The Multifidus makes up <strong>ONLY</strong> part of the Longitudinal Sling.  The Longitudinal Sling includes muscles that extend up into the skull and through the lower extremities.</p>
</blockquote>
<p>The following illustration is the configuration of the body prior to the Wright Balance® Express and Oblique Sling Exercises.  As you will learn the Multifidus release exercise extends into the glutes lower skull.</p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/ii1oP6s"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/ii1oP6s.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p>If you add knee flex and, without turning your hips or shoulders, lean your head to your right so your eyes are over your right foot and note the position your right knee relative to the center of your right foot.</p>
<p>Then, again without turning your hips or shoulders, lean to your head to the left so your eyes are over your left foot and note the orientation of your left knee relative to the middle of your right foot.</p>
<p>The following video demonstrates how to check for knee pronation or supination.</p>
<iframe width="560" height="315" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/ViSVZUEUJ-M?si=EqIvwG2XRd7EmmUg" title="YouTube video player" frameborder="0" allow="accelerometer; autoplay; clipboard-write; encrypted-media; gyroscope; picture-in-picture; web-share" referrerpolicy="strict-origin-when-cross-origin" allowfullscreen></iframe>
<p>You will note that either your left or right knee rotates in or out relative to the center of your foot.  If your knee rotates in toward your body center (midline) that is referred to as knee pronation.  If your knee rotates away from your body, it is referred to as supination. The pronation or supination is generally on the same side of your body as the raised hip and lower shoulder.</p>
<p>Following the 120 second Wright Balance® Express, knee pronation or supination is corrected in a static posture and the shoulders and hips level as shown in the illustration below.</p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/pcWoboA"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/pcWoboA.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p>I would encourage you to discuss the importance of the correction of knee pronation and the impact on balance while standing, walking, running and/or exercise with your student. Movement in general and a sudden move in particular while running, walking or lifting will place unnecessary stress on the supinated or pronated knee causing a strain, sprain or tear. You might note a &quot;listing&quot; to one side, a limp or other gait issues as a result of this knee pathology, especially in the elderly.</p>
<h3 id="thewrightbalanceexpressrotationalobliquecorrections">The Wright Balance® Express &amp; Rotational &amp; Oblique Corrections</h3>
<p>It is imperative that your student tapes the entire fingertip area around a fingernail of one finger on each hand.  If it is an older adult or athlete, I would suggest taping the toenail of one toe on each foot with medical tape. Taping the toes will last for a number of days and is easily replaced when it does come off during bathing.  Keeping the tape in place insures that the the application of force during any movement is equally applied through the Core Zone that has been recruited.</p>
<h3 id="rotationalplanecorrection">Rotational Plane Correction</h3>
<blockquote>
<p>NOTE:It is <strong>IMPERATIVE</strong> that you use the 8 inch <strong>Stance Width Range</strong> in the Zone where you did the Wright Balance® Express.  When you face the wall. For example:</p>
</blockquote>
<ol>
<li>If you have done the Wright Balance® Express in an Upper Core Stance Width, the width of your feet must be between 8 and 16 inches during that correction.</li>
<li>If you have done the Wright Balance® Express in a Middle Core Stance Width, the width of your feet must be between 16 and 24 inches during that correction.</li>
<li>If you have done the Wright Balance® Express in an Lower Core Stance Width, the width of your feet must be between 20 and 28 inches during that correction.</li>
</ol>
<p>I have done the Wright Balance Express in a Middle Core Stance Width (16 to 24 inch Stance Width) in this photo.</p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/9k9fCYf"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/9k9fCYf.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p>You will note that if you are wider than the 8 inch range or narrower than your 8 inch range for you Core Zone, you will see no rotation of your hips.  When you step within your 8 inch range you will note that your hips are rotated as you apply force on the wall with either your right or left hand or both.  Hold that pressure or do 1 arm push-ups until your hips square.</p>
<h4 id="remembertherotationalplaneexercisesaredonewithandwithoutkneeflexnokneeflexcorrectsthebackandkneeflexcorrectsthefrontasyouwilllearninthevideosbelow">REMEMBER: The Rotational Plane Exercises are done with and without knee flex.  No knee flex corrects the back and knee flex corrects the front as you will learn in the videos below.</h4>
<h3 id="sagittalplaneinternalexternalobliquescorrection">Sagittal Plane (Internal &amp; External Obliques Correction)</h3>
<blockquote>
<p>Again, it is <strong>IMPERATIVE</strong> that you use the 8 inch <strong>Stance Width Range</strong> in the Zone where you did the Wright Balance® Express.  When you do the Internal and External Obliques correction.  The distance you are from the wall when you do the Obliques correction should be a comfortable distance.  However, as you start the exercise correction, the width of your feet is important to see rotation of your hips.</p>
</blockquote>
<p>For Example:</p>
<ol>
<li>If you have done the Wright Balance® Express in an Upper Core Stance Width, the width of your feet must be between 8 and 16 inches during that correction and at a comfortable distance from the wall.</li>
<li>If you have done the Wright Balance® Express in a Middle Core Stance Width, the width of your feet must be between 16 and 24 inches during that correction and at a comfortable distance from the wall.</li>
<li>If you have done the Wright Balance® Express in an Lower Core Stance Width, the width of your feet must be between 20 and 28 inches during that correction and at a comfortable distance from the wall.</li>
</ol>
<p>Here is an image of how to do the correction of the Internal Obliques.  This is done on both the left and right side and with and without knee flex as you will see in the video. Be sure to double check the width of your feet before raising one foot.  The width of your feet must match the 8 inch range of the Core Zone you are Correcting.</p>
<p><a href="https://imgur.com/bbWw9jj"><img src="https://i.imgur.com/bbWw9jj.jpg" title="source: imgur.com"></a></p>
<p>This image shows a correction of the External Obliques.  This is also done on both the left and right side and with and without knee flex at the starting 8 inch stance width of the Core Zone you are correcting.</p>
<p>The following video shows a demonstration of the Wright Balance® Express from the side.  Please be sure to guide your student through the Wright Balance® Express and provide them with a video of <strong>THEM</strong> doing the exercise. If they have any spine tilt, unless it is part of the exercise, that incorrect position will impact the results of the Wright Balance® Express. I will follow with videos on Rotational Plane and Internal &amp; Oblique exercise corrections.</p>
<iframe width="560" height="315" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/nBFls9ZK6Bo?si=J80MOHZueNiqerQb" title="YouTube video player" frameborder="0" allow="accelerometer; autoplay; clipboard-write; encrypted-media; gyroscope; picture-in-picture; web-share" referrerpolicy="strict-origin-when-cross-origin" allowfullscreen></iframe>
<p>The following 1 minute video shows the impact of the Wright Balance® Oblique Sling exercises and the elimination of knee pronation in both forward and backward motion.</p>
<iframe width="560" height="315" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/YpRc1M7Bju8?si=-U4jo_oK5vnmysKL" title="YouTube video player" frameborder="0" allow="accelerometer; autoplay; clipboard-write; encrypted-media; gyroscope; picture-in-picture; web-share" referrerpolicy="strict-origin-when-cross-origin" allowfullscreen></iframe>
<p>The following 28 minute video is a detailed summary of how the Wright Balance® Express paired with the Oblique Sling exercises corrected the knee pronation / supination.</p>
<iframe width="560" height="315" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/5UzVsxCExUo?si=LtItRWo_1Lr45GfL" title="YouTube video player" frameborder="0" allow="accelerometer; autoplay; clipboard-write; encrypted-media; gyroscope; picture-in-picture; web-share" referrerpolicy="strict-origin-when-cross-origin" allowfullscreen></iframe></div>]]></content:encoded></item></channel></rss>